JP2021035651A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in a player's interest by sufficiently exercising decorative effects by a decorative body.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko machine 1 which includes a flat plate-like game panel 1100 where a game area 5a in which a game is executed is provided in front and a rear unit 3000 which holds a rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 visible through the game panel 1100 and a rear box 3010 holding the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 and fitted to a rear side of the game panel 1100, a functional surface part 3011 is formed at the back of a front surface of the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the rear box 3010, and the functional surface part 3011 is provided so that a center of gravity of the rear unit 3000 is encircled in a frontal view.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 143

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the decorative body is attached to the rear surface of the game panel in which the game area in which the game is played is provided in front via a holding body, and the decorative body can be visually recognized from the front through the opening of the game panel. (For example, Patent Document 1). According to the technique of Patent Document 1, the game area can be decorated by a decorative body that can be seen through the opening of the game panel.

However, in the technique of Patent Document 1, since the decorative body is provided at a position separated from the rear surface of the game panel to the rear, the distance from the player to the decorative body is long, and therefore, the decorative body is provided depending on the player. There is a problem that the decoration of the player becomes difficult to see and the decorative effect of the decorative body cannot be sufficiently obtained, which reduces the interest of the player.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-127350

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player by sufficiently exerting the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Claim 1 of the present invention
"A flat-shaped game panel with a game area in front of which the game is played, and
It includes a decorative body that is visible through the opening of the game panel, and a rear unit that holds the decorative body and has a holding body that is attached to the rear side of the game panel. It ’s a game machine,
The rear unit
A specific surface portion is provided behind the front surface of the decorative body and behind the front surface of the holding body.
The specific surface portion is
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided at a plurality of locations of the rear unit and is visibly provided from the outside side of the rear unit. "
In addition, the following means will be exemplified as inventions not related to the present invention.
Means 1: In a game machine
"A flat-shaped game panel with a game area in front of which the game is played, and
A gaming machine comprising a decorative body that is visible through the gaming panel and a rear unit that holds the decorative body and has a holding body that is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel. There,
The holder is
A specific surface portion is formed behind the front surface of the decorative body.
The specific surface portion is
It is characterized in that it is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit when viewed from the front.

Here, the "game area" is defined as "a reception port (for example, a start port, a variable start port, etc.) in which a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium). Areas where are provided ”,“ Receiving entrances (for example, general winning opening, starting opening, large winning opening, accessory winning opening, V winning opening) to which benefits including payout of game media are given by accepting game media , Etc.) are provided ”, etc.

Further, as the "game panel", "a one composed of one member", "a one composed of a flat plate-shaped panel plate and a frame-shaped panel holder holding the outer circumference of the panel plate", And so on.

Further, the "game panel" may be transparent, opaque and translucent, or non-translucent. The materials of the "game panel" include "polystyrene", "acrylic resin", "polycarbonate", "acetal resin", "vinyl chloride", "polyethylene terephthalate", "polyethylene", "polypropylene", etc. Examples include "plywood".

In addition, as a configuration that is "visible" through the game panel, "the game panel is made transparent so that it can be seen through the transparent part of the game panel", and "the game panel is provided with openings that penetrate back and forth." What makes it visible through the opening of the game panel ", etc.

Further, the "decorative body" may be immovable or may be movable according to the progress of the game. Further, the "decorative body" may be capable of luminescent decoration or may not be luminescent. Further, the "decoration" of the decorative body may be a three-dimensional decoration with unevenness such as a 3D model or a relief, or printing or display (liquid crystal display device, organic EL display device, light guide plate, etc.) or the like. It may be a flat decoration by.

The "decoration" of the decorative body includes "decoration that imitates a predetermined character according to the concept of the game machine", "decoration that imitates a predetermined item according to the concept of the game machine", and "concept of the game machine". "Decoration that imitates a predetermined background or scene along with", "Decoration of a predetermined logo or dialogue according to the concept of a game machine", "Decoration of a geometric pattern", and the like.

The "holding body" refers to "a box-shaped object that holds the decorative body at the front end or inside and the front is open", "a frame-shaped object that holds the decorative body at the front end or inside", and "a decorative body". A box-shaped device that holds an effect display device that is held at the front end or inside and can display an effect image at the rear portion ”, and the like. Further, the "retaining body" may be one that holds the decorative body so that the front surface of the decorative body protrudes forward from the front end of the holding body, or the front surface of the decorative body is more than the front end of the holding body. It may hold the decorative body so as not to protrude forward.

Further, as the "specific surface portion", "a flat portion parallel to the front surface of the game panel", "a curved surface portion recessed in a conical or truncated cone shape rearward", and "a polygonal pyramid shape or a truncated cone shape rearward". Examples thereof include a "recessed multifaceted portion", a "curved surface portion protruding forward in a conical or truncated cone shape", and a "multifaceted portion protruding forward in a polygonal pyramid shape or a truncated cone shape".

Further, the "specific surface portion" may be provided at the front end of the holding body or may be provided behind the front end of the holding body. Further, the "specific surface portion" may be composed of a plurality of island-shaped surface portions separated from each other, or may be composed of a plurality of strip-shaped surface portions along each edge of the holding body. It may be one that is formed, or one that is composed of one strip-shaped or frame-shaped surface portion along the peripheral edge of the holding body.

In addition, as "predetermined members", "a mounting table such as a workbench used for assembly, transportation, storage, etc.", "tools used for assembly work", "other parts before assembly", etc. And so on.

By the way, it is conceivable to bring the decorative body closer to the game area and make the decorative body easier to see by holding the decorative body in the holding body at a position as far forward as possible. However, if the decorative body is held forward as much as possible with respect to the holding body, a workbench, tools, other members (parts), etc. are placed on the front surface of the decorative body during the assembly work of the game machine. By facilitating contact, the decorative body is easily damaged. Then, when the decorative body is scratched, it is necessary to replace it with a new one, which causes a problem that the cost of the game machine increases. Further, if the decorative body is assembled into the game machine without noticing that the decorative body is scratched, the appearance of the game machine is deteriorated due to the presence of the scratches, and there is a problem that the player's interest is lowered.

According to the configuration of the means 1, a flat plate-shaped game panel in which a game area in which a game is played is provided in front, a decorative body visible through the game panel, and a decorative body are held and attached to the rear side of the game panel. A rear unit having a holding body, and a holding body of a game machine provided with a holding body, have a specific surface portion formed behind the front surface of the decorative body, and the specific surface portion is viewed from the front. It is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the chapter [5-9a. Back Box Relations], FIGS. 156 to 160, etc. See description).

As a result, since the specific surface portion is provided behind the front surface of the decorative body, the decorative body can be made more conspicuous than the specific surface portion, and the decorative body can be provided relatively forward. , The distance from the player to the decorative body can be shortened as compared with the conventional case, and the decoration of the decorative body can be made more visible. In addition, since the decorative body can be provided further forward, the front surface of the decorative body can be brought closer to the position in the front-rear direction of the game area, so that when the game area is focused, the decorative body is also focused. It is possible to clearly see the decoration of the decorative body while visually recognizing the inside of the game area. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be sufficiently and surely exerted, the player can be entertained, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the holding body holding the decorative body is provided with a specific surface portion, for example, in assembling a game machine, the holding body holds the decorative body and is composed of a mounting table such as a workbench or the like. When placing the predetermined member face down with the front end side facing downward, a columnar or block-shaped intermediate member higher than the distance from the front surface of the decorative body to the specific surface portion is interposed between the predetermined member and the specific surface portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined member from coming into contact with the front surface of the decorative body. At this time, since the specific surface portion is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit, the holding body does not tilt or swing when the holding body or the rear unit is laid down, and the holding body is stabilized. Can be laid face down in the state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the decorative body from being scratched due to contact with a predetermined member, the decorative body can be maintained in a good state, and a defective product (defective product) due to scratches on the decorative body can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the occurrence, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine. The columnar or block-shaped intermediate member may protrude from a predetermined member.

Further, as described above, since the contact between the decorative body and the predetermined member can be avoided by the specific surface portion, the holding body holding the decorative body is placed face down with respect to the rear side of the holding body. It is possible to perform mounting work and wiring work of other members.

Further, since the holding body is provided with the specific surface portion, the holding body can be laid face down even when the decorative body is not held, as compared with the case where the decorative body is provided with the specific surface portion. Therefore, the holding body can be laid face down even during the assembly, and it is possible to cope with various working states.

When the specific surface portions provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit are composed of a plurality of surface portions separated from each other, it is desirable to provide the specific surface portions at the same positions in the front-rear direction. As a result, the lengths (heights) of the intermediate members interposed between the specific surface portion of the holding body and the predetermined member can all be the same when the predetermined member is laid face down, and the above-described action can be obtained. The effect can be surely achieved, and the labor of assembling work can be reduced. More specifically, when the positions of the specific surface portions in the front-rear direction are different, the length of the intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion of the holding body and the predetermined member when the holding body or the rear unit is laid down. (Height) will be different for each. As a result, when the holding body or the rear unit is laid face down, there is a risk of using an intermediate member having a length that does not correspond to the specific surface portion, and if an intermediate member that does not correspond to the specific surface portion is used, the holding body or the rear unit is used. The rear unit may be tilted and the front surface of the decorative body may come into contact with a predetermined member. On the other hand, as described above, by making the positions of the specific surface portions in the front-rear direction the same, the lengths (heights) of the intermediate members can all be the same. When the back unit is laid face down, it is sufficient to prepare intermediate members of the same length, and it is possible to prevent the use of intermediate members having different lengths that do not correspond to the specific surface portion, and to the front of the decorative body. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of defects due to the contact of the predetermined members, reduce the labor of assembling work, and suppress the increase in the cost of the game machine.

Further, the functional surface portion may have a shape other than a flat surface such as a shape recessed rearward or a shape protruding forward. As a result, the intermediate member that comes into contact with the functional surface portion when the holding body or the rear unit is placed face down is formed into a shape that fits (engages) with the shape of the functional surface portion, so that the holding body or the rear unit is placed face down. When placed, the movement of the predetermined member in the direction along the surface can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional surface portion from falling off from the intermediate member and tilting or dropping the holding body or the rear unit, so that the front surface of the decorative body comes into contact with the predetermined member by tilting or falling. This can be avoided, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, the specific surface portion may be provided so as to face the rear of the rear unit (visible in the rear view). As a result, when assembling work such that the holding body holds the decorative body or the like from the front, the front end side of the holding body is turned upward (on its back) between the specific surface portion and the predetermined member. By interposing a columnar or block-shaped intermediate member longer than the distance from the specific surface portion to the rear surface of the rear unit, it is possible to avoid contact of the predetermined member with the rear surface of the rear unit. The unit can be stabilized while lying on its back, and the assembly work from the front end side of the holder can be facilitated.

Further, it is desirable that the specific surface portion is provided behind the front surface of the holding body. As a result, when the holding body is attached to the rear side of the game panel, the specific surface portion does not come into contact with the game panel, and the holding body (rear unit) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel without any problem.

Further, the holding body is further provided with a regulating portion capable of restricting the relative movement of a member (for example, an intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion and the predetermined member) that is in contact with the specific surface portion. You may. As a result, in assembly work, etc., when the holding body or the rear unit is placed face down with an intermediate member interposed between a predetermined member such as a workbench and a specific surface portion, the intermediate member comes into contact with the regulating portion. It is possible to restrict the movement of the holding body (rear unit) in the direction along the surface of a predetermined member. Therefore, the restricting portion of the holding body can prevent the specific surface portion from falling off from the intermediate member and tilting or dropping the holding body or the rear unit. Therefore, the front surface of the decorative body can be prevented by tilting or falling. Can be prevented from coming into contact with a predetermined member, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, when the holding body is provided with the above-mentioned regulating portion, the regulating portion can regulate the movement of the holding body or the rear unit in the direction along a predetermined member. Since the unit can be made difficult to move, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work in the state of being laid down, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine.

Further, it is desirable that the front surface of the decorative body protrudes forward from the holding body. As a result, since the front surface of the decorative body is projected forward from the front surface of the holding body, the distance from the player to the decorative body can be made shorter than before, and the decoration of the decorative body can be made more visible. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of making the decorative body stand out and attracting the player's attention strongly. Further, when the front surface of the decorative body is projected forward from the front surface of the holding body, the position of the front surface (decoration) of the decorative body in the front-rear direction can be made as close as possible to the position in the front-rear direction of the game area. Therefore, when the focus is on the game area, the decorative body is also focused, and the decoration of the decorative body can be clearly seen while visually recognizing the inside of the game area, and the decoration of the decorative body is surely shown to the player. be able to. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be sufficiently and surely exerted, the player can be entertained, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, the decorative body may be made capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. As a result, when the decorative body executes a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, the decorative body can be made to stand out by the effect, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the decorative body can be made to the player. It is possible to entertain the production by, and to make the player think that there is something good, to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. it can.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1.
"The specific surface portion is
It is characterized in that it is provided behind the front surface of the holder.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the specific surface portion is provided behind the front surface of the holding body (see the description of the functional surface portion 3011 in the back box 3010 in [A mode for carrying out the invention]). ..

As a result, when the holding body is attached to the rear side of the game panel, the specific surface portion does not come into contact with the game panel, and the holding body (rear unit) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel without any problem.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2.
"The holder is
It further has a regulating portion capable of regulating the relative movement of the member in contact with the specific surface portion. "

Here, as the regulation part, "the one extending forward from the peripheral edge of the specific surface portion in a flat plate shape", "the one protruding forward from the peripheral edge of the specific surface portion", "the hole shape", "the groove shape". Things ", etc.

According to the configuration of the means 3, the holding body is provided with a regulating portion capable of restricting the relative movement of a member in contact with the specific surface portion (for example, an intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion and the predetermined member). (Refer to the description regarding the back box 3010 and the functional surface portion 3011 in [Mode for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, in assembly work, etc., when the holding body or the rear unit is placed face down with an intermediate member interposed between a predetermined member such as a workbench and a specific surface portion, the intermediate member comes into contact with the regulating portion. It is possible to restrict the movement of the holding body (rear unit) in the direction along the surface of a predetermined member. Therefore, the restricting portion of the holding body can prevent the specific surface portion from falling off from the intermediate member and tilting or dropping the holding body or the rear unit. Therefore, the front surface of the decorative body can be prevented by tilting or falling. Can be prevented from coming into contact with a predetermined member, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the restricting portion can regulate the movement of the holding body or the rear unit in the direction along the predetermined member, the holding body or the rear unit in the prone state can be made difficult to move, so that the holding body or the rear unit is placed face down. It is possible to facilitate the assembly work in the state, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3.
"The decorative body is
The front surface protrudes forward from the holding body. "

Here, as the "decorative body" whose front surface protrudes forward from the holding body, "the rear surface of the part of the game panel where the game area is provided at least in front is recessed forward, and the recessed portion is formed. Examples thereof include a "decorative body into which the front end is inserted", "a decorative body having an opening penetrating the game panel in the front-rear direction, and the front end being inserted into the opening".

According to the configuration of the means 4, the front surface of the decorative body is made to protrude forward from the holding body (in the [form for carrying out the invention], the back front peripheral edge decoration of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200. (See description of body 3201).

As a result, since the front surface of the decorative body is projected forward from the front surface of the holding body, the distance from the player to the decorative body can be made shorter than before, and the decoration of the decorative body can be made more visible. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of making the decorative body stand out and attracting the player's attention strongly. Further, since the front surface of the decorative body is projected forward from the front surface of the holding body, the position of the front surface (decoration) of the decorative body in the front-rear direction is made as close as possible to the position in the front-rear direction of the game area. Therefore, when the focus is on the game area, the decorative body is also focused, and the decoration of the decorative body can be clearly seen while visually recognizing the inside of the game area, and the decoration of the decorative body can be visually recognized by the player. You can definitely show it. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be sufficiently and surely exerted, the player can be entertained, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4.
"The decorative body is
It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. "

Here, "according to the progress of the game" means "a game medium driven into the game area by the player is a reception port provided in the game area (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, a large opening). Depending on the acceptance of the game medium into the winning slot, the winning slot for the accessory, the V winning slot, etc.), "The game medium driven into the game area by the player is a specific area provided in the game area. (For example, in response to passing through a gate, a warp passage, a stage, etc.) "," A game medium driven into the game area by the player is received at an entrance (eg, start) provided in the game area. According to the result of the special lottery drawn by the acceptance into the mouth), "the game medium driven into the game area by the player is received into the reception port (for example, the start port) provided in the game area. Depending on the type of effect (for example, reach effect, jackpot effect, loss effect, etc.) to suggest the result of the special lottery that was drawn, "," the amount of the game medium that is driven into the game area "Accordingly", "According to the length of the driving blank of the game medium to be driven into the game area", and the like.

In addition, examples of the predetermined "effect" include "light emission effect", "movable effect", "display effect of effect image", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the decorative body is made capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game (in the [form for carrying out the invention], the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 (See description of back-front peripheral decoration 3201).

As a result, when the decorative body executes a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, the decorative body can be made to stand out by the effect, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the decorative body can be made to the player. It is possible to entertain the production by, and to make the player think that there is something good, to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. it can.

Means 6: In the game machine
"A flat-shaped game panel with a game area in front of which the game is played, and
A gaming machine comprising a decorative body that is visible through the gaming panel and a rear unit that holds the decorative body and has a holding body that is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel. There,
The decorative body is
The front surface protrudes forward from the holding body, and a predetermined effect can be executed according to the progress of the game.
The holder is
A specific surface portion provided behind the front surface of the holding body so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit in front view, and a specific surface portion.
It has a regulating portion that can regulate the relative movement of the member in contact with the specific surface portion. "

According to the configuration of means 6, a flat plate-shaped game panel in which a game area in which a game is played is provided in front, a decorative body that can be seen through the game panel, and a decorative body that are held and attached to the rear side of the game panel. It is a gaming machine including a rear unit having a holding body, and the decorative body has a front surface protruding forward from the holding body and is predetermined according to the progress of the game. It is possible to perform the effect, and the holding body is a relative between a specific surface portion provided behind the front surface of the holding body so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit in front view and a member in contact with the specific surface portion. It has a regulatory department that can regulate the movement of people.

As a result, the decorative body that can be seen through the game panel provided with the game area in front is held by the holding body attached to the rear side of the game panel, and the front surface of the decorative body is held forward of the holding body. Since it is projected, the distance from the player to the decorative body can be shortened as compared with the conventional case, and the decoration of the decorative body can be made more visible. At this time, since the specific surface portion is provided behind the front surface of the holding body, the specific surface portion does not come into contact with the game panel, and the holding body (rear unit) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel without any problem. At the same time, the decorative body can be made more conspicuous than the specific surface portion. Further, since the front surface of the decorative body is projected forward from the front surface of the holding body, the position of the front surface (decoration) of the decorative body in the front-rear direction is made as close as possible to the position in the front-rear direction of the game area. Therefore, when the focus is on the game area, the decorative body is also focused, and the decoration of the decorative body can be clearly seen while visually recognizing the inside of the game area, and the decoration of the decorative body can be visually recognized by the player. You can definitely show it. From such a thing, the decorative body can be made to stand out, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be sufficiently and surely exerted, which entertains the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the decorative body can execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, when the decorative body executes the predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, the decorative body can be made to stand out by the effect. Therefore, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, to entertain the player with the production by the decorative body, and to make the player think that there is something good. , It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since the holding body holding the decorative body is provided with a specific surface portion, for example, in assembling a game machine, the holding body holds the decorative body and is composed of a mounting table such as a workbench or the like. When placing the predetermined member face down with the front end side facing downward, a columnar or block-shaped intermediate member higher than the distance from the front surface of the decorative body to the specific surface portion is interposed between the predetermined member and the specific surface portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined member from coming into contact with the front surface of the decorative body. At this time, since the specific surface portion is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit, the holding body does not tilt or swing when the holding body or the rear unit is laid down, and the holding body is stabilized. Can be laid face down in the state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the decorative body from being scratched due to contact with a predetermined member, the decorative body can be maintained in a good state, and a defective product (defective product) due to scratches on the decorative body can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the occurrence, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine. The columnar or block-shaped intermediate member may protrude from a predetermined member.

Further, as described above, since the contact between the decorative body and the predetermined member can be avoided by the specific surface portion, the holding body holding the decorative body is placed face down with respect to the rear side of the holding body. It is possible to perform mounting work and wiring work of other members.

Further, since the holding body is provided with the specific surface portion, the holding body can be laid face down even in the middle of assembly without holding the decorative body, as compared with the case where the decorative body is provided with the specific surface portion. , Can correspond to various working conditions.

Further, since the holding body has a regulating portion capable of regulating the relative movement of a member in contact with the specific surface portion (for example, an intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion and the predetermined member). , In assembly work, etc., when the holding body or the rear unit is placed face down with an intermediate member interposed between a predetermined member such as a work table and a specific surface portion, the intermediate member comes into contact with the regulating portion, so that the holding body The movement of the (rear unit) in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member can be restricted. Therefore, the restricting portion of the holding body can prevent the specific surface portion from falling off from the intermediate member and tilting or dropping the holding body or the rear unit. Therefore, the front surface of the decorative body can be prevented by tilting or falling. Can be prevented from coming into contact with a predetermined member, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, as described above, since the movement of the holding body or the rear unit in the direction along the predetermined member can be regulated by the regulating portion of the holding body, the holding body or the rear unit in the prone state is made difficult to move. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work in the state of being laid face down, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine.

It should be noted that the specific surface portion may have a shape other than a flat surface such as a shape recessed rearward or a shape protruding forward. As a result, when the holding body or the rear unit is placed face down, the intermediate member that comes into contact with the specific surface portion is shaped so as to fit (engage) with the shape of the specific surface portion, so that the holding body or the rear unit is turned face down. When placed, the movement of the predetermined member in the direction along the surface can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the holding body or the rear unit from tilting or falling due to the specific surface portion falling off from the intermediate member, so that the front surface of the decorative body comes into contact with the predetermined member when the holding body or the rear unit is tilted or dropped. This can be avoided, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, the specific surface portion may be provided so as to face the rear of the rear unit (visible in the rear view). As a result, when assembling work such that the holding body holds the decorative body or the like from the front, the front end side of the holding body is turned upward (on its back) between the specific surface portion and the predetermined member. By interposing a columnar or block-shaped intermediate member longer than the distance from the specific surface portion to the rear surface of the rear unit, it is possible to avoid contact of the predetermined member with the rear surface of the rear unit. The unit can be stabilized while lying on its back, and the assembly work from the front end side of the holder can be facilitated.

Means 7: In any one of means 1 to 6,
The game machine
A plurality of receptions provided so as to accept game media in the game area, and
The pachinko machine is provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the reception of the game media at the reception port.

Here, as the "reception entrance", "a general winning opening that is always open in the game area" and "an advantageous game state that is always open in the game area and is advantageous to the player by accepting the game medium". "Starting winning opening (starting opening)" where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate "", "By accepting the game medium at a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, the game medium can be used in the game area. Variable winning openings (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.) that can be accepted, "ordinary symbols drawn by the game medium passing through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Variable winning openings (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.) that can accept game media according to the lottery results, and "games in specific areas (for example, gates, chuckers, etc.) within the game area. Depending on the lottery result of the ordinary symbol drawn by passing the medium, the game medium can be accepted, and the special lottery of whether or not the acceptance of the game medium causes an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous is held. "Variable start winning opening (variable starting opening) to be performed", "V winning that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium accepted in the accessory winning opening is sorted and accepted by the sorting means. "Mouth", "as an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, a large winning opening or an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to accept the game medium" and the like can be mentioned.

Further, as the "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and a special symbol drawn by the lottery means". Special lottery result display means and special lottery result display means for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the combination of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed after the special symbol is changed and displayed according to the lottery result. When the lottery result of the special symbol that generates the advantageous gaming state is displayed, the large winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to generate the advantageous gaming state (so-called digital pachinko machine). ) ”,“ The distribution means for distributing the game media received in the accessory winning opening, and when the game medium distributed by the distribution means is received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. A game equipped with an advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (so-called honey-mono machine), "a game having a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening, and a game to the starting opening". Depending on the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by accepting the medium, the large winning opening or the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game medium accepted in the accessory winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening. An advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by opening and closing the prize opening or the large winning opening in a predetermined pattern (so-called multifunction device) ”and the like can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the gaming machine is provided with a plurality of receptions provided in the game area so as to accept the game media, and a predetermined number of game media are paid out according to the reception of the game media to the reception. It is a pachinko machine equipped with a device. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player by sufficiently exerting the decorative effect of the decorative body.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. (A) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). (C) is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a). (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the back. It is sectional drawing which cut at the eye line in FIG. 41 (a). It is sectional drawing which cut | cut by the aer line in FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the part of the lower plate ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part by cutting the same part as (a) in the conventional door frame. (C) is a table comparing the number of stored game balls in the lower plate in the present embodiment product and the conventional product. It is a top view which shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the upward moving end, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit in a state where is moved to an ascending position. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operating unit in a state where the effect operating unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the moving end. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of the effect operation unit unit which shows the example which provided a plurality of contact detectors in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detectors in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, (c) is the effect operation unit which allows the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of the above. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the woo line. (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front. (D) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AE. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the OO line. (A) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and (b) is a transparent outer layer in (a) while leaving the inner layer as it is. It is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in this state. It is a front view which shows each decorative substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decorative substrate of the part of the production operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decorative substrate provided around the door window of a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100A viewed from the front by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which shows the vicinity of a tank rail enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a perspective view which enlarges and shows the part of the tank rail when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail of the 2nd Embodiment is seen from the rear. (A) is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is (c). It is a perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107A is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line in FIG. 107 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in the cross section. It is a perspective view which shows the part of the tank rail enlarged when the main body frame provided with the tank rail of the 3rd Embodiment is seen from the right rear. It is a perspective view which shows the part of the tank rail enlarged when the main body frame provided with the tank rail of the 3rd Embodiment is seen from the left rear. (A) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and (b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged upper part. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 113 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 114 (b) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail. (A) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of (a) seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a perspective view of (a). ) Is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 as viewed from behind by disassembling. (A) is a front view of the substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) from the front left. It is a seen perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) viewed from the lower right rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) and looked at from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along the key line in FIG. 119 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku Ku line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is sectional drawing cut by the cake line. It is a bottom view which shows the part after the door frame in the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guide piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown by omitting the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and (b) is the board unit of (a) seen from the front left. It is a perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. (A) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a). It is a sectional view. It is sectional drawing which cut at the sea line in FIG. 129 (a). FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit of FIG. 127 and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elimination of the ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prevention of the invasion of a linear fraudulent tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. It is explanatory drawing which shows the dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. It is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of the wiring route from a function display unit in a main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory and the like are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball circulates, and the obstacle nail by cutting the table unit parallel to the surface of a game panel. It is an enlarged front view which shows the left side of FIG. 145 enlarged. It is an enlarged front view which shows the right side of FIG. 145 enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the start port unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the start port unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is a front view of the side unit in the front unit, and (b) is a perspective view of the side unit in the front unit as viewed from behind. (A) is a front view of the center accessory in the front unit, (b) is an enlarged view of the arrow A portion in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of (b). It is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the lower left rear. (A) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel plate and the obstacle nail, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate disassembled and viewed from the front in FIG. 152, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate disassembled in FIG. 152 from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of only the center right front plate viewed from the back and disassembled. It is a front view of the back unit in a game board. It is a front view of the structure related to the back box of the back unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back box relationship of FIG. 157 disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit in FIG. 158 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear. (A) is a side view showing a state in which the back unit is laid face down using the functional surface portion, and (b) is a side view showing a state in which the back unit is laid on its back using the functional surface portion. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back lower front decoration body of the back lower front effect unit and the back lower rear decorative body of the back lower rear effect unit in the back unit are moving to the ascending position, respectively. The back lower front decoration unit of the back lower front production unit in the back unit has moved to the center of the game area, and the back upper rear decoration of the back upper back production unit has moved to the upper side of the back lower front decoration body. , It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back lower back decoration body of the back lower back effect unit is moving to the lower side of the back lower front decoration body. In the state of FIG. 162, the front surface of the game board showing a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit move to open positions with each other and the central decorative body appears. It is a figure. In the back unit, the back-up and back-effect unit is moved to the descending position, and the back-down and back-effect unit is raised and in contact with the back-up and back-decoration. It is a front view of the game board which shows. In the state of FIG. 164, the front surface of the game board showing a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit move to open positions with each other and the central decorative body appears. It is a figure. In the back unit, the back-up front decoration unit of the back-up front effect unit has moved to the descending position, and the back-up rear decoration unit of the back-up back effect unit has moved to the back of the back-up front decoration body. The back lower front decoration of the front production unit rises and moves to the lower side of the back upper front decoration, and the back lower rear decoration of the back lower rear production unit rises behind the back lower front decoration. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which is in contact with the decorative body after the back-up. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a front view of the game board of the 2nd Embodiment which shows the state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of a game panel, and the inside of the game area where a game ball is distributed is shown. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guidance unit disassembled in the right half of the center accessory of FIG. 169 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. It is a figure. (A) is a front view of the ball guidance unit in the center accessory of FIG. 169, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guidance unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 171, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 171 and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 171. It is a cross-sectional view cut by the above, and FIG. 171 is a cross-sectional view cut along the starter line in FIG. 171. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 171 disassembled and viewed from the front right, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 171 disassembled and viewed from the front left. It is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the front component, the game panel, and the panel decorative substrate in the game board of FIG. 174 are assembled, and (b) is the front component and the game in the game board of FIG. 174. It is a perspective view seen from the back with the panel and the panel decorative board assembled. FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the front component, the game panel, and the panel decorative substrate in the game board of FIG. 174 as viewed from the front in a disassembled state. FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the front component, the game panel, and the panel decorative substrate in the game board of FIG. 174 as viewed from behind in a disassembled state. The relationship between the game panel and the panel decorative board is schematically shown, and (a1) in (a) is an explanatory view seen from the front with the LED of the panel decorative board turned off, and (a2). Is an explanatory view showing (a1) in a cross section, (b1) in (b) is an explanatory view seen from the front with the LED of the panel decorative substrate lit, and (b2) is an explanatory view showing (b1). It is explanatory drawing which shows in the cross section. (A) is an explanatory view showing a part of a game panel provided with a specific portion having a different form from that of FIG. 178 in a perspective view, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part of the game panel provided with a specific portion having a different form. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part of the game panel in a perspective view, and (c) is the explanatory view which shows the game panel which is provided with the specific part of a further different form in a perspective view. (A) is an explanatory view showing a game panel provided with specific portions having different thicknesses in cross section together with a panel decorative substrate, and (b) is a game provided with specific portions having a conical rear surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the panel together with the panel decorative substrate in the cross section, (c) shows the game panel which provided the specific part which provided the light-shielding coating on the side surface of the blind hole-shaped concave part, and shows the panel decorative substrate by the cross section. It is explanatory drawing, (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the game panel which provided the specific part which provided the light-shielding sleeve in the recess of the blind hole in the cross section together with the panel decorative substrate. (A) is an explanatory view showing a game panel provided with a specific portion formed by a groove-shaped recess in a cross section together with a panel decorative substrate, and (b) is a game provided with a substrate accommodating recess for accommodating the panel decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the panel together with a panel decorative substrate in the cross section, (c) is the game panel which provided the specific part which filled the blind hole-shaped concave part from the rear surface of a game panel with a transparent material together with a panel decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows in the cross section, (d) is the explanatory view which shows the game panel which provided with the specific part which filled the blind hole-shaped concave part from the front surface of a game panel with a transparent material, together with a panel decorative substrate. is there. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a game panel having a varying plate thickness and a panel decorative substrate, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship different from that of (a). FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the panel plate, the rear surface sheet, and the panel decorative substrate in the game board of the fourth embodiment as viewed from the front by disassembling them. (A) is a plan view showing the structure of a winning opening in a game board, and (b) is a side sectional view of (a). (A) is a side sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the winning opening of the present embodiment, and (b) is a side sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the conventional winning opening. (A) and (b) are perspective views which show the winning opening which is provided with the guide piece part of a different embodiment in the winning opening where the entry direction is inclined. (A) and (b) are perspective views showing a winning opening provided with a guide piece portion of a further different embodiment. (A) and (b) are perspective views showing a winning opening provided with a guide piece portion of a further different embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the conventional winning opening which the entry direction is inclined. (A) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the start port unit and the center accessory in the front unit of another embodiment from the front, and (b) shows the positioning pin and the mounting hole and the game panel in (a). It is explanatory drawing which expands a relationship and shows in a cross section. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part of the positioning pin in the table unit of a further different embodiment in cross section. (A) is an explanatory view showing a portion of a positioning pin in a table unit of a further different embodiment from the front, (b) is an explanatory view showing (a) in a cross section, and (c) is an explanatory view of (b). It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which a part was brought into contact with a game panel by a cross section. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a distribution passage in which the passage is cranked on the downstream side of the detection sensor, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution passage of an embodiment different from (a). , (C) are explanatory views showing a distribution passage having a conventional detection sensor. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a stop prevention portion of a game ball on a rolling surface, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a stop prevention portion of an embodiment different from (a), (c). Is an explanatory diagram showing a stop prevention unit of a further different embodiment, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional rolling surface having no stop prevention unit.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. is there. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side in the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer circumference of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power supply board 630 including a power supply switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. I have.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. On the rear side of the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the game panel 1100. Attached to the front of the peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B. (For example, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out), a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first large winning opening 2006 are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, and the first large winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first major winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. As described above, it is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 195.

Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or displays the lower right unit 2400 and the back unit. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front production unit 3300, the back bottom front production unit 3400, the back top rear production unit 3500, the back bottom rear production unit 3600, etc. are used to perform light emission production and movable production. , Can entertain the player.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 13a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b from the rear side to the right. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. From the lateral fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 23a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b, and the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending shortly to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling the assembly. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the lower member 41 of the outer frame and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a to connect the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool abuts on the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it abuts on the upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 (curtain plate internal space 40a) and the outside to be ventilated through a gap between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through a gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the curtain plate internal space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622 is caused by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b, and the handle cover unit 290 is obliquely upward and forward. The handle unit 180 can be directed into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed through the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device of the game ball B), the main body frame. By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, a part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 is discharged forward. Therefore, it is also released from the port member 47 to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players wandering in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be heard, and the player's attention can be attracted by the directing sound, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to output a deeper bass effect sound, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached at a position to the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the ball is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200. The door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit. It includes a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the back surface of the door frame main relay board 104. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, the rear relay board 106 attached to the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by a player, and the handle unit 180 operates a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference of the handle unit 180 to launch a game ball B in the upper plate 201. This is for playing a game of driving into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the 540.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area 5a of the above is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. ..

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the front and rear and is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed in the lower right corner of the front view and inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, and the handle mounting. Cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a, and the left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b. It is provided with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing forward the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, which penetrate the front and rear of the ball feeding unit 140.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 82). And a part of (see FIG. 83) are connected.

The outer shape of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically, and the portion extending vertically is formed. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and a door frame left side lower decorative board of the door frame left side unit 420. 423, the door frame right side unit 430 door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side lower decorative board 433, door frame top unit 450 door frame top relay board, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame hinge assembly]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 g. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located on the protruding piece 125b so as to be coaxial with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 makes the door frame 3 hingeable with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear front, and FIG. 34 (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the front, and (d) is a perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. 36 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) shows a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock, and (c) is the explanatory view of the cylinder lock which shows the state which was rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening / closing and locking with the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular columnar cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotating together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the key hole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. The second cam member 135, which is rotatably attached around the axis in the front-rear direction at a portion below the cylinder body 131, and the upper end side rotates at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. A strip-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached and the lower end side is rotatably attached to a portion to the right of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is rotation of the first cam member 134. It is provided with a strip-shaped second arm 137 that is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135 on the lower end side. ing.

Further, the cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). The rear cover 138 attached to the 115 and the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are rotatably attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. It is equipped with 139 and.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear surface side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front surface side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is integrally rotatably attached to the rear side sandwiching the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115. The lower end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the front side of the second cam member 135, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side in front of the first arm 136.

In the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated from each other at an angle of 90 degrees about their respective rotation axes. doing. Further, each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is provided at a position where the first arm 136 is attached at a position farther from the rotation center than the portion where the second arm 137 is attached. ..

The rear cover 138 has a screw whose upper end side is not shown in a state in which a shaft portion 138a projecting outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces in a columnar shape is locked in an L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. Therefore, it is detachably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 are made of metal. ..

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 substantially coincides with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is mounted on the front piece portion. There is. The cylinder lock 130A is provided with a rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Subsequently, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided. As shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position separated downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 36A, the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 of the cylinder lock 130 are centered on rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the right portion, and the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the portions below the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated at an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by using a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 will rotate the second cam member 135 in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, in the second arm 137, the upper end side is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is counterclockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force is mainly transmitted via the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. It rotates in the direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward by rotating the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 acts upward. The power to do becomes greater.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 becomes larger than that on the first arm 136. The second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 36 (b)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is applied. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from the normal state, the upper end side is to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached to the upper end side below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. In contrast to the large force acting on the second arm 137, since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate in the direction of.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force is mainly transmitted through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves in the clockwise direction. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. Is proportional to the distance between the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation in the left-right direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes smaller. In the arm 137, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes large.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. The force is increased, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 36 (c)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the operation is the opposite of the above. Will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 so as to be in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. Since the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the key hole 132) is in any rotation position, at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is connected by The second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated by transmitting the rotation, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked well.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided at a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, it is not necessary to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be diverted, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudster who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, there is a risk of opening the door frame 3 and performing an illegal act. On the other hand, since the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool is inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and a fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like. Can be prevented from being done.

Further, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 apart from each other at a rotation angle of 90 degrees with respect to the first arm 136. A straight line in which a portion attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It will be in a state of being. Therefore, by locating the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 at the dead point by either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, so that the first cam member 134 can be transmitted. There is no great resistance to rotation, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly, unlocking and locking can be done easily, and the key inserted in the keyhole can be forcibly rotated. It is possible to prevent the key from being damaged and prevent the key from being damaged.

Further, since the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, for some reason. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the other arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Further, the smooth rod-shaped (strip plate-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position. Therefore, when the rotation is transmitted by the gear, the gear may rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 may be rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a smooth rod shape, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to be caught by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are moved. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and reliably prevents the lock unit 650 from being illegally operated to unlock the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , Not limited to this, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt. , Etc. may be used.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 as a partition between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 is centered on the right end. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the weight of the iron plate 146a acts due to the disappearance of the magnetic force, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c (see FIG. 38B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation paddle 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 167) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is rotatably supported by the ball or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b to move the operation transmission unit 242b downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball pulling member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if it is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by a spring via the operating rod 143c, it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B is formed by the partition portion 143a. It can prevent it from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38B and the like) recessed forward in the upper right when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating the string to move the fraudulent game ball B in and out of the first starting port 2004 or the like is performed, the fraudulent game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 A V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b after inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b by the momentum. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the shape, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit 200. A full tank receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the ball passage 150a and the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. It has a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul ball receiving port 150c that receives the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. The ball discharge port 150d communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200 while discharging the ball forward.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the operating protrusion 613a of the 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of the flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and the flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E in FIG. 41 (a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line of the arrow in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted.

The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the plate unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be operated by the player. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290, which will be described later, and to the front end of the handle base 181. A disc-shaped handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 described later, and a disk-shaped handle base 181 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. The cover pedestal 183, the handle decorative board 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and the handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decorative board 184. It is equipped with a front lens 185.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 195 to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 291d of the handle cover base 291 which will be described later. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 291d, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the ridges 291d are inserted into the three groove portions 181c, respectively. Is inserted so that the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b extending outward radially at intervals in the circumferential direction from the central hub portion 195a, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two extending in an arc shape around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. It includes a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end side of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and clockwise about one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a in a state where the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend from a portion having an angle of 120 degrees in each counterclockwise direction. The three spoke portions 195b extend with a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the rounded side of the U-shape facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 can be detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is turned.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center side of the handle 195, and a flat plate-shaped mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center side. There is. In the three handle guides 196, the mounting stay 196b is mounted behind the spokes 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting the guide piece 291 g of the handle cover base 291 described later into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 penetrates the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, and the rotation angle of the handle 195 is restricted. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative substrates 184, one in the center, three on the middle circumference with a certain interval in the circumferential direction, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. A number of LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric pattern. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two in the upper left of the outer circumference, two in the upper right of the outer circumference, and two in the lower part of the outer circumference. (See FIG. 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decorative substrate 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with a total of 15 systems of 3 systems for each set so that each LED 184a can emit light in full color. I am trying to do it.

Although not shown, the handle decorative board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. .. Then, in the LED driver 184b of the handle decorative board 184, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. The 10 LEDs 184a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

As described above, since the handle decorative substrate 184 has the LED driver 184b, the number of light emission of the LEDs 184a is larger than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected individually (here, the set). Since it can be controlled every), the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electrical wiring can be simplified.

The front surface of the steering wheel front lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and has translucency. The front handle lens 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The steering wheel front lens 185 is light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decorative substrate 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the handle 195, it detects the static electricity acting on the player and makes contact with the handle 195 of the player. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops driving the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, if the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be temporarily stopped. By releasing the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single-shot button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, and an annular handle cover decorative board 293 which is provided on the front side of the inner 292 and has a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface. It includes an annular substrate cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative substrate 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has a rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 has a tubular front tubular portion 291a that has substantially the same inner diameter as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and extends forward and backward, and the inner diameter decreases from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a toward the front. 291b of the inner wall portion extending to the inside, a tubular rear cylinder portion 291c extending forward and backward with an inner diameter capable of inserting the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 through the middle wall portion 291b, and the inner circumference of the rear cylinder portion 291c. It is provided with a plurality of (three in this case) ridges 291d which are projected inward and extend back and forth in the circumferential direction and are provided at positions corresponding to the groove 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward from the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a from the middle of the flange portion 291e. At the portion between the cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f protruding forward and the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, the guide piece 291g protruding outward from the front cylinder portion 291a and the front cylinder. It is provided with an opening 291h penetrating in the lower part of the portion 291a.

The inner wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arc shape whose cross section bulges outward from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three ridges 291d correspond to the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 and can be inserted into the groove portion 181c to make the handle base 181 relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the center of the flange portion 291e in the radial direction. The handle cover base 291 is provided with a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g projects from the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer cylinder portion 291f to a position closer to the front cylinder portion 291a. The guide pieces 291 g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided in three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. A U-shaped guide portion is formed by inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide pieces 291 g and rotating the handle 195 through the guide pieces 291 g. The guide piece 291g can be positioned in the 196a to restrict the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e, and has a size in a range of an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and penetrates the front cylinder portion 291a. ..

The inner 292 has an annular base portion 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and the inner portion 292 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notches 292c which are notched from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are provided apart from each other in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is located behind the flange portion 291e into which the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted from the front. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape so as to bulge outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notch 292c is provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 from the center on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right. It is divided (see FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and control 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups with a total of 18 systems of 3 systems for each set so that they can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decorative board 293 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands and commands from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving signals such as addresses and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. There is. Then, in the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decorative board 293, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver is divided into 6 groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate portion 294a and a front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292. It has a tubular side plate portion 294b, which has a short outer peripheral edge extending rearward. In the substrate cover 294, the front plate portion 294a is located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and the side plate portion 294b extends to the base portion 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and is a spindle type (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , Etc.), and a plurality of notch openings 295b notched from the rear end to the front are provided in the circumferential direction (here, four). The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the plurality of notch openings 295b are formed so as to coincide with the notch 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , Circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 with the handle 195 in the handle unit 180. A portion on the rear side of the steering wheel is inserted, and a steering wheel 195, a front lens of the steering wheel 185, and the like are located on the front side of the steering wheel cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101. It is attached to 101b.

In the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, the central hub portion 195a at the center is rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Further, in the handle 195, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. The handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) at the rear end side of the guide portion 196a between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), And it is rotatably supported in a state where movement in the front-back direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195, the handle cover base 291 and the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed so as to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to being able to illuminate the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be luminescently decorated.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that coincide with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, the handle cover base 291 is provided on both the left and right sides and the lower side when viewed from the outside. It can be made to appear as if there is a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a. As a result, the player is relieved of the mental anxiety of thrusting a hand (finger) into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Can be done.

The notch opening 295b on the upper side of the handle cover 295 (the notch 292c on the upper side of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decoration unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the lower side It can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

Further, when a liquid or a game ball B enters the notch openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, the lower side passes through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292. It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the notch 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are assembled under the outer frame of the outer frame 2. It is provided on an extension line in the inclination direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the solid 40. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is passed through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device of the game ball B), the main body frame speaker. By vibrating the 622 and sending the wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the notch opening 295b on the right side can be pulled with a finger, and the door frame 3 or the like can be pulled. It can be used as a handle when opening.

Further, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B Can be typed in.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily positioned by hooking a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a certain strength without continuing to twist the hand. As described above, since the game ball B can be driven by rotating the handle 195 by various methods, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the driving operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle cover base 291 is used. The handle unit 180 attached via the handle unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 are provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is visibly closed from the front. In the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b radially protruding from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. Since the handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the tubular handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c are provided, the handle in the conventional pachinko machine is provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, which have never been seen before, can be seen in the area where they are, which can have a strong impact on the player and strongly attract the player's attention. At the same time, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game with the pachinko machine 1, and the player who is wandering in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be used.

Further, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can insert the player's finger into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291). When the handle 195 is operated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, when the player grabs the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the operation of the handle 195 can be given to the player a feeling different from that of the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, and the player can be entertained by the new sense of driving the game ball B. Can be suppressed.

Then, when the player is operating the handle 195, when the effect sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the speaker is caused by the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622. The air inside the enclosure 624 by the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 through the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the port member 47 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 is sound pressure. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transmitted to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291 and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. A sound pressure stimulus can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, the sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the player's fingers inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , You can surprise the player, foresee the arrival of a chance, change the amount of operation of the steering wheel, entertain the player, and make it harder for the player to get bored. , It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover. By making the inside of the unit 290 cool and making the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, it is possible to alleviate the stress on the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. it can.

Further, as described above, with respect to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 and the handle 195 The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is applied to the grill member 46. Since the stimulus is given by guiding by a plurality of blades 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are compared with the case where the vibration device is provided on the handle 195. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.), the bearing mechanism, etc. are not damaged, and the handle unit 180 can be made less likely to be damaged. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant sensation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the handle 195 is provided with the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portions 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 looks like a steering wheel of an automobile. Even if the appearance is significantly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without any confusion, and the pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine to play without hesitation. It is possible to make it easier to select the machine 1.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are formed in a portion facing the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. When the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the lower part of the handle cover unit 290 is lower than the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it becomes visible and a feeling of openness can be given to the tubular handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player can be seen. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h that penetrate the handle cover unit 290 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 so as to face downward, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the handle cover unit 290, it is discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid or the like discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

Further, the handle 195 is provided with the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portions 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 having the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c has a plurality of front ends. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be gripped and operated in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated only with a finger, and the outer ring. The steering wheel of an automobile is operated by the portion 195c, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b are gripped by a finger, and the steering wheel cover unit is straddled over the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of performing operations such as picking the inside and outside of the 290 with a finger, and capable of driving various game balls B (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a by a method that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, and the like, so that the player is less likely to get bored and the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 may be gripped by a finger, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be pinched by a finger so as to straddle the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, it becomes possible to fix the operation position of the handle 195. Therefore, in addition to the same handle operation as the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform the handle operation that cannot be achieved by the conventional pachinko machine, so that it is possible to provide the player with various handle operations. , It is possible to entertain the steering wheel operation and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 is in a form extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit. The appearance of the 290 as being integrated with the handle 195 can be made, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and the handle cover unit 290. By suppressing the upward pressure on the game area 5a (door window 101a), it is possible to prevent the game area 5a from becoming narrower, and the game area 5a can be made relatively large. The large gaming area 5a makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, by appropriately emitting light of the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be light-emitting and decorated. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c are made to stand out. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract the attention of the player.

Further, a handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided in a portion of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface. Therefore, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that makes the door frame look unattractive, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and the flange portion 291e and the flange portion 291e that restrict the movement in the front-rear direction. The guide piece 291 g is provided, and even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c to the front can be restricted by the guide piece 291 g or the like. The 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to drive the game ball B, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be driven even if the handle 195 is operated while touching the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used for various driving operations (handle operation) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being driven in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle from being operated using a tool and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. A mounting base (not shown) that is mounted on and projects forward, a dish unit relay board (not shown) that is mounted to the right of the mounting base, and a ball that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base. The rental operation unit 220, the upper plate ball removal unit (not shown) mounted below the mounting base, and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit. It has.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It is equipped with a plate right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 housed inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. An annular effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. A unit relay board unit 330 is provided.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit 350, which is provided with the effect operation unit 301 and is provided with the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit base 315, so that the effect operation unit 300 can project upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310. It is provided with an effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 that supports the unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down, and a projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward projecting output of the effect operating unit 350 by the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360. There is.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged on the right side, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, its bottom surface is from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact (rolls), the game ball B is brought into contact with the game ball B. It is possible to remove the static electricity charged in the machine.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the portion of the lower plate ball supply port, and FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the main part, (c) is the table which compared the number of game balls stored in the lower plate in this Example product and the conventional product. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50B, the lower plate ball supply port 211j of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the central axis. Then, the lower plate ball supply port 211j has a tubular shape that extends straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 150d goes straight to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265. Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a risk that the storage of the game ball B will be concentrated in the area on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is. Then, when the game ball B concentrated in the area on the right side in the lower plate 202 blocks the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game ball B moves from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. There is a risk that the full tank detection sensor 154 will operate and the lower plate 202 will be determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower plate 202. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although details will be described later, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the lower plate ball supply port 211c is extended diagonally to the left front. It is tilted to. More specifically, at least one game ball B can be distributed with a distance between the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at a portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it is a distance.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is to the left of the central axis (line indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the rear end (ball discharge port 150d) of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. I'm moving to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is moved to the left, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is moved to the left. With the 202a closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of the game ball B on the right side in the lower plate 202. Then, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. Since the side wall on the left side of the mouth 211c extends diagonally to form a gap through which the game ball B can flow from the rear end of the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game ball B discharged from the unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower plate 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and released. The game ball B can be properly stored in the entire lower plate 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game ball B remains in the lower plate 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate base unit 210 is an upper plate having a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right and an upper plate 201 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211. It includes a main body 212 and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

Further, the plate base unit 210 is a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. It includes a pre-pulling unit (not shown) and a post-pulling unit 240 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the pre-pulling unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (a shallow rear is open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be operated by operating the upper plate ball ejection port 222, the upper plate ball feeding port, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper plate. After the ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211a is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and the upper plate 201 The game ball B inside is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receiving port of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

Further, the plate unit base 211 of the present embodiment has a ball guiding portion 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower plate 202 to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The ball guide unit 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper plate 201 by the ball removal guide path 241c to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (left part of the lower plate 202). is there. As shown in FIG. 50A, the ball guiding portion 213 forms a part of the inner wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. More specifically, the ball guide portion 213 forms the inner wall on the left side facing the inner wall on the right side where the ball extraction guide path 241c is open in the inner wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c formed in a tubular shape. It is inclined so as to move to the left from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the inner wall on the left side (ball guide portion 213), at least one game ball B is placed between the front surface of the plate unit base 211 (rear end of the lower plate 202) at a portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. There is a distance (gap) that can be circulated. As a result, when the game ball B circulating from the upper plate 201 to the ball pulling-out guiding portion 241c comes into contact with the ball guiding portion 213 from the right side, it is guided to the left front by the inclination of the ball guiding portion 213. The ball B can be guided to the left end side in the lower plate 202 away from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a in the lower plate 202. That is, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) in the lower plate 202.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), since the lower plate ball supply port 211j in the conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as the conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, it is guided by the ball removal guide path 241c. When the game ball B comes into contact with the inner wall on the left side of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, it rolls forward while bouncing to the right, and is sent to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b in the lower plate 202. Instead, it is stored in the area on the right side in the lower plate 202 provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. Therefore, in the conventional product, the storage of the game ball B (indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 50 (b)) is concentrated in the region on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202, and the right side of the lower plate 202 is stored. When the game ball B concentrated in the area blocks the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game ball B is not discharged from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side, so that the tank is full. There is a risk that the detection sensor 154 is activated and the lower plate 202 is determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower plate 202.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball guiding portion 213 is provided, the game ball B that has been distributed through the ball pulling guiding portion 241c is guided to the left region in the lower plate 202. can do. Further, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. From the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) through between the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the mouth 211c and the rear end of the lower plate 202. The game ball B released to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower plate 202, and the game ball B can be stored throughout the lower plate 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game ball B remains in the lower plate 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

Then, as a proof of the above-mentioned action and effect, the inventors of the present application store the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product in the lower plate 202 when the full tank detection sensor 154 is activated. The number of game balls B was counted. The counting of the game balls B was performed 10 times in each case. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50 (c), the lower plate 202 (the product of the present embodiment) of the present embodiment has a larger number of stored game balls B than the conventional product at any time. It was confirmed that the game ball B could be stored about 40% more than the conventional product on average.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper plate main body 212 is closed near the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. Is for. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the rented game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the machine, adjust the volume, adjust the amount of light, and so on.

The ball lending operation unit 220 is provided on a base portion 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the upper plate ball lending button 222 and has translucency, and a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. The return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display unit 226 located below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 outside the base unit 221. It includes a volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape and has the letters "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball type LED, and can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 sets the volume of the sound for directing the music, sound, sound effect, etc. output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. It is for adjusting. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a pattern that makes the sound come from the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. When the "+" side of the volume control button 227 is pressed, the volume is increased, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume is decreased.

The light amount adjusting button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The light amount adjusting button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a light bulb pattern. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes bright when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes dark when the "-" side is pressed.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 have different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player cannot make a mistake.

By the way, when the volume and the amount of light are adjusted by using the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. Occasionally, the effect operation unit 301 is appropriately operated to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the effect display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the loudness of the volume and the brightness of the amount of light are changed, it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the volume and the amount of light can be directly adjusted by operating the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be adjusted in a short time by simplifying the above.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 49. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 This is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is slidably attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 and the rear base 241 which are attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear. The upper plate ball removal slider 242, a spring for urging the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward (not shown), and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241 are provided. ing.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball, which protrudes upward from the portion where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward. A ball feeding taxiway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 below the ball feeding taxiway 241b. It is provided with a ball pull-out taxiway 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides the game ball B to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210. It is formed at the position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c protrudes to the right of the rear view from the part where the upper plate ball-extracting slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side of the rear view is lower. It opens on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an actuating receiving portion (not shown) protruding forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface to the rear side of the actuating receiving portion. It is provided with a protruding operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper plate ball pulling portion is pulled out on the upper surface of the operating receiving portion. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring.

In the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 passes through the actuating receiving portion of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is located at the upward moving end. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 in contact can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves to the entrance 141a and the ball pulling. Retreat from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission unit 242b. The ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side or discharged to the lower plate 202 side by the upper plate ball removal unit 240 via the ball feeding unit 140. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion of the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from each other on the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251.

A dish left decoration unit 270 and a dish right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulging portions 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, although not shown, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a centered in the left-right direction, and includes an effect operation unit attachment portion to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached. .. The effect operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. ..

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 includes a lower plate ball removal button 263 and a lower plate ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 coincides with the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b in the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward in a normal state, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 moves to open the lower plate ball removal hole 202a, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is passed through the lower plate 202. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200.

When the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a remains open. Then, the game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and then release the pressure to release the lower plate ball removal lid 265. Returns to the normal state position, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish left decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish left decoration that penetrates the dish left decoration 271. It includes a lens 272 and a dish left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the dish left decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish left decorative body 271 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The dish left decorative body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction in a state of being aligned with the front surface of the dish left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the dish left decorative body 271 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the dish left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the left side unit 420 of the door frame in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. Since the dish left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical dish right decorative body 276 that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish right decoration that penetrates the dish right decorative body 276 and has translucency. The lens 277 and the dish right decorative substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface are provided.

The dish right decoration body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The dish right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The dish right ornament 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish right decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction so as to coincide with the front surface of the dish right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and the dish right decorative body 276 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The plate right decoration unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3 and its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the dish right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish right decorative substrate 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 is projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3. , A step can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 side. As a result, the player can hook his / her finger on the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front lower side. is there. FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the upward moving end. It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit in the state which the part unit moved to an ascending position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the downward moving end.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that allows the player to perform a contact operation and a press operation unit 303 that allows the player to perform a press operation, and accepts the player's operation and moves the effect operation unit 301. It can be (vibrated) so that the player can participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball B but also in the production during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about 5/8 with respect to the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and has a spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310 and an effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the outside on the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and an effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit from above, and the operation unit relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. It is equipped with 330.

Further, the production operation unit 300 adjusts the production operation unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for raising and lowering the production operation unit 350, and the sudden output of the production operation unit 350. It is equipped with a sudden output adjusting mechanism 380. The effect operation unit unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (around the effect operation unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is an annular shape having a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward and an insertion port 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. It is provided with a unit top cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and the lower side of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. That is, the outer surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a substantially spherical shape. Incidentally, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

At least the upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 has translucency, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, which will be described later.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is connected so that the plate left decorative body 271 and the plate right decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit base 315 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper plate main body 212 on the plate base unit 210 on the rear side. The front and lower parts of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit lower cover 311 and the upper part is covered by the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body portion 315a having an open upper portion, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the main body portion and having a circular outer circumference. ing. The effect operation unit 350 is housed inside the main body 315a. Further, the main body 315a has a pair of guide shafts 362 and a lower end of the central shaft 366 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 350, which will be described later, attached to the bottom wall. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located on substantially the same surface as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 covers the substrate base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 331, and the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear. A board cover 333, which is attached to the board base 331 as described above, is provided.

The operation unit relay board 332 includes an effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), a button outer decorative board 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative board 364, and an operation button. The connection between the elevating drive motor 367, the push detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is relayed.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The effect operation unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as a contact operation unit 302 or a pressing operation unit 303. Is.

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351 and a button body 351 from below. The cylindrical button sleeve 353 that is inserted, the disk-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and is arranged above the button base 354. It is provided with an annular button outer decorative substrate 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface thereof.

Further, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 in which the vibration motor 356 is attached to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detector 352. It is provided with a contact detection sensor main body 358 that is connected and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 is composed of a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved so as to bulge upward, a tubular tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. It has a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape forming a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to a diameter of about 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of the present embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer circumference, and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side having a certain width from the outer circumference bulges upward. The contact detector 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 and bulges diagonally upward, and the inside thereof is formed flat. As a result, the contact detector 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has a flat plate-shaped downward extending piece 352a extending downward from the left and right ends of the outer peripheral edge and the rear end. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. In the contact detector 352, the capacitance with respect to the entire area is suppressed by the plurality of holes of the punching metal, and erroneous detection is prevented. Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is good. It can be luminescent and decorated in a state of being.

The contact detector 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, the contact detector 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, and detects contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. Can be done. That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the button main body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a tubular sleeve body 353a extending vertically and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 and the length is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 has a disk shape having substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351 and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that penetrate vertically at a portion symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and projects from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. It is provided with a pair of guide pins 354c and the like. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The central hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat plate-shaped detection piece 354d detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The upper ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are in contact with the lower surface of the button base 354, and the button base 354 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365.

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the button outer decorative substrate 355. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on the double circumference of concentric circles. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button main body 351 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operating unit 301. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation unit 301 (effect operation unit unit 350) in the vertical direction. As a result, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation unit 301. Further, the influence of the vibration by the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced.

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, and the like, an output circuit, and the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode contained therein. Further, the connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detector 352. That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance is exceeded. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a signal having a plurality of stages may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detector 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. Further, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extension pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body is in a state where the effect operation unit 350 is projected upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of the 351. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 can make the button body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302 by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 can be seen as one sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

More specifically, in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the effect operation unit 350 does not move further downward even when pressed, and the pressing operation cannot be performed. .. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. .. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressure. It is detected by the sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button body 351, it touches the upper surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 when operating the contact operation unit 302. Therefore, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having irregularities due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, fine irregularities and a plurality of streaks are formed on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 to give an arbitrary tactile sensation to the contact operation unit 302. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player.

In the above description, the button body 351 is made transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be opaque or translucent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351. As a result, the contact detector 352 made of punching metal becomes difficult to see through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable that the button body 351 has translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be light-lit and decorated by the light from the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can emit light by the light emitting effect of the button body 351. Can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit elevating mechanism]
The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can elevate the effect operation unit unit 350. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is mounted in the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit unit 350, and has a substantially circular elevating mechanism base 361 and a central axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of cylindrical columns that are symmetrically arranged and have the lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation base 315 and the upper end penetrating the operation base 315 and the button base 354 and extending upward. A disk-shaped upper base 363 that connects the upper ends of the guide shaft 362 and the pair of guide shafts 362 and whose outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 to emit light upward. It includes a decorative substrate 364 in a button on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

Further, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively, and a pair of elevating springs 365 for urging the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. It includes a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation button elevating drive motor 367, which is attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotation shaft projects upward, and the rotation shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367. The spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368, which is engaged with the elevating drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361, is rotated by the spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 and the driven gear 369. The elevating cam drive gear member 370, through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, is provided.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted and the lower end is connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and the elevating cam that elevates and lowers the button base 354 by rotating. It includes a member 371 and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361 so as to cover the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevating detection sensor 374 that detects the elevating and lowering of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of (elevating cam member 371), and an elevating spring lower holding member of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. It is equipped with a sudden output detection sensor 375 that detects the sudden output of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the ascent and descent of the 385.

The elevating mechanism base 361 includes an elevating spring together with a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrating the base body 361a. It is provided with a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 315a of the operation portion base 315. A driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a sudden output detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button elevating drive motor 367, an elevating detection sensor 374, and a sudden output adjusting drive motor 381 are attached to the lower surface of the base main body 361a. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the elevating mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. As a result, a space in which the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 penetrate the pair of through holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. .. The central shaft 366 penetrates the center of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The lower end of each of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315, and the upper end of each is attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that projects downward. The upper base 363 can form a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the lower projecting portion into contact with the upper projecting portion of the gear cover 372. it can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the decorative substrate 364 in the button are full-color LEDs. The decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and guide shafts 362 are inserted in each of the pair of elevating springs 365. The lower end of the pair of elevating springs 365 is in contact with the elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the upper end is in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 374. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a columnar shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view of the elevating cam member 371. Is formed in. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 is urged upward by the elevating spring 365 (effect operation unit unit 350). Can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the elevating spring 365 and the elevating cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion portion protruding upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion portion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper projecting portion into contact with the lower end of the lower projecting portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The pressure detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operating unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operating unit 350. The pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state). When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 lowers the effect detection sensor 373 to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button base 354 354d of the detection piece can be detected, and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) can be detected.

The elevating detection sensor 374 detects the elevating detection piece 370c of the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and thereby means the elevating cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370. The rotation position of is detected.

The sudden output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the unexpected output adjusting mechanism 380.

The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the effect operation unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down via the button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in the front and rear, and the button base 354 is supported by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation unit 350 can be urged upward through the method. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Can be made to. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can appropriately illuminate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light of a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the decorative substrate 364 in the button.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55 (a)). See). In this normal state, the effect operation unit 350 is located at the downward moving end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Further, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 are in agreement with each other, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 And the button body 351 form one sphere.

In a normal state (when the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, it meshes with the lift drive gear 368. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 55A moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked. The button base 354 rolls from the 371c to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

Then, when the guide pin 354c that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 354c and the guide pin 354c At the same time, the button base 354 is raised, and the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the elevating output adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381, although details will be described later. it can. Then, since the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 can be changed according to the position of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction, the effect operating unit 350 is raised by the protruding output according to the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. It can be projected to a position.

When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third of the remaining cam portions 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the movement of the button base 354 further upward is restricted. Further, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moving upward, and the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also protrudes upward.

In this raised position, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the effect operation unit 350 pushes the elevating spring 365. The button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 as it moves downward against the urging force of the. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is in a state of being detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit ( The pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

In order to return the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 354c), so that the guide pin 354c is moved by the third cam 371e. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the effect operation unit 350 to the descending position, the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381 of the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 moved the elevating unsprung holding member 385 downward to reduce the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. The state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward becomes weak, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also increases. It becomes weaker, and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 that rotates the elevating cam member 371 can be reduced, and damage (failure) of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, as the operation button elevating drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor having a low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the effect operation unit 350 is returned to the original descending position.

In the above, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, so that the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( An example of moving the button base 354 (button body 351) from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d and projecting the button base 354 (button body 351) from the descending position to the ascending position at once has been described, but the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is an elevating cam member. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is locked to the locking portion 371c of 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is moved to the lower position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 makes the elevating cam member 371 a clock in a plan view. It may be rotated in the clockwise direction. Incidentally, the elevating distance of the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to the third cam 371e. Will move upward along. When the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e and the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 is projected upward at an arbitrary position between the descending position and the ascending position. It can be stopped. Then, by projecting the button body 351 to a position higher than the lowering position, the button body 351 can be pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the button body 351 is pressed by the pressing operation unit 303. Can function as.

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365. Is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 (operation button elevating drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operation feeling of the pressing operation of the button main body 351 can be lightened.

In this way, since the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be changed according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, the protrusion amount can be changed according to the gaming state (for example, the first start port 2004 or the like. By making the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 different (according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005), the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game. it can.

It should be noted that at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be locked may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. As a result, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same protrusion amount, and the variation in the protrusion amount can be prevented. Further, when a recess is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess, so that the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops the rotation of the elevating cam member 371. It is not necessary to continue, and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Sudden output adjustment mechanism]
The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, so that the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) protrudes upward (the momentum (pressing operation unit 303)). The sudden output) can be changed. The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 includes a sudden output adjusting drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the protruding output adjusting drive motor 381. From the transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, the spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and the gear portion 384a. An adjusting screw 384 that has a screw portion 384b that extends downward in a columnar shape and has a spiral groove formed on the outer circumference, and is rotatably supported by inserting a central shaft 366, and an adjusting screw. It is provided with a lifting spring lower holding member 385 that meshes with the screw portion 384b of the 384, penetrates the pair of guide shafts 362, and is in contact with the lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365.

The sudden output adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base main body 361a so that a gap is formed between the elevating mechanism base 361 and the lower surface of the base main body 361a. The sudden output adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotation shaft protruding from the gap between the motor and the base body 361a.

The upper and lower adjustment screws 384 are formed to have a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending back and forth, a screw hole 385b penetrating up and down at the center of the main body portion 385a and screwing with the screw portion 384b, and front and rear of the main body portion 385a. It has a spring holding recess 385c that is provided at both ends and is recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the elevating spring 365, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body 385a. .. The elevating unsprung holding member 385 has a guide shaft 362 penetrating the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the sudden output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion adjustment drive motor 381, the protrusion adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, the sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 moves the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b meshing with the screw portion 384b by rotating the adjusting screw 384 by the protruding output adjusting drive motor 381. be able to.

In the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is large. Become. On the other hand, when the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved downward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 becomes small (FIG. 56). reference). That is, when the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for urging the effect operating unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be increased, and the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. Then, the urging force for urging the effect operating unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion output upward of the effect operation unit 350.

The detection piece 385d of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 when the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is raised most. That is, when the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is the largest, the detection piece 385d is detected by the sudden output detection sensor 375. As a result, when the projectile output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is being moved upward by the projecting output adjustment drive motor 381, the elevating unsprung mass holding member by the projecting output adjustment drive motor 381 By stopping the upward movement of the 385, it is possible to prevent the elevating spring 365 from being further compressed, and it is possible to prevent the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 from being damaged.

Further, as described above, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protrusion output of the effect operation unit 350, so that the button body is operated by the contact detector 352 while the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position. The contact or approach of the object to be detected (for example, the player's finger, etc.) to the 351 is detected, and the effect operation unit unit 350 is projected by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to come into contact with the object to be detected. Occasionally, the position of the lifting unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction may be appropriately selected so that the protruding output of the button body 351 is different. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be made different. Therefore, if the button body 351 strongly abuts, there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the sudden output adjusting mechanism 380, according to the gaming state (for example, according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005). By increasing or decreasing the sudden output of the button body 351, it is possible to make the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the urging force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the urging force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to project the effect operation unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the urging force, it is impossible to use it differently from the original use. Stress acts on the compression coil spring, and the internal structure may deteriorate and be damaged at an early stage. On the other hand, in the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion output of the effect operating unit 350 is changed by changing the compression amount of the lift spring 365 by moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction. Since the urging force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to reduce the early deterioration of the elevating spring 365. It can be stably projected over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the outer peripheral decorative substrate of the effect operation unit, the decorative substrate outside the button, and the decorative substrate inside the button in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58B is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by touching or approaching the player's hand or the like, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can perform a pressing operation. The contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled in the dish unit 200 in a state in which the projecting direction of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) capable of projecting upward is inclined so that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the effect operation unit 301 is located in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 can be easily seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 is the effect. It coincides with the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. Further, in the normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical decorative body and can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is arranged below the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350). An annular button outer decorative substrate 355 is arranged inside the pressing operation unit 303 near the outer edge, and a button inner decorative substrate 364 is further arranged inside the annular button outer decorative substrate 355. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outward in the order of the button outer decorative board 355 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, centering on the button inner decorative board 364. The LED 355a inside the decorative substrate 364 inside the button and the decorative substrate 355 outside the button is arranged below the contact detector 352, but the contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal to provide translucency. Since it has, the light from them can be satisfactorily transmitted upward (player side).

The effect operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 by the LED 320a of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. Further, the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 can illuminate and decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button are arranged in a row on the circumference, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged concentrically, a light emitting effect that the light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside and the light from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303 are emitted. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that converges.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a lowered position where the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) has its upper surface aligned with the surface of the unit upper cover 312, as shown in FIG. 58 (a). It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is impossible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable the contact operation according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs voice, sound effects, and the like. Then, when the contact detector 352 detects the contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the process proceeds to the next production stage. When the contact is detected, the button body 351 is light-emitting and decorated by the light emission of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the button inner decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the contact operation is accepted by the player. It may be possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation unit 302. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous such as a "big hit" game) is given to the player by the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the button body 351 may be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 356. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, by giving a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to the vibration motor 356, the player may be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game. good.

Further, as an effect in a normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a sound, a sound effect, or the like is output. After that, when the contact detector 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with respect to the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) up and down. It is projected upward (pop-up) by the urging force of the spring 365. More specifically, in a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the cam portion 371a (first cam). Departing from 371b), the effecting operation unit 350 (button body 351 and pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrudes upward together with the button base 354 by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 (FIG. 371b). 55 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 projects upward. Then, as the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351. Therefore, the player can be greatly surprised. It can be of great interest.

After that, the process shifts to the effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) to entertain the player with the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is pressed. Moving downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the effect can be changed with the pressing operation as an opportunity to entertain the player with the player participation type effect.

In addition, at the time of the above-mentioned production, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 strengthens or weakens the protrusion output (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, so that the player can determine the degree of expectation for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion. May suggest to. Further, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed.

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers or the like approach the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is displayed. The main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like to give an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 may make the protrusion output of the button body 351 stronger or weaker so that the player can suggest the degree of expectation for the game by the strength of the protrusion output.

Further, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detector 352 causes the player's fingers and the like to be outside the projecting range of the button body 351 protruding upward and within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351. The button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the button body is approaching. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the fingers and the like of the player, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 makes the protrusion output of the button body 351 stronger or weaker, and makes the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game by the strength of the wind pressure that hits the player's fingers or the like. You may do so.

Further, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's fingers or the like by the contact detector 352. At this time, if the button body 351 is projected with a strong projectile output by the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously to generate a sound (protruding sound), which surprises the player with the projecting sound. Can be done. Further, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak protrusion by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351. The button body 351 protrudes before you know it, which can surprise the player.

As an effect after projecting the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is generally used by weakening the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380. It is also possible to perform an effect that causes the same pressing operation as the pressing button. Alternatively, the thrust output adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to cause the player to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as the effect after the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, an effect of contacting the protruding button body 351 may be executed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has a downward extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button main body 351 may be contact-operated. Further, at this time, it is desirable to strengthen the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, whereby the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation). The contact operation of the unit 302) can be easily performed.

As an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button base 354 is described above by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360. The guide pin 354c of the above is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, and the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the descending position to the ascending position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 and the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is moved to the descending position, the operation button elevates and lowers. By rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view by the drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the elevating cam member 371 is in the middle of the third cam 371e. The rotation of the button body 351 may be stopped to stop the upward protrusion of the button body 351 at a position between the descending position and the ascending position. At this time, the elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365.

In this way, even when the button body 351 is halfway projected by the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed and the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the player participation type production. In this case, since the amount of protrusion upward of the button body 351 can be made different according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the game according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , Can entertain the player.

Further, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), after the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the elevating spring 365. To the minimum state. As a result, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is enhanced to perform the pressing operation. Can be entertained. Further, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), the elevating spring 365 is set to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn. The urging force may be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be forced to push the effect operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit 350, and more versatile. It is possible to present the production, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detector is provided so that the contact of the player's fingers or the like with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected in a plurality of contact stages (approach stages). A plurality of steps of threshold values may be set according to the capacitance of 352, and the effect may be changed according to each step. That is, paying attention to the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's fingers or the like approach the button body 351 (contact detector 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. It may be possible to detect in multiple stages and utilize it for the production by providing. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 or the game. By dividing the stage where a person's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351 and changing the effect according to each stage, a variety of effects can be presented to the player even with one contact detection sensor body 358. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, as a normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is set to the lower position, and the elevating unsprung holding member is set. Although the state in which the 385 is moved upward is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 56A, the effect operation unit 350 is set to the lowering position and the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the elevating spring 365 is not strongly compressed under the normal state, it is possible to prevent the elevating spring 365 from deteriorating (fatigue) at an early stage. Further, the strongly compressed urging force of the elevating spring 365 can prevent the button base 354 and the elevating unsprung holding member 385 from being deteriorated (fatigue) at an early stage.

As described above, according to the production operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for various patterns of player participation type production, it is possible to entertain the player with various productions and make the player bored. It is possible to make it difficult and suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, in the effect operation unit 300, an annular (combined two arcs) effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is provided on the upper part of the spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the outer circumference of the effect operation unit 300 is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided on the effect operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operation unit 350, a button interior decorative substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lower position to the upper position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode) is provided. ) Will approach the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the capacitance of the sensor electrode will change due to the approach of the decorative substrate 320 in the outer periphery of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the contact detection sensor There is a risk that the main body 358 will erroneously detect.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) between the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the decorative substrate 364 in the button and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, by moving the effect operation unit 350 up and down, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358 And the shield connected to the ground (GND) where the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and The influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 in the button can be reduced, and erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be prevented.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 200 of the embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of the effect operation unit unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and FIG. 60B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect that the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit and the like. FIG. 61 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and FIG. 61 (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. In FIGS. 59 to 61, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. The contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R are connected to each of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves the fingers or the like from the left side to the right side, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector left 390L changes and the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes detection, and the capacitance of the contact detector right 390R does not change, and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains undetected. It becomes. Then, when the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitances of both the contact detector left 390L and the contact detector right 390R change, so that the contact detection sensor body left 391L and the contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body change. Both right 391R are detected. Further, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the contact detector left 390L returns to the original state, the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes non-detection, and the contact detector right 390R is electrostatically charged. The capacitance is changing and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains detected.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers and the like due to the combination of detection / non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R and the pattern of the change. Can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect a contact operation with a wider variety of movements, and it is possible to present to the player a player-participatory effect capable of causing the contact operation unit 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. , The player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 can be further enjoyed. If a contact detector is added, more complicated operations can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, in a state where a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection sensor body 392 detects contact with a human body or the like by any of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

For example, by arranging a plurality of contact detectors 393 distributed inside (lower side) of the button body 351 so that the player's fingers or the like come into contact with any part of the surface of the button body 351. The contact detection body 393 can detect the contact, and the detection accuracy for the contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detectors 393 may cause trouble to a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may be injured or another player). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where a fraudulent act may be performed, etc.), and when a human body or the like is detected by any of the contact detectors 393, cautions, warnings, etc. may be notified.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 60 (b), switching between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in which only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. This is an example in which the portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect the contact of the human body or the like only in the desired portion (contact detection body 352). .. The switching unit 394 includes "one that is switched by a switching circuit using a relay or a transistor", "one that is switched by another electronic circuit", and "a movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60 (c)". The unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300) are switched according to the movement of the unit 270).

For example, in the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are distributed and arranged, and a player participation type effect is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Occasionally, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of being touched by the switching unit 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's fingers or the like have touched. good. As a result, it is possible to present the player with a highly game-like player-participation-type effect by the plurality of contact detectors 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first is on the front side of the effect operation unit 300. When the contact detector 393a is provided and the second contact detector 393b is provided on the rear side of the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 to project the effect operation unit 300 and the like forward. When the first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394 and the effect operation unit 300 or the like is retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394. You may switch to do so.

As a result, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detector 393a detects the contact or approach of the player and stops the effect operation unit 300 or the like from moving forward. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressing the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. be able to.

On the other hand, when the production operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the production operation unit 300 or the like, and the production is performed with the player's fingers or the like inserted in the gap. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches the second contact detector 393b so as to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Then, when the second contact detector 393b detects the player's fingers or the like, the movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like to the rear is stopped, and the fingers or the like are separated from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. The guidance is notified to the player, and the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward and returned to the initial state only when the second contact detector 393b is not detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the gap on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and it is possible to enhance the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61A, the outer shape of the contact detector 395 that detects the contact of the player's fingers or the like is shaped like a star to have decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, and a predetermined item. It may have a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like. As a result, since the contact detector 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the contact detector 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detector 352 formed of punching metal is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contact detector can be a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, or the like. It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It is desirable that the contact detector is provided on the back surface side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers or the like do not come into direct contact with the contact detector, so that the contact detector can be prevented from being worn and the surface member provides a tactile sensation. It can be smooth.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one in which the decorative substrate 364 (LED364a) in the button is provided below the contact detector 352 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the present invention is shown. A contact detector 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below the contact detector 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397, so that the decorativeness of the effect operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. it can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61B, the contact detector 397 is formed by metal deposition so that the decorative body 398 provided below cannot be visually recognized due to the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 under normal conditions. By illuminating the decorative body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detector 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396, the decorative body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397. good.

Further, the contact detector 352 may be formed so as not to be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detector include "a body formed of a transparent member", "a body formed so as to be integrally visible with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body", and the like. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, so that the player does not detect the contact of the fingers or the like or perform the contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and the player's fingers or the like come into contact with or approach the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises the button body 351. By projecting to, the player becomes aware of the existence of the contact detector 352 (contact operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the woo line in FIG. 62 (a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 421. It is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side base 421 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. It covers the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. The left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421 and the left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. The door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 is provided.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward, and the upper and lower decorative boards 423 of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light from the first LED 423a above the center of the direction forward, and from the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction in the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. It is provided with a left side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light of the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 described above, and a part of the inner layer 3a is outer. By penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. LED 422b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame.

On the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, a total of 12 full-color LEDs, 4 for the first LED 422a and 8 for the second LED 422b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 422a provided with the second LED 422b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. Further, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third to the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 15 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground wire) that supplies power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three sets and the eight second LEDs 422 b divided into three sets can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The decorative substrate 423 below the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. LED423b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 423 below the left side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, a total of 18 full-color LEDs, 6 for the first LED 423a and 12 for the second LED 423b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 423a provided with the second LED 423b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Further, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7 to 9 from the top. It is divided into 4 groups: 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th pieces from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 21 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground wire) that supplies power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 is formed with a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A tubular holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 424a faces forward. It is formed in a dish shape that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427 straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 described later. Is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that penetrates the holding cylinder 424b and protrudes forward, the second of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 facing the through holes 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 427a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, so that the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from being reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, in the reflector 424 on the left side, a mounting hole for mounting on the left side base 421 of the door frame is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 is formed with a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A tubular holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 425a faces forward. It is formed in a dish shape that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and project forward, the through holes 425a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame facing the door frame is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, and the door frame left. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from being reflected on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

Further, in the left side lower reflector 425, a mounting hole for mounting on the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating in the vertical direction at regular intervals along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. These openings 426a include a light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and a light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. The tips of each are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative portion 426b which has a constant shape recessed in an arc shape and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid a plurality of openings 426a. doing.

The left side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a extending in the front-rear direction in a columnar shape and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , Formed of transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The light guide member 427 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a extending in the front and rear in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , Formed of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three upper holding cylinders 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The light guide member 428 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower left side light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Formed of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It matches the surface of the side decoration 426. The left side lower light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a and irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the handle cover 295. At the same time, the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the left side base 421 of the door frame is formed to be the same color as the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction slightly protrudes forward from the portion below the center, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, and the lower end is below the door window 101a. It is located above the speaker port 211b in the above. Further, the upper portion of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and makes it appear that a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are located at a position to some extent rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Because the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is irradiated with the door frame. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided at a position separated from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. Light) can be used to make the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, and the left side middle light guide member 428. The light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and the second LED 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decoration body 426 from the rear, the shadows become difficult to see, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 is evenly projected. It can be luminescent and decorated in a planar shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is provided with a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a to each other. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b. Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to understand, and the left side of the door frame The appearance of the side decoration body 426 in the light emitting decoration can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. FIG. 66A is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and FIG. 3D is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A in FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the OO line in FIG. 66 (a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame right side base 431. It is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side base 431 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. The door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and the door frame right attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. It includes a side decoration body 435 and.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward, and a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. It includes a right side lower light guide member 437 that guides the light from the LED 433a forward.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is mounted so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape on the right side of the door frame. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A plurality of translucent right side left lenses 439 having a decorative portion 439a to be fitted and a plurality of door frame right side bases 431 that are covered and attached so as to cover the right side surface and penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 having the decorative hole 440a, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the door frame right side base 431, and is provided between the door frame right side right side right side. It comprises a translucent right side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted so as to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440.

The left and right sides of the door frame right side base 431 extend vertically with a substantially constant width. Further, the door frame right side base 431 is curved to the rear side when the rear end side extends vertically over the entire height and the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction. After extending diagonally backward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens). At a height portion where the decorative portion 441a) of 441 is provided, there are a plurality of reflector portions 431a that are recessed from the left and right side surface sides and extend forward to the front end. The rear end side of the reflector portion 431a, which is the inside of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a, is inclined toward the side surface side, and the bottom surface is curved.

Further, the door frame right side base 431 is provided with decorative holes 438a and decorative holes 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) has a front portion excluding a portion inside the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a. , Penetrating in the left-right direction (recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

The reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431 transmits light radiated rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. It reflects in the direction to illuminate the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 (see FIG. 70 and the like).

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. LED432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, that is, four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Further, the first LED 432a provided with the second LED 432b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. Further, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third to the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is divided into two sets of the first LED 432a, three sets of the second LED 432b, and two sets of the third LED 432c. In order to make the third LED 432c emit light in full color, there are a total of 21 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the above 21 systems, the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame will be described later. A total of 24 systems, which are 3 systems for 1 group on the upper side of the 3rd LED 433c divided into 2 groups, are controlled.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame has a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, and LEDs. Two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED. A wiring cable composed of one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 3 sets, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 3 sets, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 sets, and 2 in the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. The two third LEDs 433c in the upper group of the groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. LED433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at intervals at the top and bottom. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, a total of 22 full-color LEDs, 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c, are mounted. Further, the first LED 433a provided with the second LED 433b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 433b. Further, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7th to the 9th from the top. It is divided into 4 groups: 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th pieces from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c. In order to make the third LED 433c emit light in full color, there are a total of 27 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can control only up to 24 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into two sets of the third LED 433c. Of these, 3 systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side). The lower two) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame is provided with power for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the lower two third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power line (one is the ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and 1 for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of a book clock line and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. Each set consists of 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 4 sets, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower set divided into 2 sets. It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with through holes 434a penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. At the same time, a tubular holding cylinder 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. The circumference of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. As a result, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted. The light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and project forward, the second LED 432b of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame facing the through holes 434a on both the upper and lower sides thereof and the like. The light from the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from being reflected on the back side of the 435.

Further, in the right side reflector 434, a mounting hole for mounting on the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. Further, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a fixed shape recessed in an arc shape so as to avoid a plurality of openings 435a. doing.

The light guide member 436 on the right side has four light guide shafts 436a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a. , Formed of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from above the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide member 436 on the right side can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower right side light guide member 437 has six light guide shafts 437a extending back and forth in a columnar shape and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shafts 437a. , Formed of transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from the bottom of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide shaft member 437 on the lower right side can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. The front end side of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The decorative body 438 on the right side and left side of the door frame is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a is aligned with the outer (left side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 439a which is light-emitting and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. Further, the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a cylinder insertion port 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3. Further, the front end side of the door frame right side decorative body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors with synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The two types of resins are molded in two colors, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes to the right to the right of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a is aligned with the outer (right side) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 441a which is light-emitting and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the handle cover 295 or the door frame left. It is formed in the same color as the part of the circular or radial pattern on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the right side left side decoration 438 of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame. The color of the portion is the same as the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the portion at the same height in the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 has a large protrusion from the top to a portion at a height of about half a portion, and forms a tsuitate. As a result, in the island equipment of the game hall, it is difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a tsuitate shape, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, which makes it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. It is possible to make it difficult for other players to feel as if they are being seen by other players, so that other players can play the game without hesitation.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are located at some positions behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Because the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is irradiated with the door frame. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate provided at positions separated from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The light from the first LED 433a of the 433 is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame. The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 emits light of the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, thereby causing the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431. It is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which are fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 via 431a. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, since a part of the left and right side surfaces (parts of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) of the right side unit 430 of the counter-shaped door frame can be light-emittingly decorated, the pachinko machine 1 can be used for other players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to stand out and has a high appeal to the player.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the front side first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b are used to illuminate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. With the third LED 433c on the rear surface side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are luminescently decorated. Therefore, due to the presence of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The right side decoration body 438 on the right side of the frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are irradiated to illuminate the decoration, or the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c illuminates the right side decoration 435 on the front door frame. It is possible to prevent the door from being luminescent and decorated. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435, the rear side door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be completely independent and luminescently decorated. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a light emitting effect having a higher effect to a player.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. The light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 is provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and the second LED 433b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 has a door frame right side decorative body 435 having a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a to each other. .. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected on the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b or the second LED 433b, the shadows are projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the portion to be used, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the light emitting decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper parts of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. It is equipped with a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that connects to the lower end of the door frame.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door A door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (See FIG. 72).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on both the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. The side speaker (not shown), the top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and the front surface of the door frame top base 451. A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top top cover 452 projects forward in a semicircular shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends to the left and right in a semicircular shape along the front end of the top top cover 452 in a plan view. Further, the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction projects forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 456a.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are provided apart from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers, and output sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters and output high frequencies of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, and a top side speaker, and a door frame sub of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a portion rearward from the inside of the upper part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. Has been done. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28, 71 and the like. FIG. 71 (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and FIG. Is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a unit top cover 312 and a button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a have a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the unit top cover 312, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame. Since the right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, these decorative substrates By appropriately emitting light from the LED, it is possible to decorate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a with light emission, or to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical production operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is attached to the center in the left-right direction. As a result, in the dish unit 200, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is located at the center, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302 and pressing) of the effect operation unit 300 can be enhanced. The operation unit 303) can be made to stand out.

Further, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to form one sphere, so that the player It is possible to make it difficult for the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) to be recognized as being operable, and the effect operation unit 300 made of a huge sphere allows the player to see other things at first glance. It is possible to recognize that it is a pachinko machine 1 different from the pachinko machine, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player, and this pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to make it easier to select the machine 1.

Further, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is positioned in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302) And the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303) faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the entire effect of the effect operation unit 301 can be easily seen by the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit 301 can be displayed. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to strongly make the player want to operate the huge spherical effect operation unit 301, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type production is executed, the player can actively operate the production operation unit 301, and the operation of the production operation unit 301 makes the player participation type production entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, the plurality of circular and radial patterns on the outer surface are colored in two colors using two types of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

For example, demonstrating the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the inner layer 3a is provided with a honeycomb-like pattern and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the circular pattern portion is inside. The honeycomb-like pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the portion other than the pattern, and the exterior has an appearance in which the circular or radial pattern is emphasized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and is relatively circular. The radial pattern is hard to see. That is, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted in the decorative hole 440a is used as a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the materials used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthesis). By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin), the light transmittance, and the like, the appearance can be significantly different even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, at the time of a minor change or the like, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed at no cost.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in the island equipment to make the player feel colorful. It is possible to increase the appealing power to.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is constructed by combining the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame molded in two colors with the right lens 441 on the right side, but the door is molded in three colors. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the frame and the right lens 441 on the right side may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, those in which a circular or radial pattern is formed are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side provided on the outside of the door window 101a in which the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward. The decorative body such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmission rates, and the decoration with a polka dot pattern is formed by the two color molding. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body at the same time, so that the decorative body has a desired shape like the decorative body of a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to apply the desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the door, and the labor required for the decoration can be omitted and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle are each transmitted. When formed in the same color with different rates, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, so that the polka-dotted circles are difficult to see, and the appearance is such that the polka-dotted decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka-dotted circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle is pink, due to the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. The polka-dotted circles are clearly visible, giving the appearance a pink background with white polka-dotted decoration. In this way, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used, and the appearance can be changed. The cost can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used when forming the decorative body. If the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row at the island equipment, the island equipment will look colorful. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is wandering in the game hall, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can attract the player.

Further, a handle cover 295 and a door frame left side base having a decoration molded in two colors by a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances on a portion outside the door window 101a in which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward. Since decorative bodies such as 421, the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame, and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame are provided, the outside of the door window 101a should be decorated with the decorative body to improve the appearance. Can be done.

Further, since the outer layer 3b of the decorative body molded in two colors is formed of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. As a result, the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) composed of the inner layer 3a can be seen clearly, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b is transmitted through the light. As a low rate, the inner layer 3a is prevented from being seen through from the outside, and at the time of model change, a synthetic resin having high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. As a result, the way of looking at the decoration of the decorative body can be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

Further, as described above, since the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see by the outer layer 3b having low light transmittance, a pattern (pattern by shape, painting, printing, sticking of a seal, etc.) on the surface of the inner layer 3a, etc. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and is transparent to the outer layer 3b at the time of model change. Since the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin, the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of model change.

Further, inside the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board that can irradiate light Since the third LED 433c of 433 is provided and the inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmission rate than the others, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The part of the layer 3a (the part of the polka dots) can be brightly decorated with light emission, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light emission to improve the appearance and to the player on the right side of the door frame. The light emitting decoration of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. The entire side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be light-emitting decorated, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be beautifully displayed for the game. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the person.

Further, as described above, the decoration of the decorative body such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances (multicolor). Since it is formed by molding), LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are made to emit light depending on the number of layers to the surface and the difference in the light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that can be seen when there is no light and the decoration that can be seen when the LED is lit can be made different, and by changing the decoration, the player's interest can be strongly attracted. More specifically, for example, when two-color molding is described as multi-color molding as an example, when a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is made to emit light. In the absence, only the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the outer layer 3b is inside. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a can be seen, and the portion of the inner layer 3a exposed on the surface and the portion of the hole can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not emitted can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is made to emit yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is luminescently decorated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green light (or white), both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion on the surface are luminescently decorated. Therefore, the luminescent decoration in the decorative body depends on the color of the light emitted by the LED. The part to be decorated can be changed, and the decoration to be luminescent can be changed. As described above, since the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the light emission of the LED, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED emit light according to the gaming state, the player can be given a chance or a change in the driving operation (for example, "right-handed") due to a change in the decoration of the decorative body. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be suggested and can produce various effects.

Further, since the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction is different between the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Since the impression (appearance) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front left and the front right can be different, the pachinko machine 1 is wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player once passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance is different from that at the time of the previous round trip, which attracts interest in the pachinko machine 1. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be attached and can attract a player who is wandering in the game hall to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. ..

[3-10. LED layout and system in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative substrate of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner in the front view, in which the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by a rotation operation by the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b in which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b to each other. It has an appearance similar to the steering wheel (steering wheel) of an automobile.

In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered with the handle front lens 185, and a handle decorative substrate 184 on which a plurality of LEDs 184a are mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a handle cover decorative substrate 293 on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted is provided on the front surface.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative substrates 184, one in the center, three on the middle circumference with a certain interval in the circumferential direction, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. A number of LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric pattern. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by a broken line in FIG. 72, two in the upper left of the outer circumference and two in the upper right of the outer circumference, each connected by a broken line. It is divided into 5 groups, 2 on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a divided into these five sets are controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 184b, and each set of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative substrate 293, 12 LEDs 293a are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are connected by a broken line in FIG. 72, from the center to the lower left two, the left two, the upper left two, the upper right two, and the right two. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 in the lower right and 2 in the lower right. The LEDs 293a divided into these 6 sets are controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and each set of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, since the handle 195 is provided with the handle decorative substrate 184 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, a light emitting effect such that the light rotates around the handle 195 and toward the center of the handle 195 can be produced. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light is concentrated and a light emitting effect in which the light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195. Further, the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 can illuminate the outside and the inside of the handle cover 295.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 is a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a have a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, the dish left decorative substrate 273 behind the dish left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the dish right decorative substrate 278 behind the dish right decorative body 276, and the like. Door frame left side decorative board 426 rear door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side decorative body 435 rear door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right The lower side decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided facing forward.

More specifically, the dish left decorative substrate 273 has four LEDs 273a mounted in a row in the left-right direction on the front surface, and an LED driver for emitting the LED 273a and the LED 273a of the dish right decorative substrate 278, which will be described later. (The illustration is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 273a divided into these two sets are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The dish right decorative substrate 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 278a divided into these two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the dish left decorative substrate 273 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 422a. It includes eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for emitting a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 422b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets are controlled by the LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and the first LED 422a and the second of each set are controlled. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 423 below the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 423a. It includes 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets are controlled by the LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LED 423a and the second LED of each set are controlled. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 432a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 432a are placed on the front surface. It includes eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame causes a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, and third LED 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame to emit light. The LED driver 432d of the above is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 432b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. The first LED 432a divided into two sets, the second LED 432b divided into three sets, the third LED 432c divided into two sets, and the third LED 432c divided into two sets in the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame. The upper set of the third LED 433c of the LED 433c is controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set are appropriately colored. It can emit light in full color.

On the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 433a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 433a are placed on the front surface. Twelve second LEDs 433b mounted, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c. It is equipped with an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c on the rear side are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. 72. What are the 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 sets, the 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and the lower 1 set of 2 3rd LEDs 433c divided into 2 sets? , The LED driver 433d controls 24 systems, and each set of the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The substrate 432 and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as a boundary. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are also different in shape in the front-rear direction. ..

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are mounted on their respective front surfaces. The number of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b are the same as each other, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72). (Systems connected by chain lines and two-dot chain lines) are provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the LED lighting pattern for performing the light emission effect.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, the LEDs 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. It is equipped with an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three sets of two from the left, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three sets are controlled by nine systems by the LED driver, and each set of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 457a divided into two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the optical member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. It is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that emits bright light in a dot shape, which is a dot shape that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. The luminescence effect that shines in the spot can make the player "haha".

Further, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the dish left decorative substrate 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the dish right decorative substrate 278, the second LED 422b of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower left side of the door frame The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423, the second LED 432b of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 below the right side of the door frame, the LED 455a of the central decorative substrate 455 on the door frame top, the left decorative substrate on the door frame top. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 456a of the 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be light-emitting and decorated, or the light can be emitted so as to move along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown to the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72 executes a spot emission effect on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission) by the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. Can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is directed by the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide. The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Since the light is irradiated to the door frame, the portions of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be spot-emitting with high brightness and brightness as compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. .. At this time, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 a. And even if the portion of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is made to emit spot light with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body, and the like in the area 5a can be visually recognized in a good state.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that project forward (the front ends that project forward in an arc shape in a plan view). However, since it is provided on the line in the vertical direction), the spot emission light is not emitted to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot emission light from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided on the door window 101a, and is behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and the spot light emission with high brightness makes it possible to direct the interest of other players to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the door frame 3, spot light emitting portions are provided on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that protrude forward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot-emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emitting portion is located outside the player, so that the player does not block the spot-emitting light. As a result, when the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame emit spot light, high-brightness spot light can be seen by other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the existence of this pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine to be played can be selected in the game hall. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting a player who is wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.

It should be noted that both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for making the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit spot light. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the surface LEDs of the above are in the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided by the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the light pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation unit 302 in the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape in which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit is provided. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 includes two LED drivers for causing 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit is divided into two, a front decorative substrate 321 and a rear decorative substrate 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative substrate 321 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit. Six of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are provided at intervals on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and three are provided at intervals on the circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative substrate 322 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit. The 13 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322 are provided with two at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference near the inner circumference, and three are provided between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining six are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining six are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are connected by a chain line in FIG. 73, and 6 on the inner circumference are 3 sets of 2 each in the circumferential direction, and 3 on the middle circumference. Is divided into 3 sets of 1 each, and 9 sets on the outer circumference are divided into 3 sets of 3 sets in the circumferential direction, for a total of 9 sets. Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322 are connected by a chain line at one point, and four on the inner circumference are two sets of two near both ends, on the middle circumference. There are 7 groups in total, 3 groups of 3 each, and 2 groups of 9 on the outer circumference, 3 each near both ends. That is, in the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 sets. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 sets are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each set of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 or 48 systems of LEDs 320a, a light emission effect in which the light is rotated in the effect operation unit 301 or light emission in which the light is concentrated in the center is emitted. It is possible to show the player a production or a light emission production in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame 5a extends vertically along the door window 101a to the outside of one and the other in the left-right direction of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction is different from each other. The door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body are provided. Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LED 422a and second LED 422b are mounted behind each of 435, and door frame left side lower decoration on which a plurality of first LED 423a and second LED 423b are mounted. The board 423 and the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 432a and the second LED 432b are mounted, and the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 433a and the second LED 433b are mounted. Is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to move forward. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member to be irradiated. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of the 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 emit light to make the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame can be light-emitting decorated (surface-emitting), and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward causes the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the door is radiated forward from their front end (front end surface). Guidance in the frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The portions corresponding to the tips of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be light-emitting decorated (spot-emitting) in a dot shape. ..

Therefore, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a. A door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) by appropriately causing the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b to emit light. The entire 426 and the right side decoration of the door frame 435 are luminescent and decorated in a plane shape, and a part of the left side decoration 426 of the door frame and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame is luminescently decorated in dots, or the left side of the door frame. Since the entire side decoration 426 and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame can be luminescent and decorated in a dot shape, a variety of luminescent effects can be shown to the player. It is possible to make the player less bored and entertain, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

At this time, the system in which the plurality of first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are separated and the door frame right The systems in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b of the side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right lower decorative substrate 433 are separated are symmetrical with each other, and in each case, Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems from each other, the left side of the door frame. Lighting pattern of the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b on the decoration body 426 side, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decoration body 435 side. When creating the data of, for example, the data for the door frame left side decorative body 426 side can be diverted to the data for the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, or the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the door frame. Since it is possible to create data with the same flow as that of the right side decorative body 435 side, it is possible to easily create the lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). ) It becomes easier to construct data of more complicated lighting patterns, and it is possible to show the player a variety of lighting effects of the lighting pattern, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a variety of lighting effects with a high effect. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a sufficient effect on the light emission effect of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the 101a.

Further, since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a have the same system. , First LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided in the above are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light guide shaft portion 427a and the guide by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, respectively. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are thinned so as to cancel out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to make it difficult to see the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated in a plane shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that emit light and decorate in a plane shape by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the first LED 423a. (1) The LED 432a and the first LED 433a are used to decorate the parts corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in a dot-like manner. Because of this, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as light-emitting in a plane and partially in dots, and emits bright dots in dots. The light-emitting effect can strongly attract the player's interest, and the light-emitting effect that emits spot-like lights that are not found in conventional pachinko machines can make the player "haha". It can be a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrate 433 has a shape that is asymmetrical with each other, at first glance, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be identified. It is possible to prevent the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side from being mistaken, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress the increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative board]
Subsequently, using the door frame 3 as an example, the identification of various decorative substrates on which the LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. The side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white substrate is used as the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted, and a non-white LED driver, a connector, or the like attached to the decorative substrate is attached to the rear surface side of the substrate. I am trying to do it. As a result, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate is reflected to the front side so that the decorative body and the like in the front can be luminescent and decorated more brightly, and the front (player side). Therefore, the decorative board is made inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the substrate plate material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative substrates, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative substrate so that each decorative substrate can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 is a character identification unit 7a with characters such as Chinese characters, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification unit 7b with different colors (shown by shading with different shades in FIG. 74). And have.

More specifically, as the character identification unit 7a, the characters "lower left" on the dish left decorative board 273, the characters "lower right" on the dish right decorative board 278, and "upper left" on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. The letters "lower left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "upper right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and "lower right" on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , Each is given.

Further, the color identification unit 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification unit 7b is not provided on the entire surface of the rear surface but partially so as not to interfere with the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. ..

The identification unit 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), sticking a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decorative substrate provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but various types provided in the handle unit 180, the effect operation unit 300, the game board 5, and the like have been described. The decorative substrate may also be provided with an identification unit 7 such as a character identification unit 7a and a color identification unit 7b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. However, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted is provided with the identification unit 7 (character identification unit 7a and color identification unit 7b), a decorative substrate having a similar shape can be easily formed. It is possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the front side of the decorative substrate can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate can be used. The light can be reflected forward on the front side of the decorative substrate to make the front decorative body or the like brighter and luminescent, and the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side) to improve the appearance. Can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification unit 7b as the identification unit 7 is applied over substantially the entire decorative substrate, it is desired (desired color) only by looking at a part of the decorative substrate. ) Can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of types of decorative boards are overlapped during assembly or the like, if a part of the decorative boards can be seen, the desired decorative board can be easily found, and the labor required for the assembly work. Can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification unit 7b is different for each decorative substrate, the same color is used when preparing the decorative substrate required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly. When there is a decorative substrate provided with the identification unit 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, when the color identification unit 7b of the prepared decorative substrate is insufficient in color, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative substrate that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared or the prepared decorative board is insufficient. Therefore, the decorative substrate can be surely prepared as much as necessary, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be smoothly performed, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification unit 7a as the identification unit 7 for distinguishing from other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the operator reads the characters of the character identification unit 7a. Therefore, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and it is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front surface and the rear surface of each decorative substrate are white and the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface, the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate is high. However, the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decorative substrate. It is possible to make the decorative body brighter and light-emitting, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the light-emitting effect having a high effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional parts such as an LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side), so that the functional parts can be seen through the decorative body. It is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated by seeing it, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the decorative body (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, it is not necessary to color the functional parts in white (or yellow) so as to be inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Door frame action effect]
According to the present embodiment, the contact detector 393 provided at a desired portion for detecting the approach or contact of the player with respect to the plurality of contact detectors 393 provided at different positions in the pachinko machine 1. By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor body 392, when the player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to a desired portion. Predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the effect display control unit 1512 in response to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 of the desired portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394, the contact detection body 393 provided in the other portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detector 393 provided in the other portion changes due to the player approaching or contacting the other portion, the contact detector 393 still has the contact detector 393. Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detector 393 at the desired portion is reliably detected. It is possible to prevent false detection.

In this way, the contact detection bodies 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 are appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions. Capacitance can be detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detectors 393, and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. In the control means of the above, the number of channels for detecting the approach or contact of the player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for the production can be relatively increased. Therefore, more production means (for example, movable decorations, light emitting decorations, effect display devices, etc.) can be controlled by the control means, and the number of production means can be increased to give the player a wider variety of effects. It can be presented, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the contact detector 393 is provided in each of the plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to be touched, and the contact detector 393 provided in the desired part by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. By connecting to the contact detection sensor main body 392 and detecting the approach or contact of the player to a desired part, control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by means, one contact detection sensor main body 392 monitors a wide range of the pachinko machine 1, and the number of channels that can be used for the production is relatively large. The number can be increased, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the capacitance by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided apart from each other. Therefore, the sensor body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a part that is difficult for the player to see, which improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhances the appeal to the player. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal for electrically connecting a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection body 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be obtained by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392. In comparison with the case where the conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detector 393 via the conductive member, the number of parts is increased. It can be reduced, the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the wiring of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detector 393 can be eliminated, so that the contact detector 393 and the contact detection sensor main body can be eliminated. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized.

Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided, and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394. Therefore, for example, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 When a player participation type effect is executed in which the distributed arrangement of the contact detectors 393 is touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is operated by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player touches the contact detectors 393 in order. By switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the player, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection body 393 in order, and a player participation type production with high game characteristics can be achieved. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's fingers or the like approach or come into contact with the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that the player can press and operate. Then, the player approaches the contact detector 352 made of the patching metal of the metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detector 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352. Therefore, the button body can be detected via the contact detection body 352. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the 351 (effect operation unit 350).

When the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected by using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 in this way, the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, and the effect operation unit are raised and lowered. Since a predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the player is entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. Therefore, the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 use the effect operation unit 350 as a non-contact operation unit or the non-contact operation unit 350. It can function as a contact operation unit. Then, since the player can press the effect operation unit 350 that functions as the non-contact operation unit or the contact operation unit when it is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform the non-contact operation, the contact operation, and the pressing operation. Since various production operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with operation buttons capable of only pressing operations, and other pachinko machines. By differentiating it from the machine, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, a predetermined effect is output to the player side in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detector 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, and the capacitance is the contact detector 352 (button body 351). Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and output different effects for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player to the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) in multiple stages, the effect corresponding to each stage is output. By doing so, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided apart from the contact detection body 352, contact detection having an electronic component such as a sensor IC or an output circuit is provided. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and appeal to the player.

Further, as described above, since various production operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation can be performed by the operation unit, a player participation type production that enables the player's production operation is executed. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of production operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the player with a player-participatory production, which reduces the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the contact detector 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 is a punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes formed therein, the player can use the plurality of holes to form the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector 352 in the approaching or non-contacting state can be reduced, and the occurrence of false detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detector 352 while suppressing the increase in capacitance, so that the button by the contact detector 352 can be increased. The range for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be widened. As a result, the contact detector 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. Therefore, as in the above embodiment, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) that the player can press and operate is enlarged. When the contact detector 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or contact the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type effect. When requested, since the contact detector 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the effect operation unit 350. The moving distance is shortened, the production operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing can be made difficult to be missed in the player participation type production, and the player participation type production can be surely participated. The effect can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the contact detection body 352 on the side opposite to the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. It is possible to output the light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the intermediate decorative substrate 364 to the player side, and it is possible to surely entertain the player with the light emitting effect and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is provided on the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) capable of the pressing operation, the contact detection body made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. The effect operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the 352, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit when the player performs a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit The 350 can be made difficult to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the contact detection body 352 can make the effect operation unit 350 less likely to be damaged, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 without hesitation and operate the effect operation unit 350. It is possible to make the player-participation-type production more enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, and the thickness of the contact detector 352 can be reduced as compared with the case where the contact detector 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, it is possible to easily provide the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to increase the degree of design freedom, which is more appealing to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant as compared with the expanded metal, so that the contact detector 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This makes it possible to facilitate the formation of an optimum shape for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350), and the above-mentioned effects can be surely realized.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351 is provided. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the contact detector 352 having a plurality of holes, and it is possible to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 352, which causes discomfort, and the button body 351. In the player participation type production using the above as an operation unit, the button body 351 can be operated without discomfort, and the production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the player side of the contact detector 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352. This does not mean that the time and effort required for cleaning can be facilitated, and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 that is easy to clean can be reduced.

Further, the effect means such as the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, since the predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be produced. It is possible to surely entertain the effect output through (via) the operation unit 350 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the effect means such as the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. Since it is provided, the contact detector 352 is in a state of covering the effect means, and the contact detector 352 (effect operation unit 350) and the effect means can be compactly integrated. Provided is a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can be easily provided at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. It can be made easier.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, the effect is produced. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the player approaches the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the capacitance of the contact detector 352 with the contact detection sensor main body 358. Alternatively, contact can be detected. Then, when the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it abuts (collides) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present the player with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the effect that has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the effect operation unit 350 and to the player. It is possible to surely notice the protrusion of the effect operation unit 350.

When the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end side (upward) of the elevating spring 365 when the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating spring 365 is strongly compressed. The urging force can be increased, and when the elevating spring 365 is moved away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the elevating spring 365 is weakened and the urging force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the urging force of the effect operating unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the production operation unit 350 can be projected with various sudden outputs, the variation of the production by physical force can be increased, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the production operation can be performed. It is possible to entertain the effect of the protrusion of the unit 350, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the sudden output of the effect operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit 350 with his or her fingers or the like, the effect operation unit unit has a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with each other, a strong impact is given to the player, which makes it strongly think that there is something good (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage). It is possible to raise the expectation for the hobby and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 is a press operation unit 303 capable of a press operation, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player is made to press the effect operation unit 350 to perform the game. A player can participate in the person-participation type production, and the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed, it is possible for a player who puts his / her fingers or the like on the effect operation unit 350 (upper surface of the button body 351) so that the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed at any time. Then, when the player-participation type production in which the effect operation unit 350 is pressed is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is projected by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, so that the player-participation type can be obtained by the effect image, sound, or the like. It is possible to promptly make the player recognize the start of execution of the player participation type production without informing the start of execution of the production, and to increase the motivation for the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 to perform the player participation type production. It can be even more entertaining.

Further, since the effect operating unit 350 is projected by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, compared with the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected using the drive motor. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 can be easily and vigorously projected, and the above-described effects can be more easily produced.

Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350 is detected, and the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity differs depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different sudden output for each threshold. It becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the effect operation unit 350 in multiple stages, depending on each stage. By projecting with a sudden output, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player can move to the effect operation unit unit 350 provided so that the player can advance and retreat by popping up the dish unit 200 by executing the player participation type effect. When they approach or come into contact with each other, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player of the effect operation unit 350 comes into contact with changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the player approaches or contacts. Since the change in the capacitance of the detector 352 can be detected, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is based on the capacitance. The player can be detected. Then, by detecting the contact detection sensor main body 358 and advancing (pressing) the effect operation unit unit 350 by the player, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and the button inner decorative board A predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as 364, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, when the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward or approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is used as the effect operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). Can work like this. On the other hand, when the player advances (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so that the effect operation unit 350 can function like the effect operation unit (pressing operation unit). For this reason, the player can perform various production operations. Therefore, by executing the player participation type production that enables the player's production operation, the various production operations can be enjoyed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the player-participatory production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, the player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided near the portion of the button main body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 where the player contacts (the lower side of the upper surface portion 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined effect are set for each. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the effect operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages, the effect is presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation), and it is possible to make the effect operation more enjoyable for the player.

Further, it is provided with an effect operation unit 350 capable of allowing the player to move forward and backward (pressable), a contact detector 352 capable of detecting the approach or contact of the player with the effect operation unit 350, and a contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, in the player participation type production, the operation of moving the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward (pressing operation) and the operation of approaching or contacting the effect operation unit 350 with fingers or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), Etc. can be requested, and the various operations can increase the motivation of the player to participate in the player participation type production, and make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production. Can be done. Then, when the player participates in the player participation type production, various operations using the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the player less likely to get bored. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player-participatory production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to lock the effect operation unit 350 so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, until the effect of advancing / retreating the effect operation unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is made incapable of advancing / retreating by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. It is possible to prevent the 350 from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety by moving or shaking the production operation unit 350 without permission, which makes the production by the production operation unit 350 more enjoyable. Can be done.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having an electronic component such as a sensor IC or an output circuit is provided. The main body 358 can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, an output circuit, etc. for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separate bodies. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be used as the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. It is possible to optimally correspond to the above, and it is possible to surely embody the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player is attached to the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398. When the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 or the button inner decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 398 are brought into close contact with each other, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is provided. The capacitance of the button changes, and the player side is executed because the player side is subjected to a predetermined effect of irradiating the player side with light by the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 according to the change. The light shining on the button can strongly attract the player's attention to the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398, and the player can be entertained by the executed effect. At this time, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 or the button inner decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 398 is the button body 351 or the contact detector 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be made to appear as a part of the decorative portion to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it unrecognizable to the person that the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 cannot be recognized from the player side, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is likened to the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (directing) is blocked, the player does not care about the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, and the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the above, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effect of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398 in a good state, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the outside of the button covered with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 Since the effect of irradiating the player side with light is executed on the decorative substrate 355, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, or the decorative body 398, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is moved to the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). In addition to being able to function as in 302), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or brought into contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 approaches or contacts the fingers or the like. By detecting the contact, the effect is executed by the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player participates in the player. You can entertain the pattern production.

Further, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers or the like are detected. Since it is possible to make the effect of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 different depending on the distance to and from, the button outer decorative board 355 depends on the movement (position) of the player's fingers or the like. The effect of the decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 398 can be changed, and a wider variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the various effects can make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

Further, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the outer decorative substrate 355, the inner decorative substrate 364 of the button, or the decorative body 398 changes, the game on the button body 351 or the surface member 396 The approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is used to detect the change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be a conductive member, for example. When the contact detector 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and it can be made to look like a part of decoration by thickening the vapor deposition film to have metallic luster. Can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 are made of punching metal having an outer shape such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 appear to be part of the decoration. be able to. Therefore, the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body 395, and the contact detection body 397, which cannot be recognized from the player side, can be used, and the above-mentioned effects can be surely achieved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance is increased by the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). It changes, and according to the change, a predetermined effect is produced by an effect presenting means such as a button outer decorative substrate 355, a vibration motor 356, an effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a button inner decorative substrate 364, a protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect display device 1600. 395 and the like (including the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body left 390L, the contact detection body right 390R, the contact detection body 393, and the contact detection body 397, etc.) Since the pachinko machine 1 is formed in the outer peripheral shape of the slingshot machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detector 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and a high appeal to the player. Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 and the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like due to the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the contact detector 395. Since the predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 by means, the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351. Therefore, the button body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation unit 301. Since the contact detector 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design, the effect operation unit 301 seems to have a design, which is not found in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the operation unit 301 can give a strong impact to the player, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of differentiating from other pachinko machines. Further, as described above, since the contact detector 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly have an interest in the contact detector 395 and the like (button body 351). It is possible to raise expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participation type effect of operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the contact detector 395 and the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 are formed in an outer peripheral shape having a design, at first glance, some players may present the effect. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is produced by the contact detector 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or contact the button body 351. It is possible to make the player notice that it is the operation unit 301, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and make the player participation type production more enjoyable. Alternatively, when the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detector 395 or the like is static. Since the electric capacity is changed and the effect is presented by the effect presenting means, the player can be surprised, and the presented effect can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's fingers or the like on the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like The approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized. Further, since the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's fingers or the like approach the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like to make contact. Since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) in multiple stages, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player by presenting the effects according to each stage. It is possible to prevent the decline of interest by making it difficult to get bored.

Further, since the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as a punching metal, an expanded metal, or a wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detector 395 or the like. It is possible to impart design to the contact detector 395 and the like, prevent deterioration of the appearance due to the contact detector 395 and the like, and make the contact detector 395 and the like stand out, thereby exhibiting the above-mentioned effects. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily embodied.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a designable one without forming the contact detector 395 or the like in a three-dimensional shape. it can. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and the like can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact detector 395 and the like can be reduced.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, dust and dirt such as food and drink do not adhere to the contact detector 395 and the like, and the labor required for cleaning is easy. Can be. More specifically, since the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the irregularities, and it is troublesome to clean the stains. However, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the button body 351 even if the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, the button body 351 is used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the adhesion of dirt, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily cleaned.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 395 or the like, a metal vapor deposition film or the like can be used as the contact detector 395 or the like. When a material that can enhance the design such as foil stamping is used, it is possible to prevent the player from being worn early by touching it, and it is possible to enhance the durability of the contact detector 395 and the like.

Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, the transparent button body 351 does not allow the player to directly touch the contact detector 395 or the like. Since it is possible to use a detector 395 or the like that is uncomfortable to the touch or that causes discomfort to the player, the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact detector 395 or the like can be increased, and the needs can be met. A contact detector 395 or the like can be formed by a suitable material.

Further, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like is changed by approaching or contacting the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the like, the player brings the fingers and the like close to or comes into contact with the button body 351 by the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 and the like. Can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the movements of the fingers and the like.

Further, the effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., and the player's fingers or the like approach or touch the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like. Since the effect presented to the player is executed via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, the button body 351 can function like a contact operation unit, and the presented effect gives a feeling of operation. Can be added, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type production) can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 capable of a plurality of operations, the player brings his or her fingers or the like close to or comes into contact with the button main body 351 to approach or bring the contact detector 352. When the (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects the entry into the detection area such as a finger, the game is played through the button main body 351 by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button. Light emission effect that irradiates a person with light, effect that vibrates the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact with (via) through the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, and projects upward of the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. The button body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302 because the effect of applying impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. to the player is executed through (via) the button body 351. You can do it. Further, at this time, since the player is given effects such as light, vibration, shock, push-up, and wind pressure through the button body 351, the effects can surprise the player and entertain the player. This can increase the motivation for operating the button body 351. Then, with the player's fingers or the like touching the button body 351 and pressing the button body 351 downward by appropriately moving the fingers or the like, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303, so that the contact detector The contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351 can entertain the player with various production operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored. Can be suppressed.

Further, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 causes the button main body 351. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a of the above, and it is possible to exert the same action and effect as described above.

Further, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is provided. Can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351. Therefore, the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine The appearance of 1 can be improved.

Further, since the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (lower side) of the button main body 351, the player can see the light through the button main body 351. It is possible to easily impart effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure, and it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is provided with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and FIG. 82 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is for holding the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front while the rear portion is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a in which the shape of the front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It is provided with a mounting portion 501c and a game board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the unit 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that can be rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted in the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch releases the pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch releases the pressure and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 83 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is then bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 83 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle between the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 122 above the frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward from the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted with the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is attached to the flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle 195 is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the upper portion 551d of the back plate extending downward from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the lower side of the left side plate 551b from the front to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is open rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the opening at the upper end of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B, which is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 87 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes the box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 91).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 89A is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 88, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 89).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as a payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down quickly.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, and the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank discharge passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in the front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b in the front view, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The front view of the actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is distributed in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number is set based on the detection of the ball out by the ball out of ball detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified by voice (for example, "Please pull out the ball!") That the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Temporarily stop until.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball pulling passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92B is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and is composed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and vertically, and a circular speaker mounting portion 621a and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. A through-cylinder 623a that communicates with the through-hole 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 96) and. The payout control board 633 sets the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and the payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. One end (main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and around the axis extending vertically, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the main body frame in a perspective view viewed from the rear. FIG. 100 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on the ball tank, and FIG. 100 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 553, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It has.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores the game ball B supplied from the island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be circulated in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game sphere B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left side of the front view. Further, in a plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side, and then moves to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions are aligned in the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball shavings) can be less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball gummy) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a movable defect occurs in the movable production unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. Can produce the effects of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to be the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is inclined so as to be low in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B and the bottom surface. Is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g between the discharge portion 551j and the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open. It covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface overflows. It is provided with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m is a flat plate from a position as low as 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It extends like a rectangle. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501 m, a gap is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 at a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. On both outer sides of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o in the left-right direction, the upper ends are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o and extend in a strip-like shape in the front-rear direction, and the outside of the game ball B in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the game ball B and the game ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. Regarding the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the diagonal rear end from the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552 g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide part of the tank rail.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion in the front view of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that goes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552 g. The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in the front view from a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outwardly and vertically on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be stepped backward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled in the main body frame 4. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 553 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to the supply from the island equipment, first of all, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest of the uppermost edges of the outer circumference, is exceeded. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and can be discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by inclining the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shavings) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m beyond the overflow portion 552 f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the detour passage 552 g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h in which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and being bitten by the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since the game balls are changed so as to coincide with each other, as the plurality of game balls B move toward the downstream side in the bulge portion 553b, they can be aligned so as to be aligned with respect to the width direction. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (to the right in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 103, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, causing a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) of the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Subsequently, the second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the tank rail when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail or the like of the second embodiment is viewed from behind. FIG. 107A is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, and FIG. 107B is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 as viewed from the front. Is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in (a) as viewed from behind. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107. In addition to the tank rail 553A, the tank rail 555A and the like of the second embodiment different from the above include the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, and the ball rectifying member 556A. , The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are different from each other, and the same configuration will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of the present embodiment rectifies the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers it to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A extends to the left in a groove shape that opens upward. The tank rail 555A has a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the front view of the first rail cover 554A, and an upper side of the second rail cover 555A. A ball rectifying member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stopping member 557 capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107A and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. The meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in the front view) including the meandering portion 553c on the open upper end side of the tank rail 555A. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 555A, and a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from both front and rear ends on the upstream side of the cover portion 555a in the left-right direction. It has an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at the portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. The rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A is rotatably attached so that the upstream end side extends back and forth and around the axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 555A. It has a flat plate-shaped rectifying piece 556a. The ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a row, and at the uppermost side. The game ball B is prevented from moving rapidly to the downstream side, and ball biting is prevented from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 555A or the like of the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. ing. As a result, the electric wire (shown by the broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached becomes. It is possible to prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A due to the weight of the electric wire, the ball rectifying member 556A May not be able to rotate upward, and the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exerted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can rotate upward to fully exert the rectifying action, and the ball bites or the ball in the tank rail 553A. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging.

Further, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages moves to the downstream side first, ball biting is likely to occur. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B, so that the upper game ball B moves to the downstream side first. It can be suppressed and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

Further, as described above, since the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging, many tank rails 553A can be used. Place the terminal board or control board to which the electric wires are connected (for example, external terminal board 558) or the control board, or place the terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rails and the like]
Subsequently, the third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment is viewed from the rear right. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment is viewed from the left rear. FIG. 113A is an enlarged rear view of the main body frame showing a portion of the external terminal plate, and FIG. 113B is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged upper part. 114 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 113 (b), and FIG. 114 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 115 is an enlarged explanatory view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment as viewed from the front, FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the tank rail and the like of (a) from the lower right rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The tank rail or the like of the third embodiment includes the tank rail or the like of the first embodiment (ball tank 552, tank rail 535, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball rectifying member 556, and ball stopping member). A protective cover 559 that covers the ball rectifying member 556 from above is added to the configuration of 557), and the same configuration as described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rails and the like of the present embodiment are attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extend to the left and right of the payout base 551 and the ball tank 552 which is box-shaped and is open upward. It is provided with a tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side of the portion and which is open upward and extends to the left in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the opening at the upper end of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

The tank rail 553 has an opening on the bottom surface of a portion that extends straight to the left (a portion whose height decreases toward the downstream) so that dust, dirt, etc. in the tank rail 553 can be dropped. A plurality of portions 553d are formed. These openings 553d are provided in portions below the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d opens downward and rearward of the tank rail 553 and extends to the left and right, and is formed in a size that the game ball B cannot pass through. When the game ball B is present on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly visually recognized from behind through the opening 553d. Further, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's finger, a thin stick, or the like through the opening 553d. As a result, the ball clogging generated at the site can be eliminated through the opening 553d. Further, the ball rectifying member 556 can be lifted through the opening 553d through the game ball B of the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed.

Further, the tank rail or the like is to the left of the ball tank 552, and closes above the predetermined range from the right end to the left of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends to the left at a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. The second rail cover 555 that closes upward from the portion spaced between the first rail cover 554 and the first rail cover 554 in the tank rail 554 to the left end, and the first rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555. A ball rectifying member 556 provided at a portion between the rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopping member 557 provided near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 555, and the first rail cover 554. It is provided with a protective cover 559 that straddles the ball rectifying member 556 from the middle of the left-right direction and covers the upper part of the second rail cover 555 halfway in the left-right direction.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. ..

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114A and the like).

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are arranged in one stage, but when the stacked game balls B are reduced from the second stage to the first stage, the upper game balls B are arranged. When trying to overtake the lower game balls B, those game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball clogging due to ball shavings). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is distributed in two upper and lower stages in the tank rail 553, the upper game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a. By slowing down the flow of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent an attempt to overtake the lower game ball B. As a result, the game ball B on the lower stage side moves to the downstream side first, and the game ball B on the upper stage side moves to the rear side, so that the game balls B can be aligned in one stage. At this time, since the game ball B on the upper stage side presses the rectifying piece 556a from below, the ball rectifying member 556 moves so that the rectifying piece 556a moves upward, and the game on the upper stage side due to its own weight. The ball B can be pressed downward, and the ball rectifying member 556 (rectifying piece 556a) swings in the vertical direction to promote the movement of the game ball B on the upper stage side to the lower stage side and the tank rail. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the relevant portion (a portion whose height becomes lower toward the downstream) in 553.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

The protective cover 559 includes a strip-shaped top plate portion 559a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-shaped rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear side of the top plate portion 559a, and a top plate portion 559a. It has a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front side and the left side of the above, and a flat plate-shaped guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The guide plate portion 559d is formed so that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left side, and the rear end of the portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

The protective cover 559 is positioned so that the top plate portion 559a covers the upper part from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. A space is formed between the ball rectifying member 556 and the ball rectifying member 556 so that the ball rectifying member 556 can swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball rectifying member 556.

The right end side of the front plate portion 559c extends to the right of the top plate portion 559a, and extends along the tank rail 553 to the ball tank 552. In the guide plate portion 559d, a portion on the front side of the top plate portion 559a protrudes forward from the front plate portion 559c with a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and the game ball B can be guided to the left. Has been done. The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the inclination of the upper end of the tank rail 553. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a slight gap between the front end of the guide plate portion 559d and the rear surface of the payout base 551 so that the game ball B cannot enter.

The protective cover 559 can prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556 from the outside when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. To confirm the operation of the ball rectifying member 556, a thin rod is inserted into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 to bring it into contact from below, or the game ball B in the tank rail 553 is passed through the opening 553d and the operator's finger. It can be confirmed by pushing it upward by pressing the ball B or the like and lifting it through the game ball B.

Further, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason to the left by the guide plate portion 559d and discharge it to the outside from the left side surface of the main body frame 4. ..

In the present embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559, etc. are formed of a transparent material, and the inside of the tank rail 553. The game ball B can be visually recognized from the outside.

Further, since the upper part of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is possible to prevent dust, dirt, etc. from entering the tank rail 553 from above. be able to.

Further, since the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559 cover the upper part of the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 and the game ball B cannot be touched from above. Therefore, when dust or dirt adheres to the game ball B or the like, it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, etc., but in the present embodiment, the tank rail 553 It is significant that a plurality of openings 553d are provided at the bottom. More specifically, when dust or dirt adheres to the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553, the ball rectifies the ball B inside by touching the game ball B inside through the opening 553d and via the game ball B or the game ball B. Since the ball rectifying member 556 can be shaken, dust and dirt adhering to the game ball B and the like can be removed. Then, dust and dirt dropped from the game ball B and the like can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the main body frame 4, since the portion where the front-rear direction of the tank rail 553 extends to the left at a substantially constant depth is provided behind the external terminal plate 558, the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558a. When the electric wire connected to the ball rectifying member 556 comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556 from above, the ball rectifying member 556 rotates upward even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556 due to the weight of the electric wire. There is a possibility that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556 cannot be sufficiently exerted.

Further, since the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 is connected to the electric wire whose tip is stripped, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, the electric wire connection terminal If the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to the 558a is insufficient, a short circuit may occur due to the remaining game ball B.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559 prevents the electric wire connected to the electric wire connecting terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556. can do. As a result, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can rotate upward, sufficiently exerting the rectifying action, and in the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

By the way, when an electric wire is pulled out from the external terminal plate 558 for some reason and the tip of the electric wire comes into contact with the game ball B existing behind the external terminal plate 558, the computer in the game hall provides necessary information due to the occurrence of a short circuit. You will not be able to receive it, and there will be an error in the counting at the game hall. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the guide plate portion 559d is provided on the protective cover 559, the game ball B that has invaded behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason is guided to the left and the main body. It can be discharged to the outside from the left side surface of the frame 4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal plate 558, and thus it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a short circuit due to the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by avoiding a short circuit of the electric wire, it is possible to ensure that the computer (hall controller) of the game hall can receive the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting error in the game hall. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B is discharged to the left side surface side of the main body frame 4 by the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559, the game ball B is after the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection or short circuit by contacting various electric wires and wirings provided on the side.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of the Substrate Unit]
Subsequently, the substrate unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. 119 (a) is a front view of a substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a substrate unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the left front. 120 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 120 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 123 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the key line in FIG. 119 (a), FIG. 123 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ku Ku line in (a), and FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view cut along the cake line. FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion of the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) behind the door frame.

The board unit 620A of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above board unit 620. In the substrate unit 620A of the present embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, the same components as those of the above-mentioned substrate unit 620 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the front base 661. A game that is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and distributes the out-ball passage 663 and the out-ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one, and a ball pulling guidance unit 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides it to the right in the front view. The game ball B guided by the ball ejection guidance unit 627 circulates, and closes the ball ejection discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball ejection discharge passage 665. The passage wall member 666, which is attached to the rear base 662 as described above, is provided.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open to the front. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out-ball passage 663 and a ball ejection guidance portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. At the same time, a ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape in which the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a is open to the rear.

In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball ejection guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are also transparently formed. Therefore, the inside of the ball ejection guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, and it becomes easier to confirm ball clogging or the like. There is.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of the flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction in the rear base 662 with the front open, and is open. The front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 is a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is open upward and extends to the left and right at a position substantially central in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. At the lower end of the out-ball rectifying unit 663b that rectifies in a row while meandering in the left-right direction, the downward guiding unit 663c that guides the game ball B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying unit 663b downward, and the downward guiding unit 663c. It is open downward and has an out-ball discharge port 663d for discharging the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball rectifying unit 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving unit 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving unit 663a so that the left end side becomes lower. Further, the depth of the out-ball rectifying section 663b becomes narrower in the front-rear direction toward the downstream side (left), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball discharging receiving section 663a. It is the depth. Further, the portion of the out-ball rectifying section 663b that is on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a has a lower vertical height toward the downstream side (left side), and in the vicinity of the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball rectifying unit 663b.

The lower guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is on the same surface as the rear wall (partition wall portion) in the middle of the vertical direction. It bends backward in a curved curve like a small crank. As a result, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663d) of the downward guidance portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided on the upstream side of the cranked portion of the downward guidance portion 663c. Since the downward guiding portion 663c is formed in a curved shape so that the portion bent in a crank shape does not have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, the downward guide portion 663c passes through the out sensor 664 and is bent in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the existing portion, it does not jump up to the upper out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

Since the game ball B frequently passes through the out sensor 664, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch having high durability and long life is used.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 is provided on the left side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and the downstream side bends backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , It is connected to the upstream end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 123 (a) and the like).

The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state of being open to the rear, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is located in front of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. That is, a gap of one game ball B or more is formed between the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guidance portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball ejection receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 and is larger than the ball ejection receiving portion 663a. The lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) Has a ball ejection port 665c that opens downward. The ball ejection port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

Further, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately project inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. In the ball ejection discharge passage 665, the game ball B flowing through the vertically extending vertical guide portion 665b alternately abuts on the plurality of protrusions 665d, so that the game ball B flows down in a zigzag shape and is distributed therethrough. The increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

Since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed into a simple L-shaped passage by the lateral guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, when the ball ejection lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B in the ball tank 552. , Many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the substrate unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664. It is detected by the sensor and discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (pull out) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to remove the game ball B discharged to the ball pulling passage 580b side from the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball pulling guidance unit 627 and the ball pulling discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the above. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. Can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 are used to obtain an accurate game ball B. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B (the number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting port 2005, the first The number of game balls B that have been accepted into the winning openings such as the large winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007 and discharged from the game board 5, and which of the winning openings is accepted after being driven into the game area 5a. It is the sum of the number of game balls B that are received in the out port 1008 and discharged from the game board 5 without being played, and the number of game balls B that are driven into the game area 5a (the number of shot balls). That is.

Since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the game state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is set to "Payout within a predetermined period". Calculate as "number ÷ number of out balls within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, and an out ball is provided. The game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected. Therefore, the game board 5 detects the "out ball". It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce the cost.

Further, according to the present embodiment, there is a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. The out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are used for many game balls B. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to electrical noise caused by static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the distribution of the game ball B, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B. Can be.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B whose flow speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifying unit 663b of the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the game ball B is distributed. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the premature wear and damage of the out sensor 664.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, the game is played. Since a person wants to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay). Since there is a possibility of a defect in the board, the connector, the wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the defect at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 in which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 (for example, It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit), the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and a space is secured in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the ejected game ball B. By providing a directing device in the secured space, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining to the player.

Further, since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are alternately projected, the game ball B circulates through the vertical guide portion 665 b, so that the game ball B can be distributed. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game ball B, damage on the island equipment side of the game hall that receives the game ball B ejected from the ball ejection discharge passage 665, Etc. can be prevented.

Further, the out-ball rectifying section 663b meandering in the out-ball passage 663 is provided, and the vertical guiding section 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are projected is provided in the ball-extracting discharge passage 665, whereby the game ball B is provided. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B circulating in the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Further, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball removal discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage are opened. Since the game ball B is discharged downward from the 665, it becomes difficult for the game ball B to collide with another pachinko machine, a wall, or the like provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and the other pachinko machines. It is possible to prevent the machine, the wall, etc. from being damaged. Further, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter, and the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter from the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 on the island equipment side. The discharged game ball B can be easily collected.

Further, since the base unit 660 in which the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 is provided with a game. Since it is possible to deliver the game ball B driven into the area 5a to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by discharging it downward, the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball B in the game board 5 is configured. The configuration can be simple (simple), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously circulating in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is not easily damaged.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a portion for collecting the game ball B on the island equipment side ( It is not necessary to advance the out receiving portion, the bucket, etc.) to a position where it overlaps with the outer frame 2, and it is possible to reduce the trouble of installing the pachinko machine 1 and the trouble of moving the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another Embodiment of Ball Discharge in a Substrate Unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126 and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. FIG. 126 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 126 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guide piece 667 that guides the game ball B to the rear side is provided at a portion of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, a merging portion 663e that joins the ball ejection / discharging passage 665 is provided in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663. The merging portion 663e is open downward, and the end of the opening is an out ball discharge port 663d (ball ejection port 665c). The guide piece 667 projects shortly backward from the front wall at the out ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward. .. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B provided on the rear side (inside the island equipment) of the island equipment. Etc.), the game ball B can be easily released to the island equipment side, and the game ball B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided in the main body frame 4. Even if the game board 5 is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island equipment. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged in the front portion as much as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, when the out-ball passage 663 is moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., due to electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of many game balls B in the out-ball passage 663. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Subsequently, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at the portion of the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and open downward so as to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. It is equipped with a sensor cover 668 that regulates the downward movement of the 664.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the lower guidance portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 detects the main body portion 668a which extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose base end side is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660, and the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body portion 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c provided on the side opposite to the proximal end side of the main body portion 668a. Have.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the base unit 660 with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f, which is opposite to the out-sphere rectifying section 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to the locking portion 663g provided on the outer side of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b side with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has the locking claw portion 668c moved upward in a state where the out sensor 664 is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663. By rotating and locking the locking claw portion 668c to the locking portion 663g and closing it, the main body portion 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and out. The sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is inserted. It is discharged downward through it. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When the out sensor 664 is replaced (removed), the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating and opening the sensor cover 668 around the base end side of the main body 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, the main body 668a of the sensor cover 668 is opened under the out sensor 664. The out-sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 126 (b), in the present embodiment, in the state where the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the dangerous contact object indicated by the alternate long and short dash line (for example, the outer frame 2). There is a certain amount of gap between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, etc.) or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with a dangerous object and the sensor cover 668 is prevented from being damaged. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. As a result, the out sensor 664 may be worn out and damaged at an early stage, but as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. it can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 comes into contact with a contact-risk object such as the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being damaged. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come into contact with each other. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 will come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668, and the sensor cover 668 will open. When the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped downward during the game, the game ball B is detected by the out sensor 664 even though the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality, but the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risk, and the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at an outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-sphere rectifying portion 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B is jammed in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game ball B is jammed can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game ball B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially on the same surface as the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform confirmation work inside and inside the ball ejection discharge passage 665.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game that was interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be restarted at an early stage. , It is possible to alleviate the irritation of the player due to the interruption of the game and suppress the decrease in the interest, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the burden on the game hall side. it can.

Further, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when the out sensor 664 is replaced, the sensor cover 668 is attached to the base unit 660. Since it is in a suspended state and does not fall off, it is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

Further, in the sensor cover 668 holding the out sensor 664 from below, the outer portion of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 in which many game balls B circulate, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). On the other hand, since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). (End side) of the base unit 660), and relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, when many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664, it is rotatably attached to one end side thereof. Since a large amount can be received, it becomes difficult to release the lock at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. ..

[4-14. Third Embodiment of the board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment, which is further different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 136 and the like. FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown by omitting the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and FIG. 127 (b) shows the board unit of (a) in the front left. It is a perspective view seen from. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 128 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. 129 (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a), and (c) is a searcher line in (a). It is a cut sectional view, and FIG. 130 is a sectional view cut along the sieve line in FIG. 129 (a).

FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 133 (a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 135 is an explanatory view showing prevention of intrusion of a linear illegal tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127.

Since the substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment is the same as the substrate unit 620 and the substrate unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710 and other configurations, the above substrate unit 620 and the above-mentioned substrate unit 620 are described here. The same components as those of the substrate unit 620A are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 127 to 136, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are not shown.

The board unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above-mentioned board unit 620 or board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The substrate unit 700 is provided behind the first ball path 701 in which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 can be distributed and the first ball path 701, and is discharged downward from the game board 5. The second ball path 702 in which the game ball B can be distributed, the first ball sensor 703 that detects the game ball B in circulation in the first ball path 701, and the game ball in circulation in the second ball path 702. It includes a second ball sensor 704 that detects B, and a ball pulling passage 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 is distributed. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are opened upward, respectively, and after each of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detects the game ball B one by one. Discharge downward.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 in the game board 5 circulates in the first ball path 701, and the game board 5 has a general prize. The game ball B received in the opening 2001, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 is configured to circulate through the second ball path 702. ing. That is, the out sphere is configured to circulate through the first sphere path 701 and the safe sphere circulates through the second sphere path 702, and the number of all out spheres can be counted by the first sphere sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, with respect to the winning openings (winning opening sensors) such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first major winning opening 2006, and the second major winning opening 2007 of the game board 5. When cheating is performed, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 are different, and cheating on the winning opening can be detected. ..

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 is attached to the front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 711. A power supply unit 620c is attached to the rear surface and a ball ejection passage 705 is provided between the rear base 712 and the front base 711 and the rear base 712, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are provided. The front base 711 and the rear base 712 in order to eliminate the ball clogging of the ball path member 713 and the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools. A security cover 714 that can be opened and closed, a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball ejection passage 705, and a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. The frame relay board 716 and the like are provided. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed.

The front base 711 is formed in a long box shape on the left and right, which is open rearward and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving port 711a that opens long in the left-right direction on the upper peripheral wall portion, and a elimination port 711b that opens at a position to the right of the center of the lower peripheral wall portion in the left-right direction. ing. The front base 711 has the ball path member 713 housed therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving port 711a. Further, the front base 711 rotatably supports the security cover 714 around the axis extending in the left-right direction on the front end side of the elimination port 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, guides it to the right in the front view, and then guides it downward to discharge the ball removal passage 705. Have. The ball pulling passage 705 is provided in the box-shaped rear base 712, and the whole is opened rearward. The ball pulling passage 705 is closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715. The portion of the rear base 712 above the speaker box 623 in the ball-extracting passage 705 (the portion on the left end side in the front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , The rear side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

Further, the rear base 712 receives the game ball B circulated through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and the second of the ball path member 713. It has a second discharge guiding unit 712b that receives the game ball B that has circulated through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b protrudes forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide portion 712a opens forward. , The entrance of the second discharge induction unit 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide unit 712a and the second discharge guide unit 712b are provided at the same positions in the front-rear direction. The rear side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b is open to the rear with respect to the front wall, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the exits of the ball ejection passage 705, the first discharge guide portion 712a, and the second discharge guide portion 712b are located to the left of the front base 711, which is the elimination port 711b, and are left. They are arranged in order from to the right. The outlet of the ball-extracting passage 705 has a large front end side and a small rear end side with respect to the outlets of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b (FIG. 128 (b). ). That is, the outlet of the ball pulling passage 705 is formed to be larger (wider) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted and housed in the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined so as to decrease from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. , The step wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and the upper right shelf portion 713d inclined so as to decrease from the lower end of the step wall portion 713c toward the right. The rectifying wall portion 713e extending diagonally to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the position separated to the right from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e become higher toward the right and the upper right shelf. The lower shelf portion 713f extending to the right of the portion 713d, and the right wall portion 713g extending vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and the right. The upper wall portion 713h extending to the left from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the U-shaped portion connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opened upward. It has a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located at a portion to the right of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends vertically upward from the lower end of the lower wall portion 713e extending to the left from the lower end of the lower wall portion 713j and from the left end of the lower wall portion upper 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b. The middle wall part 713k that is exposed, the eaves part 713l that extends downward from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall part 713k toward the left, and the lower shelf part 713f are short and vertically downward from the vicinity of the left end. It has a hanging wall portion 713 m extending from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713 m and a lower wall portion lower 713n extending to the left in parallel with the lower wall portion upper 713j. The lower portion of the lower wall portion 713n between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is cut out vertically with a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, respectively, and a plurality of obstructions provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. Further, the ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, and a groove wall portion 713i. It has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 713p that partitions the space surrounded by the lower wall portion upper 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n.

Further, the ball path member 713 is notched in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f so as to be recessed from the front end and the rear end toward the partition wall portion 713p. It has a notch 713q of. Each notch portion 713q is provided so that a gap smaller in the front-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 when assembled in the substrate unit 700. Dust, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide ridges 713r extending to the left and right. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by the lower wall portion upper 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and the sensor accommodating the first ball sensor 703 is accommodated. It is surrounded by the lower wall portion 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p and the front portion 713s, and is behind the sensor accommodating portion in which the second ball sensor 704 is accommodated. It has 713t and.

At 713s in front of the sensor housing and 713t after the sensor housing, the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are located below the parts between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. That is, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed with the detection hole on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cable extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extends to the left from the sensor housing portion 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t to the left of the middle wall portion 713k. ..

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion on the lower surface of the lower wall portion lower 713n in front of the partition wall portion 713p, and the first ball guiding portion 713u projecting downward and opening rearward. Have. When the first ball guide portion 713u is assembled to the substrate unit 700, the right half on the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is on the inlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712. Facing. The first ball guiding portion 713u guides the game ball B, which has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, to the right and then to the rear in front of the partition wall portion 713p. It can be delivered to the first discharge induction unit 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, a portion opened below the lower wall portion 713n (a portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing portion 713t). ) Is located below the inlet that opens upward of the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. As a result, the game ball B that has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p can be delivered to the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d is located to the right of the right end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is located to the left of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are inclined in a straight line. On the other hand, the rectifying wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side faces downward vertically. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so as to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height at which one game ball B can pass. .. The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can rectify a plurality of game balls B in a row and guide them downward.

As described above, the space between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension becomes narrower toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B is distributed). Depending on the distribution amount of the balls B and the like, a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, causing ball clogging (see FIG. 134). Since the rectifying wall portion 713e is located above the eliminating port 711b, when a ball clogging occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the eliminating port 711b. In the open state, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the opening 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below, and the game ball B bitten by the tool. It is possible to eliminate the ball clogging by poking.

By the way, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with a notch portion 713q for clearing the ball clogging and dropping dust and dirt downward, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or a catheter is provided. Is penetrated from below through the notch 713q into the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702), and the tip of the illegal tool is further inserted into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 701 and second). There is a risk that the game board 5 provided above may be cheated by extending upward from the ball path 702). Such insertion of an illegal tool is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, but there is a similar concern not only in the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d in which the notch portion 713q is provided.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, a plurality of flat plate-shaped inhibitory ribs 713o separated in the left-right direction and extending downward. Even if the tip of the linear fraudulent tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it comes into contact with the obstructing rib 713o and the tip of the tip It can prevent movement and prevent further insertion of fraudulent tools (see Figure 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from being cheated through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is borne. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent activities.

In the parts of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b on the right side of the middle wall portion 713k, the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower wall on which the notch portion 713q is not provided are located below and to the left and right of them. Since it is closed by the upper right shelf part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool is not inserted from below through the cutout part 713q of the corresponding part of the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b, and the part concerned. No fraudulent activity is committed through the notch 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 is provided with a plurality of cutout portions 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, so that dust and dirt are downward through the cutout portion 713q. Can be discharged to (see FIG. 136). Dust and the like discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor housing portion 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t in the upper left shelf portion 713b are the rectifying wall portion 713e, the lower wall portion upper 713j, and the middle. It is housed in a space surrounded by a wall portion 713k. As a result, dust and the like do not adhere to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the 713s in front of the sensor housing and the 713t after the sensor housing.

Further, a wiring cable is connected to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the 713s in front of the sensor housing and the 713t after the sensor housing by a connector, and the wiring cable and the connector are connected. It projects to the left from 713s in front of the sensor housing and 713t after the sensor housing. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 project to the left of the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends to the left from the upper portion of the sensor accommodating portion front 713s and the sensor accommodating portion 713t on the left side surface, the eaves portion 713l is formed on the upper upper left shelf portion 713b. Dust and dust that have fallen downward through the notch 713q are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves 713l, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 projecting to the left from the inner wall portion 713k. It is possible to prevent the wiring cable and the connector from falling, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems caused by dust and the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, and a lower shelf portion 713f on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. The first ball path 701 is formed by the right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guiding portion 713u, and the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712, and the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. Left wall part 713a, upper left shelf part 713b, step wall part 713c, upper right shelf part 713d, rectifying wall part 713e, lower shelf part 713f, right wall part 713g, groove wall part 713i, and rear base 712. The second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge induction unit 712b of the above.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the vicinity of the front end of the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side can rotate around the axis in the left-right direction. Further, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, the security cover 714 closes the release port 711b in a state where the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and is horizontal, and the elastic locking portion 714a is locked. The elimination port 711b is open in a state in which the rear end side is rotated so as to be positioned downward to make it vertical. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the elimination port 711b.

Since the security cover 714 can close the release port 711b of the front base 711 by closing the security cover 714, a linear fraudulent tool can be inserted from the release port 711b into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or first ball path 701 or first). It is possible to prevent the insertion into the two-ball path 702). Further, the security cover 714 is opened when a ball is clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, thereby opening the elimination port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearing port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B. Can be done. This ball clogging clearing work is carried out in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the security cover 714, when the release port 711b is open (vertical), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) is at risk of contact (here, after the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is located below the height of the connecting cylinder portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 130). Therefore, in order to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713, after opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is kept open with the security cover 714 open. Even if an attempt is made to close the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with a dangerous object (connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. As a result, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and it is possible to securely close the security cover 714 and exert the security function of the security cover 714.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 may be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. , The open security cover 714 will come into contact with the contact risk from the front, but since the front end side of the security cover 714 is rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, the contact risk from the front. Since the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction when the security cover 714 comes into contact with the body, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the security cover 714 being caught by the contact risky object, and damage to the security cover 714 or the contact risk object can be avoided. ..

The security cover 714 of the present embodiment is open because the game ball B is rarely clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f and is basically in a closed state. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to be difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712, and closes the rear end side of the ball pulling passage 705 that is open to the rear. Further, the passage wall member 715 closes the portions of the rear base 712 that are open to the rear on the outlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second (Ii) The game ball B that has been distributed through the discharge guidance unit 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310. ..

In the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the upper left shelf portion 713b and a part of the upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 are formed from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game ball B that has fallen to the upper left shelf 713b or the upper right shelf 713d through the ball receiving port 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d to the lower shelf 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls the lower shelf portion 713f to the left. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf portion 713f, they are broken by the upper rectifying wall portion 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B that has rolled the lower shelf portion 713f to the left falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is housed in the sensor housing portion 713s. After being detected by the one-ball sensor 703, it passes through the first ball guide unit 713u, and then is discharged downward through the first discharge guide unit 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, in the case of being behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor accommodating portion 713t, the sensor is discharged downward through the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712. Will be done.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game ball B circulates through the paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, and is discharged downward. The front side is the first ball path 701, and the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p is the second ball path 702. Therefore, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the front of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 circulates in the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the rear of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 circulates in the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

Further, the base unit 710 uses the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in order to pull out the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the ball pulling passage 705 of the rear base 712. It can be discharged downward through. The first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), the second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702), and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 705 of the base unit 710 are island equipment. It is delivered to the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) where the game ball B on the side is collected.

According to the base unit 710 in the substrate unit 700 of the present embodiment, since the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are provided with a plurality of cutout portions 713q, dust is passed through the cutout portion 713q. Since dust and dirt can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from obstructing the distribution of the game ball B and suppress the occurrence of ball clogging and the like. Can be made to.

Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board is opened from the main body frame 4. By removing 5, the presence or absence of ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702) from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700). Can be easily confirmed. Since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with the notch portion 713q at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a row by the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the ball path member 713, the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf are provided. When a ball is clogged with the portion 713f, the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 and the security cover 714 is opened, so that a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below through the elimination port 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and the ball clogging can be eliminated from the tool.

Further, since the elimination port 711b opened downward is provided in the lower part of the lower shelf portion 713f below the rectifying wall portion 713e and the security cover 714 for closing the elimination opening 711b is provided, the elimination port 711b is passed through. In addition to being able to clear the ball clogging as described above, by closing the clearing port 711b with the security cover 714 under normal conditions, a linear fraudulent tool can be removed from the clearing port 711b through the first ball path 701. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being inserted into the second ball path 702, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent activities.

Further, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the elimination port 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714 around the axis in the left-right direction on the front end side, the main body frame 4 is opened in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If the outer frame 2 is to be closed, the security cover 714 will come into contact with a dangerous object (connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. It is possible to make people notice that they have forgotten to close it, and it is possible to securely close the security cover 714 and exert the security function of the security cover 714.

Further, since the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped inhibitory ribs 713o separated in the left-right direction and extending downward, they are linear. Even if the tip of the illegal tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it can come into contact with the obstructive rib 713o to prevent the tip from moving. It is possible to prevent further insertion of illegal tools. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from being cheated through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is borne. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent activities.

Further, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank by the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Since the complicated distribution route is configured, even if a linear fraudulent tool is inserted from the outlet side of the first discharge guide unit 712a or the second discharge guide unit 712b, the intrusion is blocked by the complicated route. It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Further, since all the game balls B emitted from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). It is not necessary to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the above, the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and the game board 5 detects the ejected game ball B. It is possible to secure a space for the configuration, and by providing the effect device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made more entertaining for the player.

Further, since the out ball is distributed in the first ball path 701 and the safe ball is distributed in the second ball path 702, the number of safe balls counted in the game board 5 and the safe ball by the second ball sensor 704 are distributed. By comparing with the count number of, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, the game is played. Since a person wants to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay). Since there is a possibility of a defect in the board, the connector, the wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the defect at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball pulling passage 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 The game ball B without a ball is not counted. Therefore, only the game ball B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704.

In the above embodiment, the out ball circulates in the first ball path 701 and the safe ball circulates in the second ball path 702, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball path 701 is not limited to this. The safe ball may circulate on the second ball path 702, respectively, or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 regardless of the safe ball and the out ball may be the first ball path 701 and the second ball. Any one of the ball paths 702 may be distributed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the solution opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the release port 711b is opened and closed by sliding the security cover 714 back and forth or left and right. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is separated into the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 by partitioning by one partition wall portion 713p. The one that discharges through one of the two ball paths is shown, but it is not limited to this, and it is provided with three or more ball paths in the front and back by a plurality of partition walls, and any of the ball paths can be used. The game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as viewed from the front right, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back. .. FIG. 141 is a schematic explanatory view of wiring wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 142 is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory and the like are transparent. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nails. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145 in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged right side of FIG. 145.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning opening 2003, which grants a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B, A first starting port 2004, a second starting port 2005, a first large winning opening 2006, and a second large winning opening 2007 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first large winning opening 2006, and a first large winning opening 2006 in the game area 5a. The purpose is to entertain the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a so that the two major winning openings 2007 and the like can be accepted or passed.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 167) that detect magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIGS. 145 to 147) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 167 and the like) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a table unit 2000 that is mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. It is further equipped with a back unit 3000 to be used.

An effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 is provided with a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 which are open at all times and can accept the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a. Gate 2002, which detects the passage of game ball B, and variable winning opening 2003, which enables acceptance of game ball B according to the lottery result of a normal symbol drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2002. The first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, which are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and are always open so that the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. The first big prize opening 2006 and the first big prize that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to Depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the mouth 2006 and is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. It is provided with a second major winning opening 2007 capable of accepting the game ball B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 167) that detect illegally acting magnetism in the game area 5a.

Further, the table unit 2000 is further provided with a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open so that the game ball B can be received. ..

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2004, and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has four general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The 2300, the lower right unit 2400 provided on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a and having the second start port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. It is provided above the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a large winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021 and a gate 2002 provided near the center of the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the vertical direction. The gate member 2600 and the like.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided on the right side in the game area 5a, and includes a specific obstacle nail group 2700 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back wall 3010 having a box-shaped opening 3010a having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and the rear wall of the back box 3010. It includes a back box rear unit 3030 that is detachably attached by a lock slider 3020, and a back board unit 3040 that is arranged behind the back box rear unit 3030 and is attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. There is.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guidance unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 is distributed and the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010, the back upper front effect unit 3300 provided at the upper part in the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, and the inside of the back box 3010. The back bottom front effect unit 3400 provided in the lower part behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, and the back top rear effect unit 3500 provided behind the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (FIG. (Refer to 162 and the like), and a back bottom rear effect unit 3600 provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 to penetrate the lower full tank path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in front view, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 145 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and rear, and the upper edge and the lower edge are separated from each other in the left-right direction, so that the plate thickness is thin. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions 1114 and (see FIG. 152). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion 1114 is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. Is.

In the panel plate 1110, the large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset upward from the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is the left side and the left side excluding the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through-hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface to the front. The upper portion of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding step portion and each of which is inserted into a plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and outside the holding step portion. Three engaging claws that are arranged and elastically engage with the engaging step 1114 of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step. It includes two engaging steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110 and a pair of engaging pieces that engage with each other. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step portion 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 from diagonally above the front with the engaging piece, and then moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to incline the upper side and the lower left. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion 1114 of the portion to be engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since the game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, and the player can reduce the visibility. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). This makes it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123) below. The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 141, 143, 144 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 167) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded of polycarbonate resin, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or an unauthorized IC is mounted. Whether or not it is done) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2601, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a first large winning opening sensor 2525, and a second large winning opening. It is connected to a sensor 2561, a variable winning opening solenoid 2522, a first winning opening solenoid 2524, a second winning opening solenoid 2563, a magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 has a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the set value, and a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the set value. It is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (a harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). May be electrically connected via). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 is almost the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance dimension thereof is the left and right of the main control board 1310. It is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 are It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main. Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. A setting in which a setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is arranged and has a pressing operation unit above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp on which the changeover button 1311b is arranged and capable of emitting a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and on the upper left side of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left side of the setting changeover button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310 g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dots) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310. The base monitor 1310h, which is lower than the center and is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center to the right side, is arranged near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit is arranged on the.

In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). In the initial position, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion slot and the setting key can be removed from the insertion slot. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted in the insertion port, the other equipment is arranged in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and operating the second ON operation, and the determination key ON signal can be turned on. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions in which the function of setting key ON and the function of setting key ON are completely different can be realized only by a single setting key switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the setting key silin is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed collectively by using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are formed through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. A "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding openings, respectively. The structure is such that the wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for each of these openings so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like. .. Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is transparently molded as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting key switch The wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are routed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other) on the setting change board 1311. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed on the main control board 1310. (That is, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the setting key switch 1311a OFF. The wiring pattern in which the signal of (1) is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The routing with the wiring pattern to which the signal from is transmitted is also formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, a case of changing the setting of the set value will be briefly described, and a case of confirming and displaying the current set value will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current set value, etc., so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can own it. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main body frame is relative to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is released, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. It is necessary that the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state where the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the outer frame 2 is used. The work of opening the main body frame 4 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to set by the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As the above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition", it may be a condition that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is further operated and an operation signal is input. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn on the setting key switch 1311a. The setting change of the set value may be executed when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

The person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then sets the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. The work of opening is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to set by the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a (see FIG. 7) is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1311 is sent from the setting changing board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is entered in. Each time a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the value reaches the set value 6 which is the maximum value, the value is increased by 1 and the value is increased by 1 again to return to the set value 1 which is the initial value, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the setting key with the setting key switch 1311a turned on). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the cylinder rotation position to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the initial position (that is, the setting key) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the switch 1311a is returned to the setting key cylinder rotation position). After pressing the pressing operation part of the setting switching button 1311b to display the set value on the setting display 1310g, the setting value is determined by simply turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is pulled out from the setting key cylinder as it is. It becomes possible to improve workability.

The person who changes the setting of the set value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the setting display 1310g to the state of not displaying it, and switches from the state of turning on the setting change permission lamp 1311c to the state of turning off the setting value.

A person who changes the setting of the set value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting of the set value. To complete.

When confirming and displaying the currently set value, the outer frame 2 is used when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by being operated. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). , The work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first operation. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), and then the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. Of these, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, this pressing operation is performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310 g is not changed either.

When the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the setting key is turned on. Turn the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the set value is displayed to the state in which the set value is not displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and currently sets the setting value. Complete the work of confirming and displaying the set values.

As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is the power when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation after being rotated 60 degrees, the predetermined set value display permission condition is the pachinko machine as described above. The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set after the power is restored when the power of 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs when a power failure occurs momentarily). It is necessary that the setting key is turned on by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder and rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the preset setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by the setting key being inserted into the and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. The difference is that the set value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, briefly explaining the set value, the "set value" is a probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery, a probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, and usually from the time of probability change. It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when shifting to time, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, to be acquired by the player). The probability (degree of advantage) that can increase the number of game balls B that can be played is preset. In the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance as the set values, and the set value 1 to the set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is of various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is defined, and a jackpot symbol. The jackpot symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the decision, the small hit judgment table that defines the percentage of the small hit judgment value that indicates that the small hit was won, and the percentage of the judgment value of the determination of the small hit symbol are specified. It is used to select the small hit symbol determination table to be performed, the normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition decision from the probability change to the normal time, etc.), or to use various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other. Some have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned setting values, six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are set, but the setting values may be smaller than this and may be in the larger range. It may be a thing. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 4, or eight setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an error, and if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an error (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in itself. An error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 among the game balls B launched in the game area 5a. The number of balls of the game ball B is displayed. Of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 167 and the like), and this detection signal is mainly transmitted via the panel relay board. It is input to the control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but this setting key switch 1311a was set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only within the range up to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the key is turned on may be used. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'is counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a'can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a'by 60 degrees in the direction and turning it off, and the signal of this decision key ON is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be described as "variation example (1) of the enter key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. It will be a molded structure. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the setting switching button 1311b (to press the pressing operation portion) so that the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused. It is necessary to open the cover), or the color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector SMCN terminal of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. In the main control board 1310 as well, the routing pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted should not be brought close to each other ( It is formed (separated from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (2)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the finger is touching, and a detection from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 195. When not touching, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON (even if the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) is included. Good) may be described as "a modified example of the enter key (3)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the launch control unit of the payout control board 633 described later A firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and a determination key is input based on these firing reference pulses. The presence or absence of ON may be determined. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse in which 100 game balls B can be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "variation example (4) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the movement of the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 was detected. When a distance measuring sensor capable of capable is provided on the game board 5, and the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is transmitted. It may be branched on the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on this detection signal. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted by the light emitting unit passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, so that the movement of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the enter key is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be described as "a modification of the determination key (5)"). ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. .. When the serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the received serial information to set the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and the main control MPU 1310a. It is possible to determine which of the OFFs is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "a modification of the decision key (6)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and OFF was sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided in the setting change board 1311, but may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633 instead. .. For the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit, for example, the pulse width is set to 1 ms when the information conveys the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys the enter key ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the input pulse signal to set the setting key ON and the enter key ON. It is possible to determine which of the above and OFF is the information to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be described as "a modification of the decision key (7)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. The setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and OFF The voltage level of the signal is set on the main control board 1310 by using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V) between the boards extending from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a turns on / off the setting key ON signal, turns on / off the enter key ON signal, and turns off the signal. May be determined to be ON / OFF. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as "variation example (8) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is affixed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch so that the enter key button and the error release switch are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Also, to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation unit of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover for pressing the pressing operation unit). It is necessary to open the button.), The color of the push operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the error release switch or the shape of the pressure operation unit. A different type of switch may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation unit may be used as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the payout control board 633 is provided with the decision key button and the error release switch, the payout is performed as a route between the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted should not be close to each other (separated from each other). ) Is formed. Further, when the decision key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (9)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it is determined whether or not the decision key is ON based on this signal. May be good. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (turned on when the power of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while the main control MPU 1310a is based on the signal from the error release switch. When the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (10)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The logic of the signal from the error release switch is monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and the payout control unit power-on process described later is performed. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (turned on when the power of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, and conveys that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. When this is done, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON (Aspect 2 of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (11)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Turn the 1311a off by 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position), and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched and paid out on the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on an operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the determination key when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. Can be done. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the decision key is ON.

The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the portion and the opening corresponding to the portion. It becomes a structure that is molded into.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. It is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f with the error release switch, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error canceling switch (to press the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch or the pressing operation may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Therefore, also in the main control board 1310, the routing of the wiring pattern in which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted should not be close to each other (mutually). Formed (separately). When the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (12)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Turn the 1311a off by 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position), and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 as a port input for the power-on processing of the payout control unit, which will be described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives this command by transmitting the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later to the main control board 1310 by monitoring in the processing and creating a command. It may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a is a RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 can be used. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of the above and receives a command to convey that fact, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the aspect 2 of the RAM clear switch (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included)) is described as "a modification of the decision key (13). May be described).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the ball cut detection sensor The detection signal from 574 or the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the input and these detection signals, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and creates a command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that transmits to the main control board 1310 and receives this command may determine whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the payout unit). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (16)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a was released from the main body frame open switch. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the main body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (main body frame open). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the enter key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, the outer frame 2 is closed. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a was released from the door frame open switch. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (door frame open). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the enter key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, with respect to the main body frame 4. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. Rotate the key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON operation. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. It may be prepared for 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (18)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. Rotate the key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON operation. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. In preparation for 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position and turning it off. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch 1311a'). Aspect 2 (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (19)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused, a button with a cover that covers one of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f (to press the push operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover), or a different color of the pressing operation unit may be adopted, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f or the pressing operation. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (aspect 2 of the decision key button (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as a "modification example (20) of the decision key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f Can be diverted as the decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). Aspect 3 (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (21)"). The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is a payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also have the function of the error canceling switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need the error canceling switch.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the gate 2002 provided on the game board 5 Gate sensor 2601, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, second starting opening sensor 2401, variable winning opening sensor 2526, first large winning opening sensor 2525, second large The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the winning port sensor 2561) and the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (various sensors, etc.). (The aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and sends the game ball B to the gate 2002 in order to turn on the decision key, or various winning openings. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the out port 1008 or to send the game ball B to the out port 1008.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a was used for the stepping motor, DC motor, and so on. The operation of the movable body (accessory) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a solenoid, and the movable body (accessory) is controlled based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, ranging sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, the operating position, or the like, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (optical combination). The mode of the object sensor (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and the optical sensor is in the original position of the movable body (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, an illegal magnetometer in the game area 5a was detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'in which the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the magnetic sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (24)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, and the various winning openings and gates (gate 2002) provided on the game board 5 When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent activity to enter the ball, the main control MPU1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and is based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. You may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (vibration sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (25)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 was irradiated with radio waves to play a game. The game board 5 and the payout device 580 are provided with radio sensors for detecting fraudulent acts in which the various sensors of the winning openings provided on the board 5 and the various sensors provided in the payout device 580 are malfunctioned to illegally acquire the game ball B. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence / absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the radio wave sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (26)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 350 The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the above, and the detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 may be branched and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (effect operation button). A mode of the unit (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body, but the setting change board 1311 is separated. It may be housed in the body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like in the crimped portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality of parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be closed. The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. , The setting change board 1311 can be modified by invading a wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the enter key button. The structure is such that the wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so as not to be possible. When the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above and is configured so that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, the structure of the base body is changed. A setting change board cover body open / close switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured to be. The case where the cover body is released from the base body based on the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover body can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box). The embodiment may be described as "a modified example of the determination key (28)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and the setting key switch 1311a is set in order to prevent unauthorized modification. A wiring pattern in which a key ON signal is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which an OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting switching button 1311b. As a routing with the wiring pattern in which the signal from is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the terminal (main control) of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. The connection to the connector MSCN terminal of the board 1310 is also formed separately, and the main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern in which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a). Signal is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b. Was formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other) with the wiring pattern to be transmitted, but the wiring pattern to which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the setting key switch Regarding the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of 1311a is transmitted, and one of the wiring patterns, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately are used. The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector MSCN (connection between boards), and the main control may be connected to another connector provided on the setting change board 1311. Other connectors provided on the board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (the mode of routing the wiring pattern may be described as "a modification of the determination key (29)").

Further, the mode in which the determination key is appropriately selected and combined from the above-described modification keys (1) to (29) may be adopted. May be described).

Further, in the above-mentioned set values, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery and the probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, the lottery is determined when shifting from the probability change time to the normal time. It is possible to change the probability of the above, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, and the like, which is advantageous to the player (that is, increase the number of game balls B that the player can acquire). Probability (degree of advantage) is preset. In the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance as the set values, and the set value 1 to the set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, there are game specifications such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of set values in advance and the setting needs to be changed, and the player is advantageous. There is a game specification in which only a single setting value has a probability (advantage) in advance and no setting change is required. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are used. Will depend on the game specifications, and therefore will have a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting value does not need to be changed at all, the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage). Since there is no need to use the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are assigned as the following contents by design change by software. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (an area excluding a specific area among all the areas of the RAM), a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after the RAM is cleared). It can be used as a set value (which can give variation to the starting method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, with respect to the operation of the movable body (accessory) controlled by the main control MPU1310a and the lighting of the light emitting body such as a lamp or LED, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable body (role)). The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "the operation of the object) and the lighting of the light emitting body)" is assigned, and the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "the operation of the movable body (accessory)" is assigned and set as the setting value 2. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitting body" is assigned as the value 3, and the "detailed operation of the movable body (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.) is assigned as the setting value 4. An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "check for interference with a structure or other movable body (accessory), operation order with other movable objects (accessory), etc.)" is assigned, and the setting value 5 is " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 for specifying "lighting of the light emitter in units of one port of the light emitter (lighting of the light emitter in a predetermined output port unit (that is, for each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" is assigned, and " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "no operation" is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "variation example (1) by common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a operates a movable body (accessory) and lights a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED by repeatedly performing an actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM and a timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a movable body that is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the content (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. (Characteristics) can be operated and the light emitting body can be turned on. Depending on the mode of changing the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of times from the end of the fluctuation of the symbol to the demonstration (demo production performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 3. The time setting pattern 3 that specifies "" is assigned, the time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5. A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as the setting value 6 is assigned (a modification of the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state is set to "Modification example by common hardware configuration (2). ) ”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state, the time from the end of the symbol change to the demonstration can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of the demonstration (demo effect performed in the player waiting state) performed after the end of the change of the symbol. In this case, the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (character)" is assigned as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious effect" as a setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serial effect, motion effect of a movable body (character)" as a setting value 4 is assigned. 4 is assigned, and a demo production setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama-style production" as a setting value 5 is assigned, and a demo production setting that specifies "historical drama-style production, movable body (role)" as a setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the content of the demo effect may be described as "variation example (3) by common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the demo effect, it is possible to give variation to the content of the demo effect performed after the end of the change of the symbol.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. The volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned, the volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of setting the change of the default volume may be described as "variation example (4) by common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the set value 1 to the set value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is set to the default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to the setting value 1 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch is lowered (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is increased), and the movement is completed to the end on the minimum volume side. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the pachinko machine stops in front of the machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to the setting value 6 is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the movement is completed to the end on the maximum volume side. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume or may be set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. Depending on the mode of changing the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of volume of error notification sound in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted (that is, are not dependent) by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound by setting the maximum volume is used in the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a clerk to notice, it may be jarring to a player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and "error notification volume setting pattern 4" is assigned as the setting value 5. The error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and the error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (error notification volume volume). The mode of the change setting of the above may be described as "variation example (5) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the set value 1 (the volume that does not mute and the error notification sound can be recognized when the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is stopped) to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume and the maximum volume). The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward (the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the distance from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is several meters). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a controls to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value at which a plurality of default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be set. The brightness of the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 3. The default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, the default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned. 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the default brightness may be described as "variation example (6) by common hardware configuration". is there). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the default brightness, and lights, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body to turn on, blink, and perform gradation points of the light emitting body. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the default brightness, the default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1 to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, and the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification brightness 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as the setting value 6 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "variation example (7) by common hardware configuration"). From the set value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low, although it does not turn off, and the brightness of the lamp that can recognize the error notification when stopped in front of the pachinko machine), the lamp is moved toward the set value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitting body by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, and lights, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitting body. Do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target that the peripheral control board 1510 controls based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body so that the light emitting body can be turned on, blinked, and have gradation points. Depending on the mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitting body such as a lamp or LED in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for the various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (7) by the common hardware configuration, the setting value display permission condition predetermined in the setting value confirmation display process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a is satisfied. Occasionally, it is displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may always be displayed on the setting display 1310g from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is turned off (setting value display). Aspect may be described as "variation example (8) by common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the above-described modified examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modified example (30) of the determination key.

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a is subjected to a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing described later. Clear except for, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. Further, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied at the time of power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later to perform the setting change processing of the main control built-in RAM. Clear all areas except for a specific area, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored to power, In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then advances the game by setting interrupt permission and the like. It will be. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is set. The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (the case may be described as "a modification of a predetermined setting value change permission condition"). is there).

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value set in the set value confirmation display process performed as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later. Display on the vessel 1310 g. Further, as described above, in the RAM clear switch 1310f, the pressing operation unit needs to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period of the pressing operation is limited. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is set. The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not have to be pressed (when described as "a modification of a predetermined set value display permission condition"). There is). In this case, when the modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later, but the main control side power supply described later. In the on-time processing, the game is advanced by performing the initial setting and the start setting of the built-in WDT before the initial setting and the start setting, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. Note that the main control MPU 1310a does not yet set the interrupt enable when the preset value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. Therefore, the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. Instead, the detection signal from the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initially set. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and performing the first ON operation. The signal of the setting key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is read and is not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the input information described later. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a to set the power at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (the momentary power failure that occurs). The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned on by the key cylinder being rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation. Occasionally, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on processing described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs an interrupt enable setting or the like. While the game progresses, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then performs a set value confirmation display process. The game progresses by setting interrupt permission. By adopting this aspect, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the set value confirmation display process is never performed. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by setting the interrupt permission or the like, the current set value that has been set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a is collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 via the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on processing described later. The number of balls of the game ball B is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on processing described later, and the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is calculated by the base monitor 1310h. Display on. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (may be described as "a modified example of how to use the base monitor"). .. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value set in the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission or the like using the base monitor 1310h. When the game starts to proceed by setting the interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310 g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the usage method of the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification of the decision key (30).

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the usage method of the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a lottery result of a normal symbol, a lottery result of a special symbol, and the like. ..

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status and a lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the gate 2002. It is provided with a normal symbol display composed of two LEDs and a normal hold display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the gate 2002.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004, and the first start. A first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the mouth 2004, and a second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2005. A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery results, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005. And have.

Further, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2006 and the second special winning opening 2007 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "hit" or the like. It is equipped with a round indicator consisting of five LEDs that display (number of rounds).

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 167) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like (see FIG. 167).

The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the set plate 1650 which attaches the effect display device 1600 to the back box 3010, although the details will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 and the set plate 1650 of the back unit 3000. Although the details will be described later, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the front surface of the set plate 1650 which is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010 (FIGS. 157 to 159). See). The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the state where the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and is installed in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end protrudes into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 is provided with a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 which are open at all times and can accept the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a. Gate 2002, which detects the passage of game ball B, and variable winning opening 2003, which enables acceptance of game ball B according to the lottery result of a normal symbol drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2002. The first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, which are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and are always open so that the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. The first big prize opening 2006 and the first big prize that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to Depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the mouth 2006 and is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. It is equipped with a second major winning opening 2007 that can accept the game ball B.

Further, the table unit 2000 is further provided with a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open so that the game ball B can be received. ..

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a. The gate 2002 is arranged at a height slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction near the left end of the front view in the game area 5a. The variable winning opening 2003 is located at the upper right of the gate 2002. The first starting port 2004 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2005 is arranged on the right side of the first starting port 2004 in the lower part of the game area 5a and above the first starting port 2004. The first large winning opening 2006 is arranged in the game area 5a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom and directly above the variable winning opening 2003. The second prize opening 2007 is arranged in the game area 5a slightly higher than the height of 3/4 from the bottom and close to the right end of the game area 5a.

The first sub-out opening 2021 is arranged between the second big winning opening 2007 and the left end of the game area 5a. The second sub-out port 2022 is arranged to the right of the second starting port 2005.

The table unit 2000 is mounted in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2004 and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has four general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The lower right unit 2400 provided on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has the second start port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. ing.

Further, the front unit 2000 is provided above the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a large winning opening 2006, a second major winning opening 2007, and a first sub-out opening 2021 and a left side of the center accessory 2500 near the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is provided with a gate member 2600 having a gate 2002, and a specific obstacle nail group 2700 provided on the right side in the game area 5a and composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

The lower right unit 2400, which will be described in detail later, is capable of accepting the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007, and has a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second major winning opening 2007. It is provided with a pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B that was not accepted by the large winning opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 148. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective view of the start port unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 (b) is a perspective view of the start port unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear. The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2004 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 2101, a gutter portion 2102 extending rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front plate portion 2101, and a front plate portion 2101 from the middle of the front plate portion 2102 in the front-rear direction. A flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 that extends outward in the left-right direction in parallel with each other and whose rear surface abuts on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 standing upward from the bottom surface of the gutter portion 2102. It has an induction piece 2104 and. The start port unit 2100 is formed of a transparent member except for the decorative seal 2110.

Further, the starting port unit 2100 has a peeling hole 2105 penetrating the front plate portion 2101, a mounting hole 2106 penetrating the front and rear of each of the left and right flange portions 2103, and the rear surface of each of the left and right flange portions 2103. It has a positioning pin 2107 that protrudes rearward from the position in a columnar shape. Further, the starting port unit 2100 has a decorative sticker 2110 attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 2101.

The front plate portion 2101 of the starting port unit 2100 is formed in a U shape having a rectangular lower side having a semicircular arc shape when viewed from the front. The inside of the front plate portion 2101 is recessed rearward, leaving a substantially constant width from the outer peripheral edge, and a decorative sticker 2110 is attached to the recessed portion. A peeling hole 2105 is provided in a recessed portion of the front plate portion 2101, and the peeling hole 2105 is closed from the front by a decorative seal 2110.

The gutter portion 2102 extends rearward from the front plate portion 2101, and the upper end side is opened upward and the rear end side is opened rearward. A portion of the gutter portion 2102 on the front side of the flange portion 2103 and a front plate portion 2101 form a first starting port 2004 that is open upward. Therefore, the ball entry direction of the first starting port 2004 is vertically downward. The pair of flange portions 2103 are formed symmetrically with each other, and the width in the vertical direction becomes narrower toward the outside in the horizontal direction.

The guide piece portion 2104 is arranged at the center of the front plate portion 2101 and the gutter portion 2102 in the left-right direction, has a constant width in the left-right direction, and has a direction of entering the ball into the first starting port 2004. It is erected vertically in the opposite direction (parallel direction). The guide piece portion 2104 is formed so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 can be guided to the rear. The height of the rear end of the guide piece 2104 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the gutter 2102. Therefore, the game ball B guided by the guiding piece 2104 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the gutter 2102.

The induction piece portion 2104 has a steep piece portion 2104a having a steep slope, and a loose piece portion 2104b having a steeper slope than the steep piece portion 2104a continuing from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2104a. More specifically, the steep piece portion 2104a of the guide piece portion 2104 is linearly inclined from a portion near the upper end on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2101 so as to be lowered toward the rear at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal. The side surface is formed into a triangle (generally a right-angled isosceles triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2104b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2104a so as to be lowered toward the rear at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2004 from above, the game ball B first comes into contact with the steep piece portion 2104a of the guiding piece portion 2104, and the game ball B is reflected by the inclination of the steep piece portion 2104a. After the direction is changed from the lower side to the rear side, the loose piece portion 2104b guides the rear side. As a result, the game ball B can be quickly guided backward from the entrance of the first starting port 2004 and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 side.

In the peeling hole 2105, a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side in a state where the decorative sticker 2110 is attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 2101, and the decorative seal 2110 is pressed forward from the rear by the rod-shaped member. By doing so, a part of the decorative sticker 2110 can be rolled up from the front plate portion 2101 to the front. Then, the decorative sticker 2110 can be easily removed (peeled) from the front plate portion 2101 by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion of the decorative sticker 2110. As a result, workability such as reattachment work of the decorative sticker 2110 at the time of manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal can be improved.

Further, since the peeling hole 2105 is hidden from the front by attaching the decorative seal 2110 to the front surface of the front plate portion 2101, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2105 and to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the release hole 2105, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the release hole 2105.

The mounting hole 2106 is a countersunk hole, and the starting port unit 2100 is mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) by inserting a mounting screw (counter-screw) from the front. The positioning pin 2107 is provided closer to the peripheral edge of the flange portion 2103 than the mounting hole 2106, and is provided within a predetermined range (see FIG. 150 (c)) from the adjacent mounting hole 2106. There is. The positioning pin 2107 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 (see FIG. 190 (b)) formed in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) with a predetermined fitting tolerance.

In the starting port unit 2100, one mounting hole 2106 and one positioning pin 2107 are set as one set, and two sets are left and right with respect to the vertical line passing through the center of the front plate portion 2101 (gutter portion 2102) in the left-right direction. It is provided at symmetrical positions. The starting port unit 2100 inserts a pair of positioning pins 2107 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 in the game panel 1100, so that the starting port unit 2100 is placed at a specific position in the game area 5a (a center role described later). It can be accurately positioned at the position directly below the central discharge portion 2513a on the stage 2513 of the object 2500). As a result, the probability of receiving the game ball B from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 to the first starting port 2004 can be set within a desired range.

Further, since the starting port unit 2100 is provided with the positioning pin 2107 and the mounting hole 2106 at symmetrical positions with the first starting port 2004 in between, the starting port unit 2100 and the starting port unit 2100 are provided due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity. Even if a contraction difference occurs between the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), it is possible to prevent the center position of the first starting port 2004 from being biased to either the left or right direction, and the first starting port 2004 The central position of can be maintained.

Further, since the starting port unit 2100 has a pair of positioning pins 2107, when the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2107 are used as positioning holes of the game panel 1100. Since the start port unit 2100 can be positioned by inserting it into the 1117, the starter can be started even if the mounting screw is screwed into the screw hole 1116 (see FIG. 190 (b)) of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2106 and tightened. The mouth unit 2100 does not move slightly, and the start port unit 2100 can be reliably attached to a specific position on the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2004 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the center accessory 2500 is in the left-right direction. Located just below the center. More specifically, the first start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100 is located directly below the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, the game ball B released from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is received by the first starting port 2004 with a high probability.

The start port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2004 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and delivers the game ball B to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Can be done. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is detected by the first start port sensor 3002 and then discharged downward.

In the above-mentioned starting port unit 2100, the rear end side of the upper end surface of the induction piece 2104 is shown to have a pin angle, but the present invention is not limited to this, and C chamfering or R is applied to the rear end side of the upper end surface. A chamfered portion such as a chamfer may be provided.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 149. FIG. 149 (a) is a front view of the side unit in the front unit, and FIG. 149 (b) is a perspective view of the side unit in the front unit as viewed from behind. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes four general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be accepted at all times. The four general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. Each of the four general winning openings 2001 is open upward.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 2201, a rear extending portion 2202 extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201, and a front plate portion 2201 from the rear ends at both left and right ends of the rear extending portion 2202. It has a flange portion 2203 extending outward in parallel with the above. On the front surface of the front plate portion 2201, a portion below a certain width from the upper edge is recessed rearward. A side unit seal 2220 is attached to a recessed portion on the front surface of the front plate portion 2201. Further, the front plate portion 2201 is inclined so that a portion having a certain width from the upper edge on the rear surface becomes thinner toward the upper side (it is inclined so as to move backward toward the lower side).

The rear extending portion 2202 has a first gutter portion 2202a, a second gutter portion 2202b, a third gutter portion 2202c, and a fourth gutter portion 2202d from the left, and the bottom surface is half open upward and rearward, respectively. It is curved in an arc shape. The first gutter part 2202a, the second gutter part 2202b, the third gutter part 2202c, and the fourth gutter part 2202d each form a general winning opening 2001 in cooperation with the front plate part 2201. Further, in the first gutter portion 2202a, the second gutter portion 2202b, the third gutter portion 2202c, and the fourth gutter portion 2202d, the portions from the lower end to a certain height are behind the left and right ends of the rear extension portion 2202. It extends rearward from the end (flange portion 2203).

The height of the first gutter portion 2202a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B from the lower end to the upper end, and the upper end side opens diagonally to the upper right in the front view. The height of the second gutter portion 2202b from the lower end to the upper end is about twice the diameter of the game ball B, and the upper end side is open upward in the front view. The height of the third gutter portion 2202c from the lower end to the upper end is about twice the diameter of the game ball B, and the upper end side opens diagonally to the upper right in the front view. The height of the fourth gutter portion 2202d from the lower end to the upper end is about twice the diameter of the game ball B, and the upper end side opens diagonally to the upper right in front view.

The four general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200, when assembled on the game board 5, are in a positional relationship with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a, and are shown in FIG. 149 (a). ) Is the direction of entry as indicated by the arrow. More specifically, the entry direction of the general winning opening 2001 (the leftmost general winning opening 2001) composed of the first gutter portion 2202a is diagonally downward to the left as shown in the figure, and is in the direction of the entry. The upper end surface of the steep piece portion 2210a of the first induction piece part 2211, which will be described later, is located on the axis. The entry direction of the general winning opening 2001 (the second general winning opening 2001 from the left) composed of the second gutter portion 2202b is diagonally downward to the right as shown in the figure, and the axis of the entry direction is It passes above the second induction piece 2212, which will be described later. The entry direction of the general winning opening 2001 (third general winning opening 2001 from the left) composed of the third gutter portion 2202c is diagonally downward to the left as shown in the figure, and the axis of the entry direction is described later. It passes above the third induction piece 2213. The entry direction of the general winning opening 2001 (the fourth (most right) general winning opening 2001 from the left) composed of the fourth gutter portion 2202d is diagonally downward to the left as shown in the figure, and the entry is made. The axis of the direction passes above the fourth guide piece portion 2214, which will be described later.

Further, the rear extending portion 2202 is provided on the right side of the fourth gutter portion 2202d, and has a shelf portion 2202e that is gently inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The rear surface of the flange portion 2203 is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). Flange portions 2203 are provided at two locations, a portion to the left of the left end of the first gutter portion 2202a and a portion at the lower right corner of the shelf portion 2202e.

Further, the side unit 2200 further has a guide piece portion 2210 for guiding the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100. The guide piece portion 2210 extends in the front-rear direction from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201 to the rear end of the rear extending portion 2202. The guide piece portion 2210 has a steep piece portion 2210a having a steep slope, and a loose piece portion 2210b having a steeper slope than the steep piece portion 2210a continuing from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a.

The guide piece portion 2210 of the side unit 2200 includes a first guide piece portion 2211 provided in the first gutter portion 2202a, a second guide piece portion 2212 provided in the second gutter portion 2202b, and a third gutter portion. It is composed of a third lead piece portion 2213 provided in 2202c and a fourth guide piece portion 2214 provided in the fourth gutter portion 2202d.

The first lead piece portion 2211 of the side unit 2200 has a different configuration from the second lead piece portion 2212, the third lead piece portion 2213, and the fourth guide piece portion 2214, and the above-mentioned steep piece portion 2210a and loose piece In addition to the configuration of the portion 2210b, it has the following configuration. The first induction piece portion 2211 is erected in a direction (parallel direction) opposite to the ball entry direction of the general winning opening 2001, and the change piece portion 2211a for changing the flow direction of the game ball B rearward and the ball entry. It is erected in a direction different from the direction (including the opposite direction), and is composed of a rear piece portion 2211b that guides the game ball B to the rear. The modified piece 2211a and the rear piece 2211b of the first induction piece 2211 each have a steep piece 2210a and a loose piece 2210b, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the modified piece portion 2211a is erected diagonally from the upper left portion to the upper right portion on the bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a which is curved in an arc shape, and the rear piece portion 2211b. Is erected vertically upward from the lowest portion on the bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a which is curved in an arc shape. Therefore, in the modified piece portion 2211a, the portion behind the portion where the rear piece portion 2211b branches is located to the left and above the rear piece portion 2211b in the front view.

More specifically, the first induction piece portion 2211 is formed so that the upper end surface (tip surface) of the modified piece portion 2211a is orthogonal to the ball entry direction, and the front and left sides of the modified piece portion 2211 are higher than the horizontal plane. It is formed like this. The upper end surface of the modified piece 2211a is linear so as to decrease at a steeper angle (45 degrees with respect to the bottom of the modified piece 2211a) from the portion near the upper end on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201 toward the rear. After tilting to, it bends at a gentle angle (an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the base of the modified piece 2211a) so as to become lower toward the rear, and is tilted linearly. The steep angle portion of the modified piece portion 2211a is the steep piece portion 2210a, and the loose angle portion is the loose piece portion 2210b. The side surface of the steep piece 2210a of the modified piece 2211a is formed into a triangle (generally a right-angled isosceles triangle).

The rear piece 2211b is linearly inclined so as to branch from the middle of the steep piece 2210a in the modified piece 2211a so as to decrease at a steep angle toward the rear, and then is loose so as to decrease toward the rear. It bends at an angle (5 degrees to the horizontal) and tilts linearly. The steep angle portion of the rear piece portion 2211b is the steep piece portion 2210a, and the loose angle portion is the loose piece portion 2210b. In the rear piece portion 2211b of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the steep piece portion 2210a is changed so that the front and left sides are higher. The rear piece portion 2211b is formed on the same surface as the upper surface of the steep piece portion 2210a of the steep piece portion 2211a. The upper surface of the portion 2210b is formed so as to be higher only in the front with respect to the horizontal plane. Therefore, the upper end surface of the rear piece portion 2211b is twisted between the steep piece portion 2210a and the loose piece portion 2210b.

In the general winning opening 2001 provided with the first induction piece portion 2211, when the game ball B enters from the diagonally upper right along the diagonally lower left lower ball entry direction, the upper end surface of the steep piece portion 2210a in the changed piece portion 2211a is reached. The abutment is made, and the distribution direction is changed from the diagonally lower left direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the rear and downward directions, and toward the rear of the rear piece 2211b branching from the middle of the changed piece 2211a. It will roll backward on the lower upper end surface. As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the general winning opening 2001 can be smoothly and quickly guided backward.

According to the first induction piece portion 2211 of the side unit 2200, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the ball entry direction is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the ball extends in the direction opposite to the ball entry direction (parallel direction). Since the modified piece portion 2211a is provided, the game ball B that has entered the general winning opening 2001 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface of the modified piece portion 2211a. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner side of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the first guide piece portion 2211, the side surface of the first guide piece portion 2211, etc. Since it is possible to prevent the first induction piece portion 2211 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to contact with the surface or the side surface, ball clogging may occur due to the broken pieces of the first induction piece portion 2211. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to ball clogging, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

By the way, when only the changing piece portion 2211a standing in the direction opposite to the entering direction (parallel direction) of the game ball B is provided, as described above, the changing piece portion 2211a is the first gutter portion. Since it is provided at a position on the upper left side of the lowest portion of the bottom surface of 2202a, the game ball B comes into contact with the bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a. Since the bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a extends horizontally and is not inclined, if the game ball B comes into contact with the bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a, the distribution of the game ball B may be stopped. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rear piece portion 2211b is projected upward from the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a, and the upper end surface of the rear piece portion 2211b is lowered toward the rear. The game ball B does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the horizontal first gutter portion 2202a, and is reliably guided (circulated) backward by the inclined upper end surface of the rear piece portion 2211b. it can.

It should be noted that the approach speed of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001 varies from place to place, and when the approach speed of the game ball B is high, the entry direction of the game ball B is in the diagonally lower left direction. Since the force to move to the left is strongly (largely) acting on the game ball B that has entered the mouth 2001, the game ball B will move to the left from the upper end surface of the rear piece 2211b by the force. Will be. At this time, as described above, a part of the steep piece portion 2210a and the loose piece portion 2210b of the modified piece portion 2211a are located on the upper left of the rear piece portion 2211b, so that the portion of the modified piece portion 2211a is located. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B from moving excessively to the left in the first gutter portion 2202a, and leans against the modified piece portion 2211a (or the modified piece portion 2211a and the rear piece portion 2211b). The game ball B can be guided backward (in a state of straddling). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first gutter portion 2202a. Therefore, according to the first induction piece portion 2211, since the rear piece portion 221b is bifurcated from the modified piece portion 2211a, it is possible to deal with the game ball B (winning ball) flowing in at various speeds. Is.

Subsequently, the second guide piece portion 2212 of the side unit 2200 is erected vertically upward from the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the second gutter portion 2202b which is curved in a semicircular shape. The second guide piece portion 2212 is formed so that the upper end surface becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B can be guided rearward. The height of the rear end of the second guide piece portion 2212 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the second gutter portion 2202b. Therefore, the game ball B guided to the second guide piece portion 2212 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the second gutter portion 2202b.

The second induction piece portion 2212 also has a steep piece portion 2210a and a loose piece portion 2210b that continues from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a and has a gentler inclination than the steep piece portion 2210a. .. The steep piece 2210a of the second guide piece 2212 is horizontal from the lowest part of the bottom surface of the second gutter part 2202b on the rear surface of the front plate part 2201 to a height substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball B. It is linearly inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the side, and the shape of the side surface is formed into a triangle (generally a right-angled isosceles triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2210b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a to the rear end of the second gutter portion 2202b so as to become lower toward the rear at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

The general winning opening 2001 composed of the second gutter portion 2202b has the general winning opening 2001 (front plate portion) because the axis of the game ball B in the entry direction passes above the second induction piece portion 2212. It has a certain height from the upper end edge of 2201) to the upper end surface of the second induction piece 2212. Therefore, when the game ball B enters along the entry direction facing diagonally lower right in the general winning opening 2001, the upper end edge of the front plate portion 2201 (actually, the obstacle nail planted immediately before). Since it flows down on a parabola from N), the distribution direction of the game ball B is directed downward by the time the game ball B reaches the second guide piece portion 2212. Therefore, the game ball B is the second guide piece. It comes into contact with the portion of the steep piece portion 2210a on the upper end surface of the portion 2212. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner portion of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the second guide piece portion 2212, the side surface of the second guide piece portion 2212, or the like.

Then, the game ball B in contact with the steep piece portion 2210a of the second induction piece portion 2212 is changed in its distribution direction from the lower side to the rear so as to be reflected by the inclination of the steep piece portion 2210a, and then the loose piece. It will be guided backward by the portion 2210b. As a result, the game ball B can be quickly guided backward from the entrance of the general winning opening 2001 and delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 side.

The third guide piece portion 2213 of the side unit 2200 is erected vertically upward from the lowest portion of the bottom surface curved in a semicircular shape of the third gutter portion 2202c. The third guide piece portion 2213 is formed so that the upper end surface becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B can be guided rearward. The height of the rear end of the third guide piece portion 2213 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the third gutter portion 2202c. Therefore, the game ball B guided to the third guide piece portion 2213 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the third gutter portion 2202c.

The third induction piece portion 2213 also has a steep piece portion 2210a and a loose piece portion 2210b that continues from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a and has a gentler inclination than the steep piece portion 2210a. .. The steep piece 2210a of the third guide piece 2213 is horizontal from the lowest part of the bottom surface of the third gutter part 2202c on the rear surface of the front plate part 2201 to a height substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball B. It is linearly inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the side, and the shape of the side surface is formed into a triangle (generally a right-angled isosceles triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2210b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a to the rear end of the third gutter portion 2202c so as to become lower toward the rear at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

The general winning opening 2001 composed of the third gutter portion 2202c has the general winning opening 2001 (front plate portion) because the axis of the game ball B in the entry direction passes above the third induction piece portion 2213. It has a certain height from the upper end edge of 2201) to the upper end surface of the third induction piece 2213. Therefore, when the game ball B enters along the entry direction facing diagonally lower left in the general winning opening 2001, the upper end edge of the front plate portion 2201 (actually, the obstacle nail N planted immediately before) ) Flows down on a parabola, so that the game ball B is directed downward by the time the game ball B reaches the third guide piece portion 2213. Therefore, the game ball B is directed to the third guide piece portion 2213. It comes into contact with the portion of the steep piece portion 2210a on the upper end surface of 2213. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner portion of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the third guide piece portion 2213, the side surface of the third guide piece portion 2213, and the like.

Then, the game ball B in contact with the steep piece portion 2210a of the third induction piece portion 2213 is changed in its flow direction from the lower side to the rear so as to be reflected by the inclination of the steep piece portion 2210a, and then the loose piece. It will be guided backward by the portion 2210b. As a result, the game ball B can be quickly guided backward from the entrance of the general winning opening 2001 and delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 side.

The fourth guide piece portion 2214 of the side unit 2200 is erected vertically upward from the lowest portion of the bottom surface curved in a semicircular shape of the fourth gutter portion 2202d. The fourth guide piece portion 2214 is formed so that the upper end surface becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B can be guided rearward. The height of the rear end of the fourth guide piece portion 2214 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the fourth gutter portion 2202d. Therefore, the game ball B guided to the fourth guide piece portion 2214 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the fourth gutter portion 2202d.

The fourth induction piece portion 2214 also has a steep piece portion 2210a and a loose piece portion 2210b that continues from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a and has a gentler inclination than the steep piece portion 2210a. .. The steep piece 2210a of the fourth guide piece 2214 is horizontal from the lowest part of the bottom surface of the fourth gutter part 2202d on the rear surface of the front plate part 2201 to a height substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball B. It is linearly inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the side, and the shape of the side surface is formed into a triangle (generally a right-angled isosceles triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2210b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a to the rear end of the fourth gutter portion 2202d so as to become lower toward the rear at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

The general winning opening 2001 composed of the fourth gutter portion 2202d has the general winning opening 2001 (front plate portion) because the axis of the game ball B in the entry direction passes above the fourth induction piece portion 2214. It has a certain height from the upper end edge of 2201) to the upper end surface of the fourth induction piece 2214. Therefore, when the game ball B enters along the entry direction facing diagonally lower left in the general winning opening 2001, the upper end edge of the front plate portion 2201 (actually, the obstacle nail N planted immediately before) ) Flows down on a parabola, so that the game ball B is directed downward by the time the game ball B reaches the fourth guide piece portion 2214. Therefore, the game ball B is directed to the fourth guide piece portion 2214. It comes into contact with the portion of the steep piece portion 2210a on the upper end surface of 2214. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner portion of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the fourth guide piece portion 2214, the side surface of the fourth guide piece portion 2214, and the like.

Then, the game ball B in contact with the steep piece portion 2210a of the fourth induction piece portion 2214 is changed in its distribution direction from the lower side to the rear so as to be reflected by the inclination of the steep piece portion 2210a, and then the loose piece. It will be guided backward by the portion 2210b. As a result, the game ball B can be quickly guided backward from the entrance of the general winning opening 2001 and delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 side.

Further, the side unit 2200 has a peeling hole 2204 that penetrates back and forth at a portion of the front plate portion 2201 where the front surface is recessed rearward, and a mounting hole 2205 that penetrates back and forth at each of the two flange portions 2203. The two flange portions 2203 have a positioning pin 2206 that projects rearward from the rear surface of each flange portion 2203 in a columnar shape. The front side of the release hole 2204 is closed by the side unit seal 2220 attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 2201.

In the release hole 2204, a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side in a state where the side unit seal 2220 is attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 2201, and the side unit seal 2220 is pushed forward from the rear by the rod-shaped member. By pressing to, a part of the side unit seal 2220 can be rolled up from the front plate portion 2201 to the front. Then, the side unit seal 2220 can be easily removed (peeled) from the front plate portion 2201 by the operator pulling the rolled portion of the side unit seal 2220. As a result, workability such as reattachment work of the side unit seal 2220 at the time of manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal can be improved.

Further, since the peeling hole 2204 is hidden from the front by attaching the side unit seal 2220 to the front surface of the front plate portion 2201, deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2204 can be suppressed, and the player can see the peeling hole 2204. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the peel hole 2204, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peel hole 2204.

The mounting hole 2205 is a countersunk hole, and the side unit 2200 is mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) by inserting a mounting screw (counter-screw) from the front. The positioning pin 2206 is provided within a predetermined range (see FIG. 150 (c)) from the adjacent mounting holes 2205. The positioning pin 2206 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 (see FIG. 190 (b)) formed in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) with a predetermined fitting tolerance.

In the side unit 2200, one mounting hole 2205 and one positioning pin 2206 are provided as one set, and two sets are provided so that four general winning openings 2001 are located between them. The side unit 2200 can accurately position the side unit 2200 at a specific position in the game area 5a by inserting a pair of positioning pins 2206 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 in the game panel 1100. it can. As a result, the acceptance probability of the game ball B that is accepted into the general winning opening 2001 through the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the game panel 1100 can be set within a desired range.

Further, since the side unit 2200 has a pair of positioning pins 2206, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2206 are inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100. Since the side unit 2200 can be positioned by inserting it, the side unit 2200 moves when the mounting screw is screwed into the screw hole 1116 (see FIG. 190 (b)) of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2205. It is possible to prevent it from being loosened or floating from the game panel 1100, facilitating the mounting work, and even if the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2205 and tightened. The side unit 2200 does not move slightly, and the side unit 2200 can be reliably attached to a specific position on the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, four general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the state where the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. Lower right unit]
Next, the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. The lower right unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2005, a second sub-out port 2022, and a second starting port sensor 2401 (see FIG. 153 and the like) that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005. , Is equipped.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 extending left and right over the entire width in the left-right direction, a pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and a pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403. It has a pseudo-out opening 2404 provided below the vicinity of the left end of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and the pseudo-out opening 2404 are open toward the front. The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 has a larger (wider) opening on the left and right than the second major winning opening 2007. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the width of the pseudo large winning opening 2402 in the left-right direction is about 170 mm, which is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the normally used large winning opening.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 that opens and closes the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and a pseudo-large winning opening solenoid 2406 that opens and closes the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 (see FIG. 153 and the like). ) And. The pseudo-winning door 2405 has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and is rotatably supported around an axis whose lower side extends in the horizontal direction.

In the lower right unit 2400, the second starting port 2005 is located to the right of the pseudo out port 2404 and directly above the pseudo large winning opening 2402, and the second sub out port 2022 is located to the right of the second starting port 2005. They are placed adjacent to each other.

When the lower right unit 2400 is assembled on the game board 5, the left end is located near the right side of the out port 1008, the right end is close to the right rail 1005, and most of the lower right rail 1004 is in the left-right direction. It is formed to have a length that covers the upper part.

The lower right unit 2400 has a flat plate-shaped base plate 2407 that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 and projects forward from the base plate 2407 to form a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a. It has a possible partition 2410 and. The base plate 2407 and the partition portion 2410 are formed of a transparent material. The second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and the pseudo-out opening 2404 are provided so as to penetrate the base plate 2407, and the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 is provided on the base plate 2407. It is provided on the rear side. A pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and a pseudo-out opening 2404 are provided inside the dividing portion 2410.

The partition portion 2410 includes a bottom wall portion 2411 that extends to the left and right over the entire width and is inclined so that the right end side is higher, and a first standing wall portion 2412 that extends upward from the right end of the bottom wall portion 2411. , The right inclined wall portion 2413 extending diagonally from the upper end of the first standing wall portion 2412 to the lower left, and the right lateral wall portion 2414 extending horizontally from the lower end of the right inclined wall portion 2413 to the first standing wall portion 2412. The second vertical wall portion 2415, which is separated from the right horizontal wall portion 2414 to the left and extends upward from the portion at the same height as the lower end of the right horizontal wall portion 2414, and the second vertical wall portion 2415. The left inclined wall part 2416 extending diagonally to the lower right from the part having the same height as the upper end of the first standing wall part 2412 to the same height as the lower end of the second standing wall part 2415, and the second from the lower end of the left inclined wall part 2416. The left side wall part 2417 extending horizontally to the left of the standing wall part 2415, and the inclined wall part 2418 extending diagonally to the lower left from the left end of the left side wall part 2417 to the same position as the left end of the bottom wall part 2411. It has a third standing wall portion 2419 extending downward from the lower end of the inclined wall portion 2418 to a position below the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411.

The bottom wall portion 2411 is formed to have a length approximately one game ball B shorter than the length of the lower right rail 1004 in the left-right direction. The distance between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the second large winning opening 2007. The distance between the lower end of the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the lower end of the left inclined wall portion 2416 is approximately half the length in the left-right direction of the second large winning opening 2007.

The second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 are arranged at a portion of the left lateral wall portion 2417 between the second standing wall portion 2415 and the inclined wall portion 2418. The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is arranged directly below the right side wall portion 2414, the left side wall portion 2417, and the inclined wall portion 2418, and the portion along the inclined wall portion 2418 is diagonally cut out with respect to the horizontally long rectangle. The shape is open toward the front. The pseudo out port 2404 is arranged adjacent to the portion where the bottom wall portion 2411 and the third standing wall portion 2419 intersect.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 is a flat plate-shaped lower right decorative portion 2431 that closes the front end side of the triangular frame formed by the first vertical wall portion 2412, the right inclined wall portion 2413, and the right lateral wall portion 2414. The front end side of the triangular frame formed by the second standing wall portion 2415, the left inclined wall portion 2416, and the left lateral wall portion 2417 is closed, and the front of the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. It is provided in the center between the extended flat plate-shaped lower right left decorative portion 2432, the lower right right decorative portion 2431, and the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and is provided in the shape of a downward arrow from the base plate 2407 to the front. It has a protruding lower right middle decorative portion 2433 (see FIG. 137 and the like).

Further, the lower right unit 2400 is provided behind the base plate 2407, and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, the lower right right decorative portion 2431, the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and the lower right middle decorative portion 2433 are independent of each other. Further, it has a lower right decorative substrate 2434 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting and decorating are mounted on the front surface.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 has a translucent decorative sticker on the front surface of each of the pseudo grand prize opening door 2405, the lower right right decorative portion 2431, the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and the lower right middle decorative portion 2433. Is pasted.

The lower right unit 2400 is provided in the lower right corner in the game area 5a in a state where the game ball B cannot be distributed on the right side and the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Around the upper part of each of the right inclined wall portion 2413, the second standing wall portion 2415, and the left inclined wall portion 2416, the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward, and a plurality of obstacles are present in the relevant portions. Nail N is planted. Further, the portion between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 is located below the second large winning opening 2007 in the center accessory 2500. The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 is located near the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415, that is, the inside of the dividing portion 2410 is the game. It is a space (pseudo-game area 2010) independent of the area 5a.

Further, in the state where the lower right unit 2400 is assembled on the game board 5, the second starting port 2005 is located slightly to the right of the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500, and the inclined wall portion 2418. The lower end (left end) of is located below the first starting port 2004. Also above the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418, the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted in the relevant parts. It is installed.

Further, in the state where the lower right unit 2400 is assembled on the game board 5, the pseudo out port 2404 is separated from the out port 1008 by about one game ball B to the upper right. In addition, the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the front through a transparent base plate 2407 or the like.

The lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 to the rear of the game panel 1100, detect it with the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharge it downward. Further, the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

The lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and a pseudo-out opening 2404 inside the dividing portion 2410 (pseudo-game area 2010). Inside the partition portion 2410, only the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 is formed so as to circulate.

Then, in the lower right unit 2400, in the normal state, the pseudo-large winning door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo-large winning door 2405 closes the pseudo-large winning door 2402 so that the game ball B cannot be accepted. ing. In this state, the game ball B supplied to the inside of the partition portion 2410 (pseudo-game area 2010) passes in front of the pseudo-grand prize opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402, and passes through the bottom wall portion 2411. After flowing down and rolling to the left along the slope of the bottom wall 2411, the third standing wall 2419 prevents further left rolling and opens forward at the site. It is accepted by the pseudo-out port 2404. The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is not returned to the game area 5a, is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and is then discharged downward.

In the lower right unit 2400, the bottom wall portion 2411 is provided close to the lower right rail 1004, and the pseudo out port 2404 is provided close to the out port 1008, so that the bottom wall portion 2411 is left on the left. The game ball B, which has been rolled in the direction and received in the pseudo-out port 2404, can make the player think that the game ball B has been rolled in the lower right rail 1004 and has been received in the out port 1008.

The pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 has the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first starting port 2004 and the second starting opening 2005, and the first (Ii) When the pseudo-large winning opening solenoid 2406 is energized according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the upper end rotates so as to move forward around the lower side, and the upper end is located slightly above the lower end. It is in a state of protruding forward from the base plate 2407 (game panel 1100) so that the rear side is lowered. In this state, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 can accept the game ball B. Then, when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted, if the game ball B flows down in front of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, it hits the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 protruding forward. It comes into contact with the door and is guided backward by the inclination of the pseudo-large winning door 2405 to be accepted by the pseudo-large winning door 2402.

Since the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 extends to the left even to the lower part of the right discharge passage 2565 for discharging downward from the center accessory 2500 without being accepted by the second large winning opening 2007, it is pseudo. If the game ball B is discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 while the large winning opening 2402 (pseudo large winning opening door 2405) is opening and closing, the game ball B is also accepted by the pseudo large winning opening 2402. The player can be illusioned as if it were.

In addition, since it extends to the left directly below the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022, it is accepted by the second large winning opening 2007 when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is opening and closing. As if the game ball B, which was discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500 and was received in the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022, was also received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. It can be an illusion.

The game ball B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. The pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 can also be visually recognized from the player side through the open pseudo-large winning opening 2402. By visually recognizing the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403, the player can be illusioned as if the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is a real large winning opening.

The pseudo grand prize opening sensor 2403 is for executing a predetermined effect by detecting the game ball B, and opening and closing the pseudo grand prize opening door 2405 by counting the number of game balls B. .. By opening and closing the pseudo-large prize opening door 2405 according to the number of game balls B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, it is possible to make it easier to make the illusion that the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is a real large-winning opening. it can.

According to the lower right unit 2400 of the present embodiment, since it has a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 that is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the large winning opening that is normally used and extends long to the left and right, it is a conventional pachinko machine. If it has a big winning opening that you have never seen before, you can make the player feel like you have a strong impact on the player, and as a pachinko machine to play with the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected positively, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced.

Further, according to the lower right unit 2400, the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 are above the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 in which the left-right direction of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is larger than that of the second large winning opening 2007. And a sloping wall portion 2418 is provided, and between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 (right sloping wall portion 2413 and left sloping wall portion 2413) separated by about half the distance in the left-right direction of the second prize opening 2007. The game ball B is accepted into the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 through (between 2416). As a result, a plurality of game balls B received in the second prize opening 2007 can be aggregated in a narrow range and directed to the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, so that the game received in the second prize opening 2007 It is possible to make the player illusion that a larger number of game balls B than the ball B are accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and it is possible to greatly entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 147 and 150 to 1534. 150 (a) is a front view of the center accessory in the front unit, (b) is an enlarged view of the arrow A portion in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of (b). FIG. 151 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 152 (a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel plate and the obstacle nail, and FIG. 152 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 153 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate disassembled in FIG. 152 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 (b) shows the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate disassembled in FIG. 152. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 154 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 152 when only the center right front plate is disassembled and viewed from the front.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. ..

The center accessory 2500 will be described in detail later, but has a variable winning opening 2003 that opens and closes the game ball B so as to be acceptable according to the lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2002, and the first start. The first big prize that opens and closes the game ball B so that it can be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the mouth 2004 or the second starting port 2005 or the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is equipped with a mouth 2006 and a second prize winning mouth 2007.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion (a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501) protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and is driven into the game area 5a. The game ball B cannot enter the frame.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel plate 1110 is inserted. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from invading from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state of being assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (thickness of 1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, in the support portion 2503, the end side protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player exerts the effect as reinforcement. I try to make it inconspicuous.

The center accessory 2500 further has a plurality of mounting holes 2504 for mounting on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a plurality of positioning pins 2505 for positioning on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. .. The mounting holes 2504 are provided in the flange portion 2502 so as to penetrate the front and rear portions. The mounting hole 2504 is a countersunk hole (see FIG. 150 (c)), and it is desirable that the mounting hole 2504 has a seating surface having a diameter of 7 mm or more.

Further, it is desirable that the mounting hole 2504 is provided at a position separated from the standing wall (for example, the peripheral wall portion 2501) by a predetermined value (for example, 4.5 mm) or more. Thereby, when assembling the game board 5, it is possible to prevent the screw tightening holder for tightening the mounting screw from interfering with the standing wall. At the time of assembly, the mounting screws are provided through the plurality of mounting holes 2504 at the same time, and the mounting holes 2504 are separated from each other by a predetermined value (for example, 29 mm) or more. This makes it possible to avoid interference between the screw tightening holders.

The positioning pin 2505 projects in a columnar shape from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 to the rear. The positioning pin 2505 has a length substantially the same as the thickness of the protruding flange portion 2502 (in the present embodiment, the effective length is 2 mm) and protrudes rearward. The positioning pin 2505 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 (see FIG. 190 (b)) formed in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) with a predetermined fitting tolerance. The positioning pin 2505 has a conical tip, which facilitates insertion of the game panel 1100 into the positioning hole 1117.

The plurality of positioning pins 2505 are located in the lower right part of the stage 2513 in the flange part 2502, the lower part of the warp entrance 2511, the lower part of the left guide passage group 2530, the lower part of the first sub-out port 2021, and the upper left corner. It is provided in five places, each of which is arranged so that a part affecting the game is sandwiched between them. Specifically, a positioning pin 2505 at the lower right of the stage 2513 and a positioning pin 2505 below the warp inlet 2511 are provided between the stage 2513 related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004. Has been done. Further, a positioning pin 2505 below the warp entrance 2511 and a positioning pin 2505 of the left guide passage group 2530 are provided between the variable winning opening 2003 and the first large winning opening 2006. Further, a positioning pin 2505 of the left guide passage group 2530 and a positioning pin 2505 in the upper left corner are provided between the first prize opening 2006. Further, a positioning pin 2505 at the lower right of the stage 2513 and a positioning pin 2505 below the first sub-out opening 2021 are provided between the second big winning opening 2007.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which some mounting portions 2504 are not paired with the positioning pin 2505, such as the mounting portion 2504 in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be paired (set) with the positioning pin 2505 in all the mounting holes 2504. In this case, the center accessory 2500 can be more firmly fixed to the game board 5 (game panel 1100). Further, since the desired position of the game panel 1100, that is, the positional relationship between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the obstacle nail N can be accurately positioned over the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 can be used. Variation of the flow of the game ball B for each game board 5 (product) in the outer area (for example, the area above and below the left guide passage group 2530, the space forming portion 2550 below the right guide passage group 2540, etc.) Can be reduced as much as possible.

The positioning pin 2505 is provided so as to be adjacent to the mounting hole 2504, and the distance L1 between the centers of the adjacent mounting holes 2504 is provided within a predetermined range. The distance L1 is set to be within a range of 1 to 6 times the length of the positioning pin 2505, preferably within a range of 5 mm to 8 mm. The reason why the distance L1 is within the above range is that if it is smaller (closer) than the above range, the mounting screw is screwed through the positioning hole 1117 and the mounting hole 2504 into which the positioning pin 2505 is inserted in the game panel 1100. This is because if the screw holes 1116 are too close to each other, the hole positions may be displaced or the holes may be distorted when the positioning holes 1117 or the screw holes 1116 are formed in the game panel 1100. Further, if it is larger (far) than the above range, when the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 via the mounting hole 2504, the portion between the positioning pin 2505 and the mounting hole 2504 in the flange portion 2502 is distorted. This is because there is a risk that cracks (cracks) are likely to occur.

The positional relationship between the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 is not limited to the center accessory 2500, but the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the lower right unit 2400 (pseudo attacker unit), and the gate member 2600. , Etc. can also be applied.

Further, the positioning pin 2505 is provided on the rear surface side of the portion of the front surface of the flange portion 2502 where the operator can contact from the front. That is, the positioning pin 2505 is not provided at a portion behind the member (for example, the front plate portion) that is separated from the flange portion 2502 in the forward direction. As a result, when assembling the game board 5, the position determination pin 2505 can be reliably pushed into the position determination hole 1117 of the game panel 1100 by pressing the front surface of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the position determination pin 2505 is provided. it can.

Since the center accessory 2500 has a plurality of positioning pins 2505, the center accessory 2500 can be played by inserting the positioning pins 2505 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 in the game panel 1100. It can be accurately positioned at a specific position within the region 5a. As a result, the probability of accepting the game ball B to the stage 2513, the variable winning opening 2003, the first major winning opening 2006, the second major winning opening 2007, etc. provided in the center accessory 2500 is within a desired range. Can be.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 has a plurality of positioning pins 2505, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2505 are used as positioning holes in the game panel 1100. Since the center accessory 2500 can be positioned by inserting it into the 1117, the center accessory 2500 may move or the game panel may move when the mounting screw is screwed into the screw hole 1116 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504. It is possible to prevent the player from floating from the 1100, which facilitates the mounting work, and even if the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504 and tightened, the center accessory 2500 can be used. The center accessory 2500 can be reliably attached to a specific position on the game panel 1100 (game area 5a) without moving delicately.

The center accessory 2500 has a peeling hole 2508 that penetrates back and forth at a portion of the flange portion 2502 where a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface (see FIG. 151). The front side of the release hole 2508 is closed by a decorative seal. The release hole 2508 has a decorative seal attached to the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side, and the decorative seal is pressed forward from the rear by the rod-shaped member. , A part of the decorative seal can be rolled up from the flange portion 2502 forward. Then, the decorative sticker can be easily removed (peeled) from the flange portion 2502 by the operator pulling the rolled portion of the decorative sticker. As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as reattaching the decorative sticker at the time of manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal.

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance 2511 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the left side of the front view and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The warp outlet 2512, which is made capable of releasing the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 and is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512 are left and right. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided so as to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 146 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is located at a position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. When attached to 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction (central discharge portion 2513a) and the lowest portion on both the left and right sides (side discharge portion 2513b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (center discharge portion 2513a) in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability.

At this time, since the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment is provided with the positioning pins 2505 on both the left and right sides with the stage 2513 (central discharge portion 2513a) in between, the center accessory 2500 is provided by the positioning pin 2505. The stage 2513 can be accurately positioned at a specific position in the game area 5a (a position directly above the first start port 2004 in the start port unit 2100). As a result, the acceptance probability that the game ball B released from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is accepted by the lower first starting port 2004 can be set within a desired range, and the temperature and temperature can be adjusted. Even if the environment such as humidity changes, the relative position between the stage 2513 and the first starting port 2004 can be maintained, and it is possible to prevent the acceptance probability from changing.

In the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the positioning pin 2505 is provided so as to be adjacent to a part of the mounting holes 2504, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all the mounting holes 2504 are not limited to this. On the other hand, the positioning pins 2505 may be provided adjacent to each other. That is, the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 may be used as a set of mounting portions, and only a plurality of mounting portions may be provided to mount the center accessory 2500 on the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). As a result, in addition to being able to achieve the same effects as described above, even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes, the entire center accessory 2500 is made to follow the expansion and contraction of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). Can be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the positioning pin 2505 (positioning pin 2107, positioning pin 2206), a cylindrical one is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the position determination pin 2505 (position determination pin 2107, position determination pin 2206) is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. It may have a shape such as a shape.

[5-8e-1. First Attacca Department]
The center accessory 2500 includes a first attacker portion 2520 having a variable winning opening 2003 and a first large winning opening 2006 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The first attacker portion 2520 of the center accessory 2500 responds to the variable winning opening door 2521 that closes the variable winning opening 2003 so as to be openable and closable, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2002. The variable winning opening solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 167, etc.) that is energized to open and close the variable winning opening door 2521, the variable winning opening sensor 2526 that detects the game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003, and the variable winning opening sensor 2526.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2520 accepts the first prize opening door 2523, which closes the first prize opening 2006 so as to be openable, and the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. With the first special winning opening solenoid 2524 (see Fig. 167 etc.) that is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol to open and close the first winning opening door 2523. , The first grand prize opening sensor 2525 for detecting the game ball B received in the first grand winning opening 2006 is provided.

Further, the first attacker portion 2520 includes a variable winning opening 2003, a first large winning opening 2006, and a transparent flat plate-shaped center left front plate 2527 provided in front of the left second guide passage 2532 (Fig.). 137 etc.).

The center accessory 2500 is provided with a first attacker portion 2520 above the warp inlet 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The first attacker unit 2520 has a variable winning opening 2003 and a first large winning opening 2006.

The variable winning opening 2003 is provided above the warp entrance 2511, is on the front side of the flange portion 2502 extending outward on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and near the substantially center in the vertical direction of the center accessory 2500. It opens to the left. Further, the first large winning opening 2006 opens upward just above the variable winning opening 2003 with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B.

The variable winning opening door 2521 is rotatably supported around an axis whose lower end extends forward and backward, and by keeping it upright (normal state), the game ball B can be accepted for the variable winning opening 2003. Can be closed to. When the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 is energized, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates so that the upper end moves to the left, and the game ball B can accept the variable winning opening 2003 (open state). ). When the variable winning door 2521 is in the open state, the upper end side is higher than the lower end side and is inclined so as to be lower to the right. You can guide to the variable winning door 2003.

The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward. Will be done.

The first prize-winning door 2523 has a flat plate shape that is inclined so as to be lowered to the left, and is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502. In the normal state, the first prize-winning door 2523 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502, making it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first prize-winning door 2006. In this state, the game ball B that has flowed down above the first prize-winning door 2523 is guided to the left by the inclination of the first prize-winning door 2523, and is distributed through the left second guide passage 2532. ..

When the first prize opening solenoid 2524 is energized, the front end of the first prize opening door 2523 retracts rearward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and the game ball B is pushed against the first prize opening 2006. It can be in an acceptable state. The game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2006 in this state flows down in front of the flange portion 2502 and is provided at a height portion between the first large winning opening 2006 and the variable winning opening 2003. After being detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2525, the player is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 directly above the variable winning opening 2003. After that, the game ball B is delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward.

[5-8e-2. Left guide passage group]
The center accessory 2500 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 on the left outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and includes a left guide passage group 2530 composed of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can circulate. There is. In other words, a left guide passage group 2530 composed of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can be distributed is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002. Therefore, when the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is formed so as to always pass through the left guide passage group 2530.

The left guide passage group 2530 is provided at a portion lower than the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and on the left side at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom with respect to the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. ing. The height of the left guide passage group 2530 is about three times the diameter of the game ball B in the vertical direction. The left guide passage group 2530 is formed so that the game ball B in circulation can be visually recognized in a good state.

The left guide passage group 2530 is composed of a left first guide passage 2531 in contact with the inner rail 1002 and a left second guide passage 2532 provided on the right side of the left first guide passage 2531. The left first guide passage 2531 and the left second guide passage 2532 are separated by a passage wall 2533 projecting forward from the flange portion 2502.

The first grand prize opening 2006 is provided on the downstream side of the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532. Therefore, when it is desired to accept the game ball B in the first large winning opening 2006, it is necessary to perform a driving operation so that the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532.

[5-8e-3. Right guide passage group]
Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the upper right corner and includes a right guide passage group 2540 composed of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the right guide passage group 2540 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the impact of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) near the stop 1006 and is driven to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the right guide passage group 2540.

The length of the right guide passage group 2540 in the vertical direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. The right guide passage group 2540 can visually recognize the game ball B in circulation in a good state.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided on the right outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided on the right side of the right first guide passage 2541 and the right first guide passage 2541 away from the peripheral wall portion 2501. It is composed of the right second guide passage 2542 and the right second guide passage. The entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 and the entrance of the right second guide passage 2542 are separated from each other to the left and right.

The right first guide passage 2541 extends rearward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a portion directly below the entrance and then extends downward, and then extends downward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a position to the left of the entrance directly below. After extending forward, the exit opens diagonally to the lower right. Further, the right second guide passage 2542 extends downward from the entrance, then bends to the right, and the exit opens diagonally to the lower right while being lined up on the right side of the exit of the right first guide passage 2541. doing. That is, the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are twisted so that the left and right intersect.

The right guide passage group 2540 is located above the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right end of the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 is located directly below the lower end of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B in contact with the abutting portion 1006 are on the right. It is formed so as to enter the guide passage 2541.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is released to the side near the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and enters the first guidance region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is released to the side closer to the right rail 1005, and enters the second guidance region 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. The details will be described later, but since the game ball B that has entered the second guidance region 2712 is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 provided downstream, it is placed in the right second guide passage 2542. When the game ball B is entered, it is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 as compared with the case where the game ball B is entered into the right first guide passage 2541.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided with a distribution detection sensor 2543 that can detect the game ball B circulating in the right first guide passage 2541 (see FIG. 144). As a result, for example, in a game situation in which the player is made to perform "right-handed", when the number of game balls B detected by the distribution detection sensor 2543 is less than or equal to a predetermined number per hour, the game situation can be further enjoyed. In order to do so, it is possible to encourage "right-handed" or to instruct the driving strength to avoid acceptance to the first sub-out port 2021 by entering the right second guide passage 2542. It becomes.

[5-8e-4. Space forming part]
The center accessory 2500 includes a space forming portion 2550 provided below the right guide passage group 2540 and a second attacker portion 2560 provided below the space forming portion 2550 (FIG. 147, etc.). See). The space forming portion 2550 is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right rail 1005, and is formed at a height of about half of the total height of the game area 5a. The second attacker portion 2560 has a second large winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and is provided in the lower right corner of the center accessory 2500.

In the space forming portion 2550, the flange portion 2502 extending to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends to a position close to the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5. The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is from the right wall portion 2551 protruding forward from the right side of the flange portion 2502 and the lower portion of the space forming portion 2550 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502. It has a guide wall portion 2552 extending to the lower right, and an opening 2553 extending back and forth through the flange portion 2502 at a portion between the right wall portion 2551 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552. ing.

The right wall portion 2551 extends along the right rail 1005 so as to form a slight gap with the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right wall portion 2551 is provided with notches 2551a penetrating to the left and right near the upper portion. The guide wall portion 2552 is provided between the lower end (right end) and the right wall portion 2551 so that a distance of about three times the diameter of the game ball B is formed in the left-right direction.

The opening 2553 extends vertically over substantially the total height of the space forming portion 2550. The opening 2553 has a constant distance from the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the side close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2551, and the side closer to the right wall portion 2551 moves away from the right wall portion 2551 as it goes downward. That is, in the space forming portion 2550, the side of the flange portion 2502 close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 extends vertically from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 to the right with a certain width, and the flange portion 2502. The side closer to the right wall portion 2551 extends vertically so as to widen to the left as it goes downward.

When the opening 2553 is assembled on the game board 5, a part of a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inserted from the rear. The plurality of obstacle nails N inserted through the opening 2553 are a specific obstacle nail group 2700 planted in a specific gauge arrangement, which will be described in detail later. That is, the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 forms a space in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged.

Further, the space forming portion 2550 has a plurality of ridge portions rear 2554 that bulge forward from the flange portion 2502 and extend to the left and right at intervals in the front-rear direction. The ridge rear 2554 is provided at a position corresponding to a plurality of ridge front 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, which will be described later, so as to be staggered in the front-rear direction. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be made to flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction by the ridge portion front 2555d and the ridge portion rear 2554.

Further, the space forming portion 2550 has a transparent flat plate-shaped center right front plate 2555 covering between the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the front end of the right wall portion 2551, and a translucent translucent portion attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. Center right front plate seal 2556 and has (see FIG. 153 and the like). The center right front plate 2555 extends upward to the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540, and closes the front side of the right guide passage group 2540.

The center right front plate 2555 penetrates back and forth with a plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a in which the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N (braided nail portions 2701) are accommodated, and one obstacle penetrating the front and rear. The second accommodating portion 2555b in which the head of the nail N is accommodated, the peeling hole 2555c penetrating the front and rear at the part where the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached, and the peeling hole 2555c that bulges rearward from the rear surface and extends to the left and right. It has a plurality of ridges in front of 2555d, which are provided at intervals in the front-rear direction. The center right front plate 2555 is attached so that the center accessory 2500 cannot be removed from the center accessory 2500 unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100.

The first accommodating portion 2555a is provided in an elongated hole shape forming a certain gap with respect to the peripheral line that surrounds and is in contact with the heads of the plurality of obstructing nails N (braided nail portions 2701) that are accommodating. Has been done. In the present embodiment, one first accommodating portion 2555a is formed in a size for accommodating the heads of two obstruction nails N, and the center of the first accommodating portion 2555a is different from the center of the obstruction nail N. (Eccentric). The second accommodating portion 2555b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. The first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are provided at locations corresponding to the respective obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later.

The gap between the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b with the front end (head) of the obstacle nail N is within the range of 1 mm to 3 mm, and further 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. It is desirable to keep it within the range of. If the gap is smaller than this range, the obstacle nail N may be affected when the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts due to changes in the environment, and the obstacle nail N may bend. This is because it becomes difficult to accommodate the front end of the obstacle nail N in the portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b, and it takes time and effort, which may increase the cost. Further, if the gap is larger than this range, the bending condition when the obstacle nail N is bent due to the impact due to the contact of the game ball B or the like exceeds the permissible range, and it is difficult to distribute the game ball B in the intended flow. This is because there is a risk of becoming.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b. It is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an external impact or the like, and it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow and to specify it. The game ball B can be distributed in a stable state in the obstacle nail group 2700, and the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be continuously exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, since the deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to reduce the time and effort required for maintenance of the obstacle nail N.

Further, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the front side of the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is closed by the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. It is not possible to touch the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is bent via the center right front plate seal 2556, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556. It is possible to make it easier to notice the defect of the obstacle nail N.

In the release hole 2555c, a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side in a state where the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, and the center right front plate seal 2556 is inserted from the rear by the rod-shaped member. By pressing forward, a part of the center right front plate seal 2556 can be rolled up from the center right front plate 2555. Then, the operator can easily remove (peel off) the center right front plate seal 2556 from the center right front plate 2555 by pulling the rolled portion of the center right front plate seal 2556. As a result, workability such as reattachment work of the center right front plate seal 2556 at the time of manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal can be improved.

This peeling hole 2555c is provided in front of a triangular portion surrounded by the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501, the guide wall portion 2552, and the closed wall portion 2566 when assembled on the game board 5, and thus is a peeling hole. It is possible to prevent a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or a portion where the game ball B is distributed through 2555c, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts. ..

Further, since the peeling hole 2555c is hidden from the front by attaching the center right front plate seal 2556 to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2555c can be suppressed, and the player can use it. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2555c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2555c.

The plurality of ridge portion front 2555d is provided at a position corresponding to the plurality of ridge portion rear 2554 protruding from the flange portion 2502. These ridge portion front 2555d are provided so as to be staggered in the vertical direction with respect to the ridge portion rear 2554. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be made to flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction by the ridge portion front 2555d and the ridge portion rear 2554.

[5-8e-5. Second Attacca Department]
The second attacker portion 2560 of the center accessory 2500 has a second large winning opening 2007 that is long in the left-right direction and opens upward, and a first sub-out opening 2021 provided on the right side of the second large winning opening 2007. And have. The right end of the second prize opening 2007 is located at a portion slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball B from the right end (lower end) of the guide wall portion 2552 to the right, and the left end is the total width in the game area 5a. It is located about 1/3 from the right side of. The second prize opening 2007 is provided at a position higher than the upper end of the stage cover 2515. The right wall of the first sub-out port 2021 is continuous with the right wall portion 2551 of the space forming portion 2550.

In addition, the second attacker unit 2560 can open and close the second major winning opening sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 and the second major winning opening 2007 by advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction. It was drawn by accepting the flat plate-shaped second big prize opening door 2562, which is closed to the left and is inclined to the left, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. It has a second special winning opening solenoid 2563 that is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol to open and close the second special winning opening door 2562.

Further, the second attacker portion 2560 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 and above the second large winning opening door 2562, and the attacker passage 2564 through which the game ball B can flow to the left and the second large winning opening 2007. The right discharge passage 2565, which extends downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2564 to the left, and can discharge the game ball B downward, and the ceiling wall of the attacker passage 2564, which protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502. It has a closed wall portion 2566 which constitutes a part and extends to the left from the lower end of the guide wall portion 2552 to the peripheral wall portion 2501.

The attacker passage 2564 extends so as to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B and lower to the left, and the ceiling wall is composed of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the closed wall portion 2566. At the same time, the wall of the floor is composed of the second prize-winning door 2562. In this attacker passage 2564, the portion of the attacker passage 2564 in the flange portion 2502 is bulged forward and extends in the vertical direction, and is provided with a plurality of ridge portions rear 2564a provided at intervals in the left-right direction. , The part of the attacker passage 2564 in the lower right front plate 2572 of the center, which will be described later, bulges rearward and extends in the vertical direction, and is spaced in the left-right direction so as to be staggered with the rear 2564a of the plurality of ridges. In front of a plurality of ridges (not shown) are provided. With the plurality of ridges in front and after the ridges 2564a, the game ball B can be circulated to the left while meandering in the front-rear direction in the attacker passage 2564, and the distribution speed can be suppressed.

The right discharge passage 2565 extends vertically downward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. The right discharge passage 2565 is provided with an outlet at a height between the stage 2513 and the upper end of the stage cover 2515. In the right discharge passage 2565, the right wall is composed of the attacker left wall portion 2568, and the left wall is composed of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, the second attacker portion 2560 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502 on the right side of the second prize opening door 2562, is higher than the right end of the second prize opening door 2562, and is slightly higher than the right end of the closed wall portion 2566. A position lower than the left end of the attacker right wall part 2567 extending downward from the lower position and the flange part 2502 on the left side of the second prize opening door 2562 and protruding forward from the flange part 2502. Left and right between the attacker left wall 2568 extending downward from the attacker, the right shelf 2569 extending left from the lower end of the attacker right wall 2567, and the right shelf 2569. It is provided in the center between the left shelf 2570 extending from the vicinity of the upper end of the attacker left wall 2568 to the right so as to form a gap, and the left shelf 2570 and the right shelf 2569. It has a middle wall portion 2571 and the like.

The second major winning opening 2007 is defined by the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the left-right direction. That is, the width in the left-right direction between the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 is the width in the left-right direction of the second large winning opening 2007. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the width of the second large winning opening 2007 in the left-right direction is 131 mm.

The attacker left wall portion 2568 extends downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567, and the lower end is bent short to the right. When the attacker left wall portion 2568 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end, and the game ball B cannot move to and from the left and right sides. There is. The lower ends of the right shelf 2569 and the left shelf 2570 are located above the lower ends of the attacker left wall 2568. The second large winning opening sensor 2561 is provided between the lower end of the right shelf 2569 and the middle wall 2571, and between the lower end of the left shelf 2570 and the middle wall 2571, respectively. The middle wall portion 2571 is located directly above the lower right middle decoration portion 2433 of the lower right unit 2400 when assembled on the game board 5.

The second attacker portion 2560 is in front of the attacker passage 2564, the right discharge passage 2565, and the space formed by the attacker right wall portion 2567, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570. It further has a closed transparent flat plate-shaped lower right front plate 2572 (see FIG. 137 and the like).

In the second attacker portion 2560, under normal conditions, the front end of the second major winning opening door 2562 protrudes forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and the game ball B cannot be accepted for the second major winning opening 2007. It is closed to. The second prize opening door 2562, which closes the second prize opening 2007 so that it can be opened and closed, is formed in a flat plate shape extending left and right and front and back, which makes it difficult to see when viewed from the front. , It is difficult to understand the open / closed state.

In this normal state, the game ball B, which has been driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has flowed down the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700), has the guide wall portion 2552 and the right wall. It will flow down from between the part 2551 and the second attacker part 2560 side. At this time, the game ball B that has flowed down along the right wall portion 2551 is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged downward.

The game ball B, which was not accepted by the first sub-out opening 2021 and flowed down onto the second prize opening door 2562, meanders in the attacker passage 2564 in the front-rear direction by a plurality of ridges in front and after the ridges 2564a. After rolling to the left, the player enters the right discharge passage 2565 from the left end of the second prize opening door 2562, and is returned to the game area 5a from the lower end (exit) of the right discharge passage 2565.

The second attacker portion 2560 of the center accessory 2500 is located directly above the lower right unit 2400 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and constitutes the right wall of the right discharge passage 2565. The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the portion 2568. As a result, the movement of the game ball B is blocked between the right discharge passage 2565 side and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415. That is, a region (pseudo-game area 2010) that cannot be entered from the right release passage 2565 or the game area 5a is formed on the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415.

In other words, the pseudo-game area partitioned by the front surface of the game panel 1100, the partition portion 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570 in the second attacker portion 2560. 2010 is formed. In this pseudo-game area 2010, only the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 can be distributed.

Then, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, the second large winning opening solenoid 2563 is used. When the power is turned on, the second major winning opening door 2562 retracts, and the second major winning opening 2007 becomes ready to accept the game ball B. At this time, the game ball B circulating in the attacker passage 2564 and the game ball B flowing down from the space forming unit 2550 to the second large winning opening 2007 are accepted by the second large winning opening 2007.

The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2561 after rolling on the right shelf 2569 or the left shelf 2570 and released into the lower pseudo game area 2010. Will be done. In this second attacker unit 2560, since the two second major winning opening sensors 2561 are arranged on the left and right, even if many game balls B are received in the second major winning opening 2007 in a short time, they are delayed. Can be detected.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the first accommodating portion 2555a accommodating the heads of a plurality of obstruction nails N of each set nail portion 2701 constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700 in the center right front plate 2555 a. The movement of the head of the obstacle nail N can be restricted, and the obstacle nail N is deformed by an impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or an external impact due to something. It is possible to suppress (bending). As a result, it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow, the game ball B can be circulated in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700. Can be continuously exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the center accessory 2500, the second large winning opening door 2562, which closes the second large winning opening 2007 so as to be openable and closable, has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and the second large winning opening. Since the second prize opening 2007 is opened and closed by moving the winning door 2562 forward and backward, the second big winning door 2562 can be made difficult to see when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the grand prize opening 2007. As a result, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 (pseudo-large winning opening door 2405) provided below the second large winning opening 2007 can be made relatively conspicuous, so that the player's interest can be raised to the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. Can be strongly attracted to, and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 can be strongly illusioned as if it were a real large winning opening. Therefore, if a pachinko machine is equipped with a large winning opening that has never been seen before, it can give the player an illusion, give a strong impact to the player, and give the player a game. It is possible to facilitate the positive selection of the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to be used, and it is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player.

Further, according to the center accessory 2500, since the support portion 2503 projecting inward is provided in the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the support portion 2503 can increase the strength of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection molding mold without being deformed.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is projected shortly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided with respect to the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the back surface where the support portion 2503 is provided at the rear. It is possible to reduce the hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600.

Further, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) has a portion in which the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. At a close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be widened as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same surface as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further increased as compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, if you want to make the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look larger, the support portion 2503 should be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support unit 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear in the front view.

[5-8f. Gate member]
Subsequently, the gate member 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The gate member 2600 of the table unit 2000 is arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. More specifically, the gate member 2600 is provided at a position slightly below the central skein in the vertical direction of the game area 5a and below the variable winning opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500. Immediately above the gate member 2600, the exit of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged. Further, at the lower right of the gate member 2600, the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 opens to the left.

The gate member 2600 includes a gate 2002 in which a lottery of ordinary symbols for opening and closing the variable winning opening 2003 is performed by passing the game ball B, and a gate sensor 2601 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2002. Have. In the present embodiment, the detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2601 is the gate 2002.

[5-8 g. Specific obstacle nail group]
Next, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 among the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 147. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided on the right side in the game area 5a and on the upstream side of the second prize opening 2007. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment is provided in the space formed by the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a plurality of braided nail portions 2701 in which a plurality of obstruction nails N arranged adjacent to each other are paired, and the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 are one game ball with each other. They are arranged at intervals that allow them to pass through B. In the present embodiment, the braided nail portion 2701 is composed of two obstacle nails N.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided so that the portions (gap portions) between the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals are arranged in a predetermined pattern, and the plurality of braided nails are arranged. The game ball B can be guided by the part 2701. As a result, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 forms a guidance region 2710 capable of guiding the game ball B from a specific position to a desired position with a predetermined probability.

The guidance region 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to a desired position with a predetermined probability. The induction region 2710 is composed of a first induction region 2711 and a second induction region 2712 provided on the right side of the first induction region 2711. The first guide region 2711 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right first guide passage 2541 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position of the portion on the left side from the center of the guide wall portion 2552. The second guide region 2712 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position of the portion on the right side from the center of the guide wall portion 2552.

The first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are provided in an arc shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes to the right. More specifically, in the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, in the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the outside of the arc, a straight line connecting the braided nail portions 2701 near the upper end portion and the lower end portion. On the other hand, the arcs formed by the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the inside of the arc are provided so as to be in contact with each other. That is, the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 are formed so that the width in the left-right direction is the distance of two game balls B. Since the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 extend in an arc shape, the portion extending vertically is reduced, and the game ball B is easily meandered in the left-right direction.

Further, the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the first lead region 2711 and the second lead region 2712 are the braided nail portions located below between the two braided nail portions 2701 separated to the left and right. The 2701 is provided on the right side (far side from the center of the arc) from the center between the two upper nail portions 2701. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to move outward from each of the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712.

Further, the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 have gaps separated above and below the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 arranged in an arc shape. It is provided so that it is located upward toward the right row. In other words, in the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the left and right side walls of the first lead region 2711 and the second lead region 2712, the two braided nail portions 2701 paired in the left-right direction are on the right side. The braided nail portion 2701 is arranged so as to be higher. This makes it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

The guidance region 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B downward by a plurality of braided nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals, as if meandering in the left-right direction. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and slowed down as compared with the area where the obstacle nail N is planted in a general arrangement, and the flow time of the game ball B to a predetermined position ( Arrival time) can be delayed. Further, in the set nail portion 2701, by combining two obstacle nails N into one set, the number of collisions between the obstacle nail N and the game ball B can be increased as compared with the case where the set nail portion N is composed of one obstacle nail N. The effect of delaying the fall of the ball B is enhanced.

In the guidance region 2710, since the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the guided game ball B moves to the left outer side or the right outer side through the interval portion. It may end up. That is, the game ball B moves from the first lead region 2711 to the second lead region 2712, moves from the second guide region 2712 to the first lead region 2711, or moves from the first guide region 2711 to the left outer side. Or, it may move from the second induction region 2712 to the right outer side.

The game ball B guided to the lower end by the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552, and is between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (second prize). It will flow down to the top of the door 2562 or inside the second prize opening 2007).

The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide region 2711 is located between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and is located behind the plurality of ridge portions 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502. In addition, the plurality of ridges in front of the 2555 on the right front plate of the center 2555d meander in the front-rear direction and flow down. Then, it comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552 and flows down between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (on the second prize opening door 2562 or in the second prize opening 2007). ..

The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide region 2712 has a plurality of ridges rear 2554 and a center right front plate provided on the flange portion 2502 between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right wall portion 2551. The plurality of ridges provided in the 2555, 2555d in front of the ridges, meander in the front-rear direction and flow down. Then, it flows down to the first sub-out opening 2021 or between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (on the second major winning opening door 2562 or in the second major winning opening 2007).

As a result, when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540, the game ball B circulates in the second guide region 2712, and when the game ball B moves from the second guide region 2712 to the right outer side, the first There is a possibility that it will be accepted by one sub-out port 2021. That is, in the present embodiment, in the right guide passage group 2540, the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the first sub-out port 2021 is higher in the right second guide passage 2542 than in the right first guide passage 2541. .. Therefore, the player can be made to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B enters the right first guide passage 2541. In other words, when "right-handed", by hitting hard, the game ball B can easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the abutment portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with delicate adjustment. There is no such thing, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

By the way, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, if the braided nail portion is composed of only one obstacle nail N, a pair is formed with respect to the obstacle nail N in order to form a gap through which the game ball B can pass. The other obstacle nail N becomes an obstacle nail N in all directions forming a gap around the obstacle nail N. That is, one obstacle nail N is in charge of forming gaps in all directions. As a result, when the obstacle nail N bends, the gap widens in one direction and narrows in the opposite direction. Therefore, the deformation of one obstacle nail N greatly changes the induction probability of the game ball B by the induction region 2710. Therefore, it becomes difficult to distribute the game ball B in a stable state. Further, when the obstacle nail N is bent, it is necessary to adjust the obstacle nail N provided in all directions so as to have a gap of a desired distance, which requires a great deal of time and effort for maintenance. It becomes.

On the other hand, when the braided nail portion 2701 is configured by a plurality of obstruction nails N as in the present embodiment, the direction of the obstruction nail N adjacent to a certain obstruction nail N in the braided nail portion 2701 is set. Since the adjacent obstacle nail N is in charge of forming the gap, the direction in which a certain (one) obstacle nail N is in charge of forming the gap can be only a part of the directions, and the gap can be formed. It is possible to reduce the number of obstacle nails N that are paired with the formation of. As a result, even if one of the obstacle nails N of the braided nail portion 2701 is bent, the portion of the gap affected is small, so that the change in the induction probability of the game ball B due to the induction region 2710 can be suppressed. Further, when a certain obstacle nail N is bent, it is sufficient to adjust the gap with the obstacle nail N in a certain direction to be a desired distance, which is more suitable for maintenance as compared with the case of adjusting the gap in all directions. This time and effort can be reduced.

When the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the head of the obstacle nail N is inserted into the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 and is accommodated. The braided nail portion 2701 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a so as to surround the heads thereof.

As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, thereby limiting the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or an external impact due to something, and the game ball. It is possible to reduce B from flowing down in an unintended flow, and it is possible to distribute the game ball B in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be sustained. It can be exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, as described above, the head of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, whereby the obstruction nail N is deformed. Since it can be suppressed, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the maintenance of the obstacle nail N on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b accommodating the head of the obstacle nail N are attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, and the center right front plate seal 2556. Because it is closed by, the obstacle nail N cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the obstacle nail N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is bent from the front, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, so that the defect of the obstacle nail N can be easily noticed.

Further, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a function of distributing the inflowing game ball B to either the first sub-out opening 2021 or the second major winning opening 2007. This function is an important function that affects the ball output rate. All nail adjustments are prohibited in the game hall. Therefore, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, as described above, the center right front plate 2555 and the center right front plate 2555 and the center are prevented from being removed unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100. Since the right front plate seal 2556 covers the front side of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, it is not possible to adjust the nails at all.

In the above embodiment, a plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are shown to be composed of two obstacle nails N, but the present invention is not limited to three. It may be composed of the above obstacle nails N. When the braided nail portion 2701 is composed of three or more obstacle nails N, a plurality of obstacle nails N may be arranged in a row, or arranged in a polygon such as a triangle, a quadrangle, a pentagon, or a hexagon. Is also good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the guide region 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is shown to be composed of two regions, the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, but the present invention is not limited to this. , One, or may be composed of three or more areas.

According to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed. Therefore, for example, in the second attacker portion 2560 provided downstream, the first special symbol is used. If the second big winning opening 2007 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be accepted according to the lottery result and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, "small hit"), the game is played. Even if a person tries to drive the game ball B so that the game ball B arrives at the timing when it becomes acceptable to the second prize opening 2007, the game ball B is hit by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 at a desired timing. It can be made difficult to reach, and the timing of hitting the game ball B can be difficult. As a result, it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that the player can be entertained by arousing the rewardingness of the game, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. Further, in the above case, since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second major winning opening 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the specific obstacle nail group 2700, since the distribution speed of the game ball B is suppressed by planting a plurality of obstacle nails N, the configuration is compared with the case of being composed of a synthetic resin member. It is possible to reduce the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 and suppress an increase in the cost required for the pachinko machine 1.

[5-8h. Pseudo game area]
Next, the pseudo game area 2010 formed in front of the game panel 1100 by the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The pseudo-game area 2010 is independent of the game area 5a, and is an area in which only a specific game ball B can be distributed. Specifically, the area in which only the game ball B (so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) received in the second prize opening 2007 can be distributed is the pseudo game area 2010. The pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same surface as the game area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 includes a portion where the front surface of the flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in front is exposed, and a plurality of obstacles planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100. Pseudo-large prize that can be opened and closed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the nail N and the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. It has a port 2402 and a pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B that was not accepted by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100. That is, the pseudo-game area 2010 has a plurality of obstacle nails N, a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 as a reception port capable of receiving the game ball B, and a pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B. The configuration is similar to that in the game area 5a.

The pseudo-game area 2010 is formed by a game panel 1100, a partition portion 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and a second attacker portion 2560 of the center accessory 2500. The upper end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by a right shelf portion 2569, a left shelf portion 2570, and a middle wall portion 2571 of the second attacker portion 2560. The right end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the first standing wall portion 2412 of the dividing portion 2410. The left end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the attacker left wall portion 2568 of the second attacker portion 2560, the second standing wall portion 2415 of the dividing portion 2410, the left side wall portion 2417, the inclined wall portion 2418, and the third standing wall portion 2419. ing. The lower end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the bottom wall portion 2411 of the partition portion 2410.

In the pseudo-game area 2010, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward between the second attacker portion 2560 and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the portion.

The second big winning opening 2007 as a supply source of the game ball B to the pseudo game area 2010 is opened and closed by the second big winning opening door 2562. Since the second prize-winning door 2562 is formed in a flat plate shape that advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, it is difficult for the player to see the second prize-winning door 2562. The pseudo-game area 2010 is provided on the same surface as the game area 5a, and the portion (partition portion 2410, attacker left wall portion 2568 of the center accessory 2500, etc.) partitioned from the game area 5a becomes transparent. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100 as well as being formed, whether the pseudo game area 2010 is a part of the game area 5a for the player. It can be illusioned as.

The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 provided in the pseudo-game area 2010 is formed longer in the left-right direction than the second large winning opening 2007 provided above. In the present embodiment, the left and right sizes of the second large winning opening 2007 are 131 mm, and the left and right sizes of the pseudo large winning opening 2402 are 170 mm. Since the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 opens toward the front, the pseudo-grand prize opening door 2405 that can open and close the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 is in a state in which the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 is closed (usually). In the state of), the surface is turned forward, and the pseudo-large winning door 2405 is conspicuous from the player.

For this reason, when the player sees this pachinko machine 1, the pseudo-large prize opening 2402 is more prominent than the second big prize opening 2007, so he has seen it with conventional pachinko machines. It can be made to think that it has a big winning opening that does not exist, and it can strongly attract the interest of the player.

In the pseudo-game area 2010 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the pseudo-large prize opening door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 makes the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 unable to accept the game ball B. It is closed. Further, in the normal state, since the second prize opening 2007 is closed by the second prize door 2562, the game is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flows down to the second prize door 2562. The ball B rolls to the left on the second prize opening door 2562 and is discharged into the game area 5a through the right discharge passage 2565. Therefore, in the normal state, the game ball B does not circulate in the pseudo game area 2010.

From the normal state, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol, the lottery result of the second special symbol, etc., which was drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, the second When the large winning opening door 2562 retracts, the game ball B can be accepted into the second large winning opening 2007. In this state, when the game ball B is received by the second big winning opening 2007, the game ball B is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2561 and then supplied to the pseudo game area 2010.

Then, the game ball B supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a portion of the game panel 1100 exposed to the front. At this time, if the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo grand winning door 2405, the game ball B supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 passes in front of the pseudo grand winning door 2405 and bottoms out. After flowing down onto the wall 2411 and rolling to the left along the inclination of the bottom wall 2411, the third standing wall 2419 prevented further rolling to the left and headed forward at the site. The pseudo-out port 2404 that is open is discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100. That is, it is discharged from the pseudo game area 2010.

Since the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo game area 2010 is provided close to the right side of the out port 1008, the game ball B received in the pseudo out port 2404 is provided to the player by the out port 1008. It is possible to make the illusion that it is accepted by. As a result, it is possible to make the illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is a part of the game area 5a.

Therefore, it is possible to make the illusion that the game in which the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 in the pseudo-game area 2010 is the same as the game in which the game ball B passes through the large winning opening in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to disappoint the player by not accepting the game ball B in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. On the other hand, since the game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2007 is distributed in the pseudo game area 2010, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, the second big winning opening 2007 is entered. Upon acceptance, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. As a result, even though the game ball B is not accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, the game ball B is paid out, so that the player can feel as if he / she has gained, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, when the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 is opened and closed, the large pseudo-grand prize opening door 2405 that stands out from the front opens and closes, so that the player instantly notices that the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 can be accepted. Can be made. As a result, it is possible to perform a driving operation (so-called "right-handed") of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is accepted by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. Further, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 may be opened / closed as a kind of advance notice, or the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 may be opened / closed as one of the signals for instructing the player to "hit right". Since the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 can be entered only when "right-handed", the player can easily understand it intuitively.

For this reason, for example, before the second big winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed with a fluttering operation so that the player can perform "right-handed". .. This makes it easier for the "right-handed" game ball B to reach the second prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second prize opening 2007 becomes acceptable, so that the player can be more entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Then, during the "big hit" game in which the second big winning opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, if the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is also opened and closed, many game balls B are opened and closed in a short time through the second big winning opening 2007. It can be supplied into the pseudo-game area 2010, and many game balls B are distributed in the pseudo-game area 2010, so that the player can enjoy the movement and the game of the game ball B in the pseudo-game area 2010. You can do it. At this time, if the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 opens and closes, the game ball B is accepted by the large pseudo-large winning opening 2402, so that the player can be greatly entertained and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed. Can be made to.

In the present embodiment, the left-right direction of the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 is formed larger than that of the second grand prize opening 2007, but above the pseudo-grand winning opening 2402, the right side wall portion 2414, the left side wall portion 2417 and the left side wall portion 2417 A sloping wall portion 2418 is provided, and the game ball B passing between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 (between the right sloping wall portion 2413 and the left sloping wall portion 2416) is a pseudo-large winning opening. Accepted at 2402. The distance between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 is about half of the distance in the left-right direction of the second prize opening 2007. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B received in the second prize opening 2007 are aggregated in a narrow range and head toward the pseudo-large prize opening 2402, so that the game balls B received in the second prize opening 2007 It is possible to make the player illusion that a larger number of game balls B are accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and it is possible to greatly entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 of the present embodiment does not pay out the game ball B or give a privilege to the player by accepting the game ball B. Therefore, the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 has an opening / closing pattern (for example, 337 beats, minuet, waltz, bossanova, swing, 8 beats, 16 beats, BGM, etc.) that cannot be seen in the grand prize openings of conventional pachinko machines. It can be opened and closed according to the tempo of the music, etc., and can entertain the player.

In addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W may be provided in the pseudo game area 2010. By making the wind turbine W exist in the pseudo game area 2010, it becomes more realistic, and it becomes difficult to distinguish between the pseudo game area 2010 and the game area 5a.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. Further, a windmill W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

First, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the left guide passage group 2530, the gate 2002, and the side upper left unit 2300 are arranged at intervals from above, and between them and above the left guide passage group 2530. , Multiple obstacle nails N are planted. The plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the left guide passage group 2530 are arranged so that the game balls B are collected above the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532. As a result, when the game ball B is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can be distributed to the left second guide passage 2532 with a higher probability than the left first guide passage 2531. The game ball B that has circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 will circulate downward in a state of approaching the center accessory 2500, and will flow down to the left of the variable winning opening 2003 with a high probability.

Near the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, the first prize entrance 2006, which is normally closed by the first prize entrance door 2523, is provided, and the left second guide passage 2532 The game ball B that has entered the game rolls on the first prize opening door 2523 and flows down. Then, the first grand prize opening door 2523 is set according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. If the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532 while retreating, it will be accepted by the first big winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 even after being detected by the first big winning opening sensor 2525 provided below, and the back ball guidance of the back unit 3000. It is discharged downward through the unit 3100. When the game ball B is detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2525, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 are arranged so as to be collected directly above the gate 2002 at a portion below the variable winning opening 2003. As a result, when the game ball B is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500, the gate 2002 can be passed with a certain probability. The gate 2002 is arranged so that the game ball B circulates downward on both the left outer side and the right outer side of the gate 2002.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a lottery of ordinary symbols is executed. Then, when the lottery result of the drawn ordinary symbol is "ordinary hit", the variable winning opening 2003 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined time. When the variable winning opening 2003 is in a state where it can be accepted, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates to the left, so that the game ball B circulating in the left second guide passage 2532 has a high probability of making a variable winning. Accepted in the mouth 2003. The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and lowered. Is discharged to. When the game ball B is detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

A warp entrance 2511 and a wind turbine W are provided between the gate 2002 and the side upper left unit 2300 from above. The warp entrance 2511 opens to the left at the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. The wind turbine W is arranged between the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002 near the center accessory 2500.

In the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2002 and the wind turbine W, the game ball B circulating on the right outside of the gate 2002 and the gate 2002 flows down mainly on the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. It is arranged to do. Therefore, the game ball B circulating through the gate 2002 and the right outer side of the gate 2002 can enter the warp entrance 2511 with a certain probability. On the other hand, the game ball B circulating on the left outer side of the gate 2002 does not enter the warp entrance 2511.

The game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is provided near the lower end of the center portion in the left-right direction of the center accessory 2500 from the warp outlet 2512 that is opened in the frame of the center accessory 2500 through the warp passage. It is supplied to the stage 2513. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls in the left-right direction on the stage 2513, and is discharged from either the central discharge portion 2513a or the side discharge portion 2513b so as to return into the game region 5a.

Since the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the first start port 2004, the game ball B released from the central release portion 2513a has a high probability of being first. Accepted at the start port 2004. The game ball B released from the left and right side discharge portions 2513b of the central discharge portion 2513a is received by the first starting port 2004 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the first starting port sensor 3002. Is discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3002, a lottery for the first special symbol is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2004 is received in the out port 1008 and discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the out guide unit 1003, and then discharged downward.

The game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W has a high probability of being on the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N that are arranged diagonally in two upper and lower stages along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It flows down onto a plurality of obstacle nails N. The game ball B that has passed through the right side of the wind turbine W and has not flowed down onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the upper stage side flows down onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. On the other hand, the game ball B circulating on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W flows down onto the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300, rolls the shelf portion 2301 to the right, and then is placed on a plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. Flow down to.

The game ball B, which circulates on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W and flows down to the upper side of a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, is located in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction below the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the first starting port 2004) side and accepted by the first starting port 2004. Further, on the upper stage side where a plurality of obstacle nails N are diagonally arranged, a gap through which one game ball B can pass is provided, so that the gap may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the gap. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. The game ball B that has not been accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting port 2004 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, in the lower left portion of the center accessory 2500, the game balls B that have flowed down to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N that are diagonally arranged are left and right in the game area 5a due to the plurality of obstacle nails N. It is guided to the center side, is received by the out port 1008 without being received by the first starting port 2004, and is discharged from the game area 5a. Since a plurality of gaps through which one game ball B can pass are provided on the lower side, there is a possibility that the game balls B will be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 through the gaps.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001. Above, it is discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a right guide passage group 2540, a space forming portion 2550, a specific obstacle nail group 2700, a second attacker portion 2560, and a lower right unit 2400 are arranged in order from the top. The space forming portion 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560 is provided with a specific obstacle nail group 2700 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed with the strength that the game ball B enters above the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction toward the right. When driven, the game ball B circulates in either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540.

The game ball B, which is hit relatively strongly toward the right side of the center accessory 2500, abuts on the abutment portion 1006 and enters the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540. On the other hand, the game ball B, which is hit relatively weakly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, rolls to the right on the upper surface of the upper end portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the right guide passage group 2540. Enter the second guide passage on the right 2542.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2543, and then moves downward from the side close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. It is released. Then, the game ball B passing through the right first guide passage 2541 enters the first guide region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming portion 2550, and enters the first guide region 2711 in the left-right direction in the first guide region 2711. It flows down while meandering. The game ball B that has flowed through the first guidance region 2711 comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552 and flows diagonally to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552.

Since the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the left and right side walls of the first guidance region 2711 form a gap through which one game ball B can pass, the gap is formed between the two in the vertical direction. The game ball B may move to the left outer side or the right outer side (second lead region 2712) of the first guide region 2711 through the game ball B. The game ball B that has moved from the first guide region 2711 to the left outer side flows down to the guide wall portion 2552 through between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501. At this time, the flange portion 2502 has a plurality of ridges rear 2554 and the center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of ridge fronts 2555d, so that the flange portion 2502 flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has flowed down to the guide wall portion 2552 flows diagonally to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552. The game ball B that has moved from the first induction region 2711 to the right outer side will circulate in the second induction region 2712.

On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is discharged downward from the side close to the right rail 1005 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. Then, the game ball B passing through the right second guide passage 2542 enters the second guide region 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming portion 2550, and enters the second guide region 2712 in the second guide region 2712 in the left-right direction. It flows down while meandering. The game ball B that has flowed through the second guidance region 2712 comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552 and flows diagonally to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552.

Since the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the left and right side walls of the second guidance region 2712 form a gap through which one game ball B can pass, the gap is formed between the two nail portions 2701 in the vertical direction. The game ball B may move to the left outer side (first lead region 2711) or the right outer side of the second lead region 2712 through the game ball B. The game ball B that has moved from the second induction region 2712 to the left outer side circulates in the first induction region 2711. The game ball B that has moved from the second guide region 2712 to the right outside passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right rail 1005 or the right wall portion 2551, and is between the guide wall portion 2552 and the right wall portion 2551. It flows down to the part. At this time, the flange portion 2502 has a plurality of ridges rear 2554 and the center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of ridge fronts 2555d, so that the flange portion 2502 flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guidance region 2712 is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability and is discharged to the outside of the game region 5a. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then is discharged downward through the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000.

The game ball B guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has the same height as the distribution speed of the game ball B is suppressed as compared with the part where the obstacle nail N is planted in a general gauge arrangement. It will be delayed and flow down.

The game ball B, which circulated through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and was not accepted by the first sub-out port 2021, is a second attacker portion from between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567. Enter the attacker passage 2564 provided above the second prize opening 2007 of 2560. Under normal conditions, the second prize opening door 2562 moves forward and closes the second prize opening 2007 unacceptably. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 moves forward and closes the second prize opening door 2562. After rolling to the left on the upper surface of the door, it is discharged downward through the right discharge passage 2565. In the attacker passage 2564, the game ball B meanders in the front-rear direction and rolls to the left due to the rear 2564a of the ridge portion of the flange portion 2502 and the front of the ridge portion of the lower right front plate 2572 of the center.

The game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 of the second attacker portion 2560 flows down while abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower right unit 2400 (left side wall portion 2417). To do. Then, with a certain probability, it is accepted by the second starting port 2005, which is always open upward below the right discharge passage 2565. Further, although it is lower than the acceptance probability to the second starting port 2005, it is accepted to the second sub-out port 2022 opened on the right side of the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, a lottery for the second special symbol is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

The game ball B released from the right discharge passage 2565 and not accepted by either the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 rolls diagonally to the lower left on the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400. After moving, it is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B circulating in the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker unit 2560 has a lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, and the first (Ii) If the second prize opening door 2562 retracts according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it will be accepted into the second prize opening 2007 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by any of the two second big winning opening sensors 2561 provided below. When the game ball B is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B supplied into the pseudo-game area 2010 from the second grand prize opening 2007 flows down while abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo-game area 2010. Then, when the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo grand winning door 2405, it flows down onto the bottom wall portion 2411 through the front of the pseudo grand winning door 2405 and follows the inclination of the bottom wall portion 2411. After rolling to the left, it is accepted by the pseudo-out port 2404. The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

When the game ball B is distributed in the pseudo game area 2010, the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. If the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 is rotated forward by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the lottery result, there is a high probability that the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 will come into contact with the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 and be accepted by the rear pseudo-large winning opening 2402. Be done. The game ball B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. By detecting the game ball B by the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect.

The production using the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 depends on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, according to "big hit", "small hit", etc.). When the second grand prize opening 2007 is open, the peripheral control board 1510 opens the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 for production. At that time, since the peripheral control board 1510 can know the opening timing of the second big winning opening 2007, the degree to which the pseudo big winning opening 2402 picks up the game ball B can be adjusted by the peripheral control board 1510. Utilizing this property, it can be suggested that when a lot of pseudo-large winning openings 2402 pick up the game ball B, it is put into a high probability state (so-called probabilistic state) after "big hit". On the contrary, when there are many omissions in the pseudo-big winning opening 2402, it can be suggested that a low probability state (so-called normal non-probability changing state) is reached after the "big hit". Furthermore, it is possible to suggest a probability setting (generally, 6 steps of settings 1 to 6) based on such a state of omission.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the normal state, there is only a possibility that the game ball B is accepted at the second starting port 2005 to which the privilege is given, and the gate 2002 is opened. Since there is no possibility of passing through or being accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2004, it is possible to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B is distributed to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

More specifically, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2005. In the lottery result, the special variation time for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol to the player is set longer in the lottery result of the second special symbol than in the lottery result of the first special symbol. Therefore, since the lottery result of the second special symbol takes longer to consume the reserved number, even if the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 is the same. , The number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Further, even if the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005, the number of game balls B to be paid out is one. For this reason, under normal conditions, even if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, only the second starting port 2005 may be accepted, and even if it is accepted at the second starting port 2005, it is a privilege. Since the number of game balls B paid out is one, it is possible to make it easier for the player to drive the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is accepted in the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007, a privilege that many game balls B are paid out is given. In order to enable the acceptance of the game ball B into the first major winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007, the first starting port 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 are made to accept the game ball B, and they are used. It is necessary to draw a lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol that can be accepted.

For this reason as well, under normal conditions, the game is such that the game ball B flows down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting port 2004. The driving operation of the ball B can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the first starting port 2004 It is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the game.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2004, a "hit" (for example, "small hit", "medium hit", "big hit", etc.) is drawn as a lottery result of the first special symbol. Then, since the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007 opens and closes, the game ball B is driven so that the game ball B is accepted into the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007. The operation can be enjoyed, and the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007 can be increased.

Specifically, when the first major winning opening 2006 becomes acceptable, the driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed to the left side of the center accessory 2500. On the other hand, when the second big winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the driving operation (“right-handed”) can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed to the right side of the center accessory 2500.

When driving the game ball B to the right side of the center accessory 2500, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a right guide passage group 2540 composed of a right first guide passage 2541 and a right second guide passage 2542, and a specific obstacle. A guide region 2710 including a first guide region 2711 and a second guide region 2712 by the nail group 2700 is provided, and the guide passage to be distributed makes it easier to receive the guide in the second sub-out port 2022. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates in the passage (here, the right first guide passage 2541), and the player can perform the driving operation of the game ball B. Can be entertained.

In addition, since the second major winning opening 2007 has a larger opening in the left-right direction than the first major winning opening 2006, the second major winning opening 2007 can be used in a shorter time at first glance to the player. It is possible to recognize that it is possible to accept many game balls B. As a result, when the second major winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the player can immediately change the driving operation so that the game ball B is distributed to the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B into the grand prize opening 2007 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the game ball B is received in the second big winning opening 2007, the game ball B is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 provided with the pseudo big winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second big winning opening 2007. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and to enjoy the movement of the game ball B in the pseudo-game area 2010, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. Can be made to.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 143, 144, 155, and the like. FIG. 155 is a front view of the back unit in the game board. The back unit 3000 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B that is received by the general winning opening 2001 and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a general winning opening sensor 3001 that is received by the first starting port 2004 and is behind the game panel 1100. It includes a first start port sensor 3002 that detects the guided game ball B. The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guiding unit 3100.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back wall 3010 having a box-shaped opening 3010a having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and the rear wall of the back box 3010. It includes a back box rear unit 3030 that is detachably attached by a lock slider 3020, and a back board unit 3040 that is arranged behind the back box rear unit 3030 and is attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. There is.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guidance unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 is distributed and the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010, the back upper front effect unit 3300 provided at the upper part in the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, and the inside of the back box 3010. The back bottom front effect unit 3400 provided in the lower part behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, and the back top rear effect unit 3500 provided behind the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (FIG. (Refer to 162 and the like), and a back bottom rear effect unit 3600 provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a functional surface portion 3011 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) or the like. The functional surface portion 3011 is provided on the back box 3010, and other members such as an effect unit (here, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200) are attached to the back box 3010, and the front side of the back unit 3000 is directed downward. It can be used for lying down in a vertical position, lying on its back with the rear side of the back unit 3000 facing upward, and the like.

[5-9a. Back box related]
Next, the configuration related to the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 156 to 160 and the like. FIG. 156 is a front view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit. FIG. 157 (a) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 157 (b) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 158 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box relationship of FIG. 157 disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 158 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. FIG. 159 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit in FIG. 158 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 159 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear. FIG. 160A is a side view showing a state in which the back unit is laid face down using the functional surface portion, and FIG. 160B is a side view showing a state in which the back unit is laid on its back using the functional surface portion.

The back unit 3000 is provided behind the box-shaped back box 3010 opened forward, the back box rear unit 3030 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010, and the back box rear unit 3030. It includes a back board unit 3040 attached to the rear side of the 3010. The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the back box 3010 by the lock slider 3020.

The back box 3010 has a box-shaped opening 3010a with an open front and a square penetration through the rear wall, and a back box rear unit 3030 (set plate 1650) provided on the lower side of the opening 3010a. The mounting surface portion 3010b to be mounted, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside to the upper side in the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and the mounting surface portion 3010b are provided on the lower side near the center in the left-right direction. It includes a lock mechanism portion 3010d to which the lock slider 3020 can be slidably attached to the left and right.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangle having an aspect ratio of 3: 4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed so that the left-right direction is substantially the same as the left-right direction of the rear wall of the back box 3010. Further, the opening 3010a is provided at a position where the vertical direction is offset (eccentric) upward with respect to the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device.

The upper fixing piece 1651 of the set plate 1650 in the back box rear unit 3030 is inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. Further, the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 can be inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010 from the rear while the lock slider 3020 is slid to the left in the rear view. When the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 is inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d and the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in rear view, the lock slider 3020 prevents the lower fixing piece 1652 from moving backward. be able to.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the back ball guiding unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 on the rear surface around the shaft extending in the vertical direction, and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f. Is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and includes a locking portion 3010 g to which the locking claw 3041b of the back substrate unit 3040 is locked.

The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the rear wall so as to close the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 from the rear. The back box rear unit 3030 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, the set plate 1650 to which the effect display device 1600 is attached to the front side and attached to the back box 3010, and the set plate 1650. It is composed of a peripheral control unit 1500 and a peripheral control unit 1500 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch liquid crystal display device having an aspect ratio of 3: 4.

The set plate 1650 is formed in a flat plate shape with a quadrangle having the same size as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The set plate 1650 has two upper fixing pieces 1651 that are separated from the upper side in the left-right direction and protrude upward, and one lower fixing piece 1652 that protrudes downward from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower side. There is. The two upper fixing pieces 1651 are inserted into the fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010. The lower fixing piece 1652 is inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010.

Further, the set plate 1650 has a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 that is open to the front side toward the front. The liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 is formed in a size corresponding to the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 is fitted and mounted from the front. In the present embodiment, the center of the liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 and the center of the set plate 1650 coincide with each other in the front view. The set plate 1650 is formed transparently. As a result, the inside of the back box 3010 can be visually recognized from the rear through the set plate 1650.

The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 167 and the like) having a peripheral control unit 1511 and an effect display control unit 1512, and a peripheral control board box 1520 containing the peripheral control board 1510. Has been done. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650 so that the upper side of the peripheral control board box 1520 is located slightly below the upper side of the set plate 1650. As a result, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the set plate 1650, a region having a height of about 1/3 of the total height of the set plate 1650 is formed between the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower end of the set plate 1650. It is formed.

The back board unit 3040 includes a box-shaped board box 3041 having an L-shaped front view and thin front and rear, and a panel relay board and an effect drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have. The substrate box 3041 has two shaft portions 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer side of the L-shaped vertically extending portion. Further, the substrate box 3041 has a locking claw 3041b that is locked to the locking portion 3010 g of the back box 3010 at the tip of an L-shaped portion extending to the left and right.

The back board unit 3040 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 so as to straddle the opening 3010a (back box rear unit 3030). When assembled on the game board 5, the L-shaped vertically extending portion of the back substrate unit 3040 is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. Further, the L-shaped left and right portions of the back substrate unit 3040 are located between the lower end behind the set plate 1650 and the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500.

The back board unit 3040 releases the locking between the locking portion 3010g and the locking claw 3041b, and rotates the locking claw 3041b around the shaft portion 3041a so that the locking claw 3041b moves rearward, thereby causing the back box. The rear of the rear unit 3030 can be opened, and the back box rear unit 3030 can be attached to and detached from the back box 3010 without removing it from the back box 3010.

In the present embodiment, an opening 3010a having a size capable of attaching a 19-inch liquid crystal display device is provided on the rear wall of the back box 3010 so that the set plate 1650 can be attached to the opening 3010a. A 15-inch effect display device 1600 is attached to the front side of the 1650. As a result, when the effect display device 1600 is 19 inches in size, the effect display device 1600 can be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and when the effect display device 1600 is smaller than 19 inches, the effect is displayed. It can be attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 via a set plate 1650 corresponding to the size of the display device 1600. Therefore, the effect display device 1600 having a different size can be attached by simply changing the set plate 1650 while leaving the back box 3010 as it is. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the design of the back box 3010 is also changed according to the model change, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back box 3010 can be used as a common part even if the model is changed. , The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, when the position of the effect display device 1600 is to be changed due to a design change or the like, it can be easily handled by changing only the set plate 1650. This makes it possible to reduce the cost of design changes and the like.

In the above embodiment, a transparent set plate 1650 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and colored ones such as colored transparent, colored opaque, and the like may be used. When the set plate 1650 is visible from the player side, it is desirable that the set plate 1650 has a translucent color including black. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being unsightly due to the player being able to see the inside of the island equipment or the light from the rear. In this case, in particular, by making the set plate 1650 black, even if the set plate 1650 is visible from the player side, the set plate 1650 can be made inconspicuous, so that the effect display device in the pachinko machine 1 can be made inconspicuous. The 1600 and other decorative objects can be made more conspicuous, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exerted.

Further, the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment has a functional surface portion 3011 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) or the like. The functional surface portion 3011 is provided inside the outer peripheral edge of the back box 3010 and behind the fixed piece portion 3010e for mounting the back box 3010 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The functional surface portion 3011 is formed so that the front surface side and the rear surface side are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. The functional surface portion 3011 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the back unit 3000 when viewed from the front. The functional surface portion 3011 has a plurality of functional hole portions 3012 in which two through holes arranged vertically or horizontally are set as a set. The two through holes of the functional hole portion 3012 have the same diameter.

The functional surface portion 3011 can bring a predetermined member into contact with the front surface side or the rear surface side. For example, as shown in FIG. 155, in the present embodiment, a part of the rear surface of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is brought into contact with the functional surface portion 3011. At this time, in a part of the functional holes 3012 where the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is in contact, a positioning pin (not shown) of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is inserted into one of the through holes. At the same time, a mounting screw for mounting the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is screwed into the other through hole. Therefore, the functional surface portion 3011 and the functional hole portion 3012 can be used for attaching other members such as the effect unit to the back box 3010. At this time, since a plurality of functional holes 3012 are provided, if the mounting position of another member is changed due to a design change, a model change, etc., one of the functional holes 3012 should be used for mounting. Can be done. Therefore, the back box 3010 can be diverted, and an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the functional surface portion 3011 is provided so that the rear surface side faces the rear (visible in the rear view), and the functional surface portion 3011 is provided through the functional hole portion 3012 penetrating the functional surface portion 3011 from the rear of the back box 3010 by mounting screws. Since the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is attached to the front side of the functional surface portion 3011, the head of the mounting screw for attaching the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 to the back box 3010 is exposed on the front side of the back unit 3000. It is possible to improve the appearance from the front and further exert the decorative effect of the back front peripheral decorative body 3201.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3011 can bring a predetermined member into contact with the front surface side or the rear surface side, for example, as shown in FIG. 160A, a workbench, a mounting table, or the like is placed on the front surface side of the functional surface portion 3011. The upper end of the intermediate member 3016 protruding from the predetermined member 3015 such as the above may be brought into contact with the upper end. At this time, the intermediate member 3016 projects longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3011 to the front surface of the back unit 3000 (here, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200). As a result, when assembling the game board 5, when the back unit 3000 is to be placed (laid face down) on the predetermined member 3015 with the front side facing down, the back unit 3000 is placed with the front side facing downward. By bringing the upper end of the intermediate member 3016 protruding from the predetermined member 3015 into contact with the front surface of the functional surface portion 3011, the back unit 3000 is designated in a state where the front surface of the back unit 3000 is separated upward from the predetermined member 3015. It can be placed on the member 3015.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the back unit 3000 from being damaged by the contact of the predetermined member 3015, and the back unit 3000 (back front peripheral decoration body 3201) can be maintained in a good state, and the back front peripheral edge can be maintained. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defective products (defective products) due to scratches on the decorative body 3201, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. The intermediate member 3016 may be a separate member separated from the predetermined member 3015.

Further, as described above, since the functional surface portion 3011 can prevent the front surface of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 of the back unit 3000 from coming into contact with the predetermined member 3015, the back holding the back front peripheral decoration body 3201. With the unit 3000 (back box 3010) laid face down, other members such as the effect display device 1600 and the back board unit 3040 can be attached and wired to the rear side of the back box 3010.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided in the back box 3010, the effect unit is compared with the case where the functional surface portion 3011 is provided in the effect unit such as the back front peripheral decoration unit 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200. The back box 3010 can be laid face down even when the back box 3010 is not held. Therefore, the back box 3010 (back unit 3000) can be laid face down even during assembly, and various working states (working modes) can be supported.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3011 can bring a predetermined member into contact with the front surface side or the rear surface side, for example, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), a workbench, a mounting table, or the like is placed on the rear surface side of the functional surface portion 3011. The upper end of the intermediate member 3017 protruding from the predetermined member 3015 such as the above may be brought into contact with the upper end. At this time, the intermediate member 3017 protrudes longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3011 to the rear surface of the back unit 3000. As a result, when assembling the game board 5, if the back unit 3000 is to be placed (placed on its back) on the predetermined member 3015 with the rear surface side facing downward, the back unit 3000 is placed with the rear surface facing downward. By bringing the upper end of the intermediate member 3017 protruding from the predetermined member 3015 into contact with the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3011, the back unit 3000 is designated in a state where the rear surface of the back unit 3000 is separated upward from the predetermined member 3015. It can be placed on the member 3015.

Therefore, by bringing the upper surface of the intermediate member 3017 into contact with the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3011 so that the predetermined member 3015 does not come into contact with the rear surface of the back unit 3000, the back unit 3000 is placed on the predetermined member 3015 on its back. Since it can be placed, it can be stabilized with the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) lying on its back when assembling, and it is easy to perform assembly work from the front end side of the back box 3010. can do.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided in a portion recessed from the front surface to the rear of the back box 3010, a portion projecting forward or backward (for example, the back box) is provided at least a part of the peripheral edge of the functional surface portion 3011. Since it has a side wall of 3010), it is possible to regulate the relative movement of the functional surface portion 3011 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 3016 or the intermediate member 3017 in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member 3015 depending on the portion. it can. As a result, the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) can be made difficult to move when it is placed face down or laid on its back via the functional surface portion 3011, and the assembly work and the like can be made easier.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided with a plurality of functional hole portions 3012, a positioning pin that can be inserted into the through hole of the functional hole portion 3012 is provided on the upper surface of the intermediate member 3016 and the intermediate member 3017. The position determination pin can regulate the movement of the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) placed face down or on its back via the functional surface portion 3011 in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member 3015, and is the same as described above. It can exert an action effect.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the back unit 3000 in the front view, the back unit 3000 is placed through the intermediate member 3016 or the intermediate member 307 as a predetermined member 3015 such as a workbench or a mounting table. The back unit 3000 can be kept in a stable state when it is placed face down or on its back, and it is possible to prevent the back unit 3000 from tilting and the front surface of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 from coming into contact with the predetermined member 3015. be able to.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided behind the front surface of the back box 3010, the functional surface portion 3011 hits the game panel 1100 when the back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The back box 3010 (back unit 3000) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 without any problem.

In the above embodiment, the functional surface portion 3011 is shown as a flat surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the functional surface portion may be "rearly conical or conical". "Curved surface recessed in a truncated cone shape", "Multi-faceted portion recessed in a polygonal pyramid shape or a truncated cone shape backward", "Curved surface portion protruding forward in a truncated cone shape or truncated cone shape", "Forward It may be a multi-faceted portion projecting in the shape of a polygonal pyramid or a truncated cone, or the like. When the functional surface portion is a curved surface portion or a multi-faceted portion as described above, it is desirable that the upper end surface of the intermediate member has a shape that imitates the functional surface portion. Thereby, the relative movement of the functional surface portion (back box 3010) and the intermediate member in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member 3015 can be regulated.

Further, in the above embodiment, the back box 3010 is provided with the functional surface portion 3011, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect unit and the ball guiding member for guiding the game ball B attached to the back box 3010 are not limited to this. Etc. may be provided. For example, the end surface of the drive motor or solenoid of the effect unit, the tip surface of the ball guiding member, or the like may be used as the functional surface portion.

[5-9b. Back ball guidance unit]
Next, the back ball guidance unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back ball guidance unit 3100 is provided in the lower part of the back box 3010 near the front end. The back ball guidance unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2004. , A magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting an illegal magnetism acting on the game board 5 (see FIG. 167 and the like).

The back ball guidance unit 3100 includes a general winning opening 2001, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first major winning opening 2006, a second major winning opening 2007, a first sub-out opening 2021, and It has a discharge passage for receiving the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, guiding the game ball B to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower end portion, and then discharging the game ball B downward. There is.

[5-9c. Back front peripheral decoration unit]
Next, the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is attached near the front end in the back box 3010. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is used to illuminate the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 and the back front peripheral decoration 3201 which are formed in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. It is provided with a back front peripheral decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs of the above are mounted.

The back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a sumo ring. The back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is formed so as to have translucency, and can be light-emitting and decorated by light from an LED mounted on the back front peripheral decoration substrate. The front surface of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 projects forward from the front end of the back box 3010.

According to the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be decorated in a ring shape by the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201, and the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved. Further, by illuminating the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be made to emit light in a ring shape, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area 5a.

Further, since the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can independently emit and decorate the portions divided into the plurality of parts in the circumferential direction by the plurality of LEDs of the back front peripheral decoration substrate, the light rotates in the circumferential direction. The light emitting effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, the front surface of the back front peripheral decorative body 3201 protrudes forward from the front end of the back box 3010, and the front end side penetrates the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 and the panel holder 1120 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. It is located in a space separated from the mouth 1121. As a result, the position in the front-rear direction of the front surface (decoration) of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 becomes as close as possible to the position in the front-rear direction of the game area 5a, so that the focus is on the game area 5a. And the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 will also be focused, and the decoration of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can be clearly seen while visually recognizing the inside of the game area 5a, and the decoration of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can be played. You can definitely show it to others. Therefore, the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can be made to stand out, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the decorative effect of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can be sufficiently and surely exhibited. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

[5-9d. Back-up front production unit]
Subsequently, the back-up front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back-up front effect unit 3300 is provided at a position substantially the same as the back-front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction in the upper part of the back box 3010. The back-up front effect unit 3300 is provided behind the rectangular back-up front decoration body 3310 that is long in the left-right direction in the front view and the back-top front decoration body 3310, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front. It includes an upper front decorative substrate (not shown) and a back upper front elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back upper front decorative body 3310.

The back-up front decoration body 3310 is provided so that the sumo rankings such as "Yokozuna", "Ozeki", and "Sekiwake" are arranged from the left, and each number is assigned by the LED of the back-up front decoration board. Is independently luminescent and can be decorated. The back-up front decorative body 3310 is formed to have a length in which the left-right direction crosses the front of the effect display device 1600.

The back-up front decorative body 3310 is attached so as to be able to move up and down, and can be raised and lowered by the back-up front raising and lowering unit. The back-up front decoration body 3310 can be raised and lowered within a range of substantially the same height as the height of the back-up front decoration body 3310. In the normal state, the back-up front decorative body 3310 is in the state of the ascending position moved to the uppermost position. In this state, when assembled on the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view, and is located at the upper part of the game area 5a. Most of the back-up front decoration body 3310 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the remaining part can be visually recognized through the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. it can.

The back-up front decorative body 3310 can be moved downward from the normal ascending position state to the back-up front elevating unit by the back-up front elevating unit. When the back-up front decoration body 3310 is in the lowered position, the center in the vertical direction is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the left guide passage group 2530 in the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 166). In the lowered position, substantially the entire back-up front decorative body 3310 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

According to the back-up front effect unit 3300, the numbering of the back-up front decoration body 3310 can be independently luminescent and decorated. Therefore, for example, after all the rankings are luminescent and decorated, only one numbering is available. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that is decorated with light emission and stops the fluctuation. As a result, when the high-ranking ranking is luminescent and decorated, the player can be made to think that an opportunity has arrived, the expectation for the game can be raised, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the back-up front decorative body 3310, the ranking of the light-emitting decorations suggests to the player the degree of expectation that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) will occur in which the player is advantageous. can do. As a result, when a plurality of variable light emitting decorations of the back-up front decorative body 3310 are started, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the fluctuation is stopped at the desired number. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the back-up front elevating unit moves the back-up front decorative body 3310 from the ascending position to the descending position, the back-up front decorative body 3310 moves to the center side of the game area 5a and at the same time, on the front surface of the effect display device 1600. Since the upper part is blocked, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the back-up front decoration body 3310, and the back-up front decoration body 3310 can be focused on. As a result, the light emitting effect using the back-up front decorative body 3310 as described above can be surely shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. Further, if the above-mentioned light emitting effect is executed at the descending position rather than at the rising position, the player can feel a premium feeling, so that the reliability of the suggestion of the expectation level by the light emitting effect can be increased. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

[5-9e. Backside front production unit]
Next, the back lower front effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back lower front effect unit 3400 is provided at the lower part in the back box 3010 behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200. The back bottom front effect unit 3400 is provided behind the back bottom front decoration body 3410, which is long in the left-right direction, and the back bottom front decoration body 3410, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back bottom front decoration board (illustrated). (Omitted) and a lower back front elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the lower back front decorative body 3410.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 can be light-emitting decorated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back front decorative substrate. Further, the lower back front decorative body 3410 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the lowermost lowering position and the highest ascending position by the lower back lower front elevating unit. The lower back front decorative body 3410 is formed to have a length in which the left-right direction crosses the front of the effect display device 1600.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 can cover the long left and right base decorative body 3411, the central decorative body 3412 provided in the center of the base decorative body 3411 in the left-right direction, and the central decorative body 3412 from the front. It has a front left decorative body 3413 and a front right decorative body 3414 provided in front of the center in the left-right direction of the above (see FIG. 163 and the like).

The base decorative body 3411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape imitating a rope and has translucency. The central decorative body 3412 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the characters "Gourmet" are formed in a relief shape. The central decorative body 3412 is rotatably provided around an axis extending in the front-rear direction about the center by a drive motor (not shown).

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located so as to be in contact with each other, and are provided so as to be movable so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are each translucent. In the front left decorative body 3413, the characters "heaven" are formed in a relief shape. In the front right decorative body 3414, the characters "Noboru" are formed in a relief shape.

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are normally located in a closed position where they are in close contact with each other, and the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear is hidden from the front invisible. ing. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can be moved from the normal state to open positions that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. In this open position, the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear can be visually recognized from the front through between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414.

In the normal state of the under-back front effect unit 3400, the under-back front decorative body 3410 is located at a lowered position. Further, in the normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located at the closed positions, and the central decorative body 3412 is invisible from the front. When the back lower front decorative body 3410 in the normal state is assembled on the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at a height slightly above the side upper left unit 2300, and the lower end is the lower end of the center accessory 2500. The upper end is located at a height slightly lower than the warp entrance 2511. A part of the back lower front decoration body 3410 in this normal state is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest is the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. It is visible through.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 can be moved from the lower back position to the upper back position by the lower back lower front elevating unit. In the state where the lower back front decorative body 3410 is in the raised position, the upper end is located at a height slightly lower than the back upper front decorative body 3310 in the raised position (see FIG. 161). In other words, the lower back front decorative body 3410 in the ascending position is located at the center in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the first prize opening 2006. Further, the lower back front decorative body 3410 holds the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 between the open position and the closed position at an arbitrary position (height) between the lowered position and the raised position. Can be moved.

According to the back bottom front effect unit 3400, when the back bottom front decoration body 3410 is moved upward from the descending position, it moves to the center side of the game area 5a and blocks a part of the effect display device 1600, so that the player It is possible to attract the attention of the under-back front decoration body 3410.

Further, in the lower back front decorative body 3410, when the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear becomes visible (appears). ) Therefore, the appearance of the central decorative body 3412 can make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, in the lower back front decorative body 3410, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position to perform the central decoration. Rotating the central decorative body 3412 with the body 3412 appearing can make the player strongly think that there must be something good, further raising the player's expectation. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated, when the central decorative body 3412 appears visibly, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the central decorative body 3412 is rotated. Can be entertained.

Further, in the back lower front effect unit 3400, the central decorative body 3412 appears due to the raising and lowering of the back lower front decorative body 3410, the movement of the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414, and the rotation of the central decorative body 3412. By appropriately combining,, it is possible to show the player a variety of movable effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the under-back front effect unit 3400, in addition to the above-mentioned movable effect of the under-back front decorative body 3410, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect by a plurality of LEDs on the under-back front decorative substrate, so that a wider variety of effects can be achieved. It can be shown to the player, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest.

[5-9f. After-back production unit]
Next, the back-up post-effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described. The back-up rear effect unit 3500 is provided at the upper part in the back box 3010 and behind the back-up front effect unit 3300. The back-up rear effect unit 3500 is provided behind the back-up rear decoration body 3510 (see FIG. 162 and the like), which is long in the left-right direction, and the back-up rear decoration body 3510, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a back-up rear decorative substrate (not shown) and a back-up rear elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back-up rear decorative body 3510.

The back-up rear decorative body 3510 has translucency, and can be light-emitting and decorated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decorative substrate. Further, the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the highest ascending position and the most lowered lowering position by the back-up rear elevating unit. Further, the back upper rear decorative body 3510 is provided behind the back lower front decorative body 3410.

The back-up rear decoration body 3510 is formed in a shape imitating the upper half of the winning cup, and the letter "Yu" is formed in a relief shape in the center in the left-right direction. The back-up rear decoration body 3510 can form one large winning cup by abutting the back-bottom rear decoration body 3610 on the lower end (see FIG. 164 and the like). The back-up rear decorative body 3510 has substantially the same height as the back-up front decorative body 3310.

In the normal state of the back-up rear effect unit 3500, the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is located in the raised position. In this state, the back-up rear decoration body 3510 is located behind the back-up front decoration body 3310 in the raised position, and is invisible from the front.

In the back-up rear effect unit 3500, when the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is moved to the descending position by the back-up rear elevating unit, the lower end of the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is substantially the height of the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is located in the area. When the decorative body 3510 is moved downward from the ascending position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. In this state, if the back upper front decorative body 3310 or the back lower front decorative body 3410 has not moved in front of the back upper rear decorative body 3510, the back upper rear decorative body 3510 is visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the back-up rear decoration unit 3500, by raising and lowering the back-up rear decoration body 3510, it can be made visible from the front, so that the appearance of the back-up rear decoration body 3510 may surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the back-up rear decoration body 3510 can form one large decoration by abutting the back-bottom rear decoration body 3610, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making people think that an opportunity has arrived.

[5-9 g. After-the-back production unit]
Next, the backside rear effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The under-back effect unit 3600 is provided behind the under-back effect unit 3400 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The back-bottom rear effect unit 3600 is provided behind the back-bottom rear decoration body 3610 (see FIG. 162 and the like), which is long in the left-right direction, and the back-bottom rear decoration body 3610, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a back lower rear decorative substrate (not shown) and a back lower rear elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back lower rear decorative body 3610.

The under-back decorative body 3610 has translucency, and can be light-emitting and decorated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the under-back decorative substrate. Further, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the most lowered lowering position and the most raised rising position by the back lower rear elevating unit.

The lower back decoration body 3610 is formed in a shape imitating the lower half of the winning cup, and the letters "Prize" are formed in a relief shape in the center in the left-right direction. The back-up rear decoration body 3610 can form one large winning cup when the back-up rear decoration body 3510 abuts on the upper end (see FIG. 164 and the like). The lower back decorative body 3610 has substantially the same height as the lower back front decorative body 3410.

In the under-back effect unit 3600, in the normal state, the under-back decorative body 3610 is located in the lowered position. In this state, the lower back decorative body 3610 is located behind the lower back front decorative body 3410 in the descending position, and is invisible from the front.

In the back lower rear effect unit 3600, when the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the ascending position by the back lower rear elevating unit, the upper end of the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is the lower end of the back upper rear decorative body 3510 in the raised position. It is located at a height that makes contact with. When the decorative body 3610 is moved upward from the lowered position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. In this state, if the back upper front decorative body 3310 or the back lower front decorative body 3410 has not moved in front of the back lower rear decorative body 3610, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the under-back effect unit 3600, by raising and lowering the under-back decorative body 3610, it can be made visible from the front, so that the appearance of the under-back decorative body 3610 may surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the back lower rear decorative body 3610 can form one large decoration by abutting the back upper rear decorative body 3510, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making people think that an opportunity has arrived.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 161 to 166 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit and the back lower rear decorative body of the back lower rear effect unit in the back unit are each moved to the ascending position. .. In FIG. 162, the back lower front decoration body of the back lower front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the center of the game area, and the back upper rear decoration of the back upper rear effect unit is moved to the upper side of the back lower front decoration body. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the under-back decoration of the under-back effect unit is moving to the underside of the under-back front decoration. FIG. 163 shows a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit move to open positions with each other and the central decorative body appears in the state of FIG. 162. It is a front view of a game board.

Further, in FIG. 164, the back-up and rear-rear decoration unit of the back-up and rear-effect unit in the back unit is moved to the descending position, and the back-up and rear-rear decoration of the back-down and rear-effect unit is raised to raise the back-up and rear-decorative body. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which is in contact with. FIG. 165 shows a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit move to open positions and the central decorative body appears in the state of FIG. 164. It is a front view of a game board. In FIG. 166, the back-up front decoration of the back-up front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the descending position, and the back-up rear decoration of the back-up rear effect unit is moved to the rear of the back-up front decoration. The back lower front decoration of the back lower front production unit rises and moves to the lower side of the back upper front decoration, and the back lower rear decoration of the back lower back production unit rises and moves to the lower back upper front decoration. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which is in contact with the decorative body behind the back of the body.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that divides the rear end side of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2600 are formed substantially entirely transparent, under normal conditions, as shown in FIG. 142, the game panel is passed through them. In the back unit 3000 arranged behind the 1100, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front decorative body 3310 of the back upper front effect unit 3300, and the back lower front effect unit 3400. The front decorative body 3410, etc. can be satisfactorily visually recognized, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

More specifically, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is provided in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, and is visually recognized through a transparent game panel 1100, a center accessory 2500, or the like. Can be done. The back-up front decoration unit 3310 of the back-up front effect unit 3300 is located above the upper end of the effect display device 1600 and at an elevated position whose center in the vertical direction is substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002. Most of them can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the remaining parts can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500.

Further, the back lower front decorative body 3410 of the back lower front effect unit 3400 is located at a lower position near the lower end of the effect display device 1600 so that the center in the vertical direction is slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300. A part can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. The front left decoration body 3413 and the front right decoration body 3414 of the back lower front decoration body 3410 are located directly above the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. The effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized within the frame of the center accessory 2500 through the square area between the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the back lower front decorative body 3410.

The back-up rear decoration unit 3510 of the back-up rear effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is located behind the back-up front decoration 3310 and cannot be visually recognized from the front. Further, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 of the back lower rear effect unit 3600 is located behind the back lower front decorative body 3410 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

The game board 5 has a back unit 3000 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper rear effect unit 3500, the back lower rear effect unit 3600, and the like perform predetermined movable effects and light emission effects. Further, the game board 5 performs an effect using the game ball B (here, a so-called dead ball that does not affect the game) in the lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000.

Specifically, for example, the back unit 3000 can be used to perform a movable effect as shown in FIGS. 161 to 157. First, as shown in FIG. 161, the back lower front decorative body 3410 of the back lower front effect unit 3400 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 of the back lower rear effect unit 3600 are moved together to the ascending position, respectively. As a result, the back lower front decorative body 3410 crossing the effect display device 1600 moves upward so as to traverse the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is attracted to the back lower front decorative body 3410. You can do it and make you think there is something good about it.

By the way, in FIG. 161, when only the lower back decorative body 3410 is moved upward, the lower back decorative body 3610 in the descending position becomes visible from the front, but the lower back decorative body 3610 is on the back upper side. Since it is formed so as to form a pair with respect to the rear decorative body 3510, if only the rear decorative body 3610 can be visually recognized, it looks half-finished and unnatural, and the appearance of the game area 5a deteriorates. There is a fear. Further, when the back-up and rear decorative body 3610 is visible, some players recognize that it is combined with other decorative bodies due to its incomplete shape, and the combination with the back-up and rear decorative body 3510 described later. When the movable effect of is executed, the impact on the player is reduced, and there is a risk that a sufficient effect cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the back lower back decorative body 3610 is moved upward together with the back lower front decorative body 3410, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 can be kept hidden. It is possible to prevent the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the back-up rear decoration body 3610. It is possible to fully exert the effect of the production.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 161, as shown in FIG. 162, the lower back front decorative body 3410 is moved to the center of the game area. At this time, for the same reason as described above, the back lower rear decoration body 3610 is moved together with the back lower front decoration body 3410 so that the back lower front decoration body 3410 is located forward. Further, the back upper rear decorative body 3510 is moved to the portion between the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the back lower front decorative body 3410, and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the lower side of the back lower front decorative body 3410. Let me.

As a result, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is substantially covered by the back upper rear decorative body 3510, the back lower front decorative body 3410, and the back lower rear decorative body 3610, which has a strong impact on the player. It can be given and can make you strongly think that there is something good. In this state, the back-up rear decoration body 3510 and the back-bottom rear decoration body 3610, which form one decoration (here, the winning cup), are separated from each other vertically, but in between. Since the back lower front decoration 3410 is located, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the middle of the long winning cup is hidden by the back lower front decoration 3410, which makes the appearance worse. Can be avoided.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 162, as shown in FIG. 163, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position close to each other to the open position separated from each other. Then, the central decorative body 3412 is made to appear visibly between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414. As a result, when the central decorative body 3412 newly appears in the lower back front decorative body 3410, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can be strongly reminded, and it is possible to raise expectations for an advantageous gaming state and suppress a decline in interest.

When the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position, they may be gradually moved or may be repeatedly opened and closed. As a result, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are opened and the central decorative body 3412 appears, and the player can be entertained.

In the state shown in FIG. 163, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 may be further rotated. As a result, the rotation of the central decorative body 3412 can convince the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous occurs, and the advantageous gaming state can be determined. It is possible to raise expectations and suppress the decline in interest.

Subsequently, from the state shown in FIG. 163, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved to the closed positions as shown in FIG. 162, and then as shown in FIG. The back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the descending position, and the back upper rear decorative body 3510 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 are moved to the center in the vertical direction and brought into contact with each other (coalescing). As a result, a large winning cup appears in the center of the game area 5a, so that the player can be assured that an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game state) will occur in which the player has an advantage. , It is possible to raise the expectation for the advantageous gaming state and suppress the decline in the interest.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 164, as shown in FIG. 165, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position. As a result, the player can be strongly convinced that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous occurs, which raises the expectation for the advantageous gaming state and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

In the state shown in FIG. 165, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 may be rotated. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state (for example, the "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous has been confirmed, and the expectation for the advantageous gaming state is raised. Can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161, as the first operation, the back lower front decorative body 3410 (back lower rear decorative body 3610) is moved to the ascending position, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 166, the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved to the descending position, and the back upper rear decoration body 3510 is moved together with the back upper front decoration body 3310 to the back upper front decoration body 3310. The back lower front decoration body 3410 is moved to the lower side of the back upper front decoration body 3310, and the back lower rear decoration body 3610 is moved to the rear side of the back lower front decoration body 3410 together with the back lower front decoration body 3410. You may move it to. Alternatively, the lower back decorative body 3410 may be moved to the center of the game area 5a together with the lower back decorative body 3610. With these, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

As described above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the series of effects as described above is a lottery of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005. It is executed according to the result and the lottery result of the second special symbol, and can entertain the player. In addition, a series of productions are made to proceed to the end or end in the middle according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, which are drawn in multiple stages. By showing it, it is difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect as described above can be appropriately combined with the light emitting effect, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player by appropriately combining the light emission effect, the display effect, etc., and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the player can be given various effects. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned movable effect is the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, and the first (Ii) Although the one to be executed according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed according to the detection of the game ball B by the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403. As a result, even during an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous, the movable production can be enjoyed, the player is less likely to get bored, and the decline in interest is suppressed. be able to.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 167 and the like. FIG. 167 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU1310a, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. The circuit, the RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value and the error, and the game board 5 are divided. It is provided with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to a content that does not make sense, the main control MPU 1310a is forced to be affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and again executes the main control side power on power processing described later. Will be reset. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (as described later). Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control) does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633 from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Only the MPU1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will be maintained in the activated state.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, "hardware with built-in main control") that updates a big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. It is described as "random number circuit"). This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is preset as a minimum value), and an initial value is generated. The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as a value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a single value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and a clock signal (main) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. When all the values in the above are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit to be used.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2004, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2005. The mouth sensor 2401, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002, and the game received in the first large winning opening 2006. The first big winning opening sensor 2525 that detects the ball B, the second big winning opening sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007, and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 are detected. The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, the vibration sensor that detects the vibration acting on the game board 5, etc. are the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of the specified input port of.

Further, each detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit described later). When they are input to the main control board 1310 as they are, they are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first start port sensor 3002, and the second start port sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, the main control. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first winning opening sensor 2525, the second winning opening sensor 2561, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor are transmitted to the panel relay board. It is input to the main control board 1310 via, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the variable winning port solenoid 2522, the first The drive signals to the large winning opening solenoid 2524 and the second winning opening solenoid 2563 are output via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the function display unit 1400. Status indicator, normal symbol indicator, ordinary hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, round indicator, to Each drive signal is output without going through another board, that is, directly. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby outputting various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633. By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) can be output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys that the launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is reversed when the launch is not permitted. Is set to. As for the logic of the launch permission signal, as an initial value (default), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, the gate sensor 2601, the first major winning opening sensor 2525, the second major winning opening sensor 2561, and the out sensor 664. Uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the variable winning opening 2003, and the gate 2002, so that the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor The detection of the game ball B by the 2401 and the gate sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the gate sensor 2601.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the first big winning opening sensor The detection of the game ball B by 2525 also frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the first prize opening sensor 2525. Further, since the game ball B launched into the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, the game ball B is frequently detected by the out sensor 664. Occurs in. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life may be used.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU 1310a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a pressing operation unit for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball during maintenance. A ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 to start the ball removal operation. , Is equipped.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the power failure of the main control board 1310. The power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" has occurred (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 195, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is input to the launch control input circuit and then input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In the launch timing control circuit, the launch condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 is satisfied based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are formed based on the CR connection signal. If the launch condition 2 that is electrically connected is satisfied and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B is not satisfied. Since the firing reference pulse for launching the game toward the game area 5a is not output, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be launched.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 195. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

In the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 is provided with the launch control unit 633b, which controls the launch by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, but the power supply board 630 is provided. It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and is shown in the figure. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 167, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the above.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration of the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is omitted, the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like are mounted on one semiconductor chip. The integrated peripheral control IC, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, the sound source IC that performs high-quality performance, and the sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by this sound source IC. It has a stored sound ROM.

A plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip in the peripheral control IC, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripherals are based on the various commands. The CPU of the control IC outputs the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and serial I / O for the lamp drive board. For the game board decorative drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Transmission from the serial I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or drive signals to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the sudden output adjustment drive motor 381, and the like. It is composed of door-side drive data for outputting the data, and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be transmitted is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed serial for the display control unit. In addition to transmitting data from the I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, and the sudden output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit is based on this operation signal. The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and provides the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like provided in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. , The main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjusting switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, etc.) as sound information. By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used in combination to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are a plurality of serial inputs / outputs different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an execution signal is input from VDP and the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various characters on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in width 2 x height 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. Driven by sub-scanning performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, it is based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the output is sequentially output to one line of pixels from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N. Either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. Near the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, the first prize entrance 2006, which is normally closed by the first prize entrance door 2523, is provided, and the left second guide passage 2532 The game ball B that has entered the game rolls on the first prize opening door 2523 and flows down.

The game ball B that has circulated through the left guide passage group 2530 is released above the gate 2002, and is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521. The left guide passage group 2530 and the gate are on the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003. After contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the door and the 2002, the gate 2002 is passed through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the drawn normal symbols is "normal hit", the variable winning opening The variable winning opening 2003 closed by the door 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003.

In the present embodiment, since the variable winning opening 2003 is provided near the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is higher to distribute the left second guide passage 2532 than to the left first guide passage 2531. It is accepted by the variable winning opening 2003 with a probability. Then, when the game balls B are received in the variable winning opening 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of game balls B are released from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is paid out to.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball B through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to suggesting the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (for example,). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this ordinary symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning opening 2003 is normally opened after the lapse of the variable time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and the time when the lottery result of the normal symbol is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the start of suggestion of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous ordinary symbol is completed. In addition, the number of pending lottery results of ordinary symbols is limited to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, the number of pending cards is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

At the site of the gate 2002, the game ball B flows down any of the gate 2002, the left outer side of the gate 2002, and the right outer side of the gate 2002. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down below the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 that is open to the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In the present embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right outer side of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the wind turbine W. ..

Then, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2004, so that the first is likely to occur. Accepted at the start port 2004.

When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", A lottery will be held for "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second big hit", etc.). If the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is other than "missing", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time).

In the present embodiment, the first start is performed from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2004 (special variation time). When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2004, the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol cannot be started. Therefore, until the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn earlier is completed, the first special The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of pending first special symbol lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2004, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2004. However, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 may be received by the first start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 will be accepted. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is to the right of the center accessory 2500. It is discharged to the space forming portion 2550 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 has an entrance to the right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and an entrance to the left at intervals from the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. It is composed of a right second guide passage 2542 with an opening. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hitting), it enters the right first guide passage 2541 and has a strength that does not abut on the abutting portion 1006 (right). When the game ball B is hit with a strength that is somewhat weaker than the hit, there is a high probability that the game ball B will enter the right second guide passage 2542. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates in either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 according to the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B circulated through the right first guide passage 2541 is released into the first guide region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B circulated through the right second guide passage 2542 is a specific obstacle. It is released into the second lead region 2712 of the nail group 2700.

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the left-right direction along the guidance region 2710. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed in the portion of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 as compared with the normal region.

In the first guidance region 2711 and the second guidance region 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the guidance region 2710, and when it deviates from the second guidance region 2712 to the right outside, the first sub-out port 2021 provided below is provided. Will be accepted with high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out opening 2021, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted in the second big winning opening 2007 or the second starting opening 2005 provided downstream.

In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the distribution of the right second guide passage 2542 is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 than the right first guide passage 2541. This makes it possible for the player to perform a driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B is distributed in the right first guide passage 2541 at the time of "right-handed". There is. That is, at the time of "right-handed", the driving operation of rotating the handle 195 greatly is prompted so that the game ball B is driven with a strength such that the game ball B abuts on the abutment portion 1006. This makes it easier to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 with a relatively easy driving operation.

The game ball B that circulates through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and is not accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 and is passed through the second attacker portion. Enter 2560. Under normal conditions, the second major winning opening 2007 provided in the second attacker portion 2560 is closed by the second major winning opening door 2562 so that the game ball B cannot be accepted, so that the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker are closed. The game ball B that has passed between the right wall portion 2567 flows down onto the second prize-winning door 2562, rolls to the left on the second prize-winning door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then to the right. It is discharged downward from the second attacker portion 2560 through the discharge passage 2565.

A second starting port 2005 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the second starting port 2005, and a lower right unit 2400 is provided on the left side of the second starting port 2005. Inclined wall portions 2418 are provided respectively. Further, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the exit of the right discharge passage 2565, the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received by the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received by the second sub-out port 2022 with a lower probability than that of the second starting port 2005. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B, which is discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 and is not received in the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022, flows down on the inclined wall portion 2418 and becomes inclined on the inclined wall portion 2418. It rolls diagonally to the lower left along the line, is discharged to the left at a portion below the first starting port 2004, and is received by the out port 1008.

That is, in the normal state, when the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (when "right-handed"), only the second starting port 2005 has an opportunity to accept the game ball B. As a result, in a normal state, the player can be made to positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the right side of the center accessory 2500 (““ It is possible to give a premium feeling to "right-handed").

When the game balls B driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 are received in the second starting port 2005, a predetermined number (for example, one) is sent from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201, and on the main control board 1310, the second special symbol (for example, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit" , "Probability change (probability change) hit", "Time reduction (time reduction) hit", "Probability change time reduction hit", "Probability change time reduction no hit", "Second big hit", etc.) will be drawn. If the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is other than "missing", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the player takes a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time) longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. Suggested in.

In the present embodiment, the second start is performed from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second start port 2005 (special variation time). When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2005, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the second special until the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn earlier is completed. The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of pending second special symbol lottery results is limited to four for each of the second starting openings 2005, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted at the second starting opening 2005. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The special variation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 is the special variation time of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2004. It is set longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result. As a result, the lottery result of the second special symbol takes longer to consume the reserved number, so that the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 is the same. However, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Therefore, under normal conditions, even if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, only the second starting port 2005 may be accepted, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is rarely executed. , It is possible to make the player positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As described above, the first big winning opening is based on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. The 2006 or second prize opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the game ball B is ready to be accepted.

When the first prize opening 2006 becomes acceptable, the first prize opening 2006 is provided in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can see the left first prize opening 2006. (Ii) The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B circulates in the guide passage 2532. Then, when the game ball B that has entered the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, the main control board 1310 and the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 to the upper plate 201.

On the other hand, when the second major winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the second major winning opening 2007 is provided below the right side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can see the right side of the center accessory 2500. The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed. Then, when the second big winning opening 2007 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker part 2560 from between the guidance wall part 2552 and the attacker right wall part 2567. Is accepted into the second prize opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the upper plate 201. Will be done.

In this way, when the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B, the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B. Since a large number of game balls B can be paid out, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is, for example, "small hit", the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B for a short time. It opens and closes in between (for example, a small hit rush). At this time, even if an attempt is made to hit the game ball B aiming at the second big prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second big winning opening 2007 opens and the game ball B can be accepted, the second big winning opening 2007 Since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to take the timing of hitting the game ball B. As a result, the difficulty level is given to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that the game can be rewarded and the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. .. Further, in the above case, since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second major winning opening 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit", after the second big winning opening 2007 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted. When a predetermined time (for example, 20 to 40 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are accepted into the second prize opening 2007, the game ball B is satisfied. The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the closed state unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that the first special symbol such as "big hit" or the second special symbol will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the lottery result of the first special symbol is changed. And there is a "hit" that changes the display time of the production image that suggests the lottery result of the second special symbol ("short time hit").

When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is "second big hit", the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 After making the game ball B acceptable in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is to maintain a probabilistic change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, below the second major winning opening 2007, there is a pseudo-game area 2010 in which only the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 can be distributed. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 enters the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561. When the game ball B that has entered the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 can accept the game ball B, , The game ball B is accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, it passes in front of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo-out opening 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo-large winning opening 2402 uses, for example, a game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern when the second large winning opening 2007 is capable of accepting the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern due to the above-mentioned "big hit" or the like. Will be accepted. Since this pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is provided so as to be larger and more prominent than the second major winning opening 2007, many game balls B accepted in the second major winning opening 2007 are accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. By doing so, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and entertain during the "big hit" game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the function display unit 1400, the lottery result of the special symbol (the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol) is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400 suggests the lottery result of the special symbol by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs. ..

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each pattern row in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The pattern rows are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed are combined with the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , An advantageous game state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn.

The time for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (special fluctuation time)) and the time for suggesting the lottery result for the special symbol on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 according to the lottery result of the lottered special symbol. It is possible to perform a player participation type production in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in 300 are operated. In the player-participation-type production, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player-participation-type production can be enjoyed by operating the production operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back front of the back unit 3000. It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper rear effect unit 3500, the back lower rear effect unit 3600, and the like. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect.

[8. Second Embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173 and the like. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed. FIG. 169 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the front, and FIG. 169 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the back. is there. FIG. 170 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guidance unit disassembled in the right half of the center accessory of FIG. 169 and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 171 (a) is a front view of the ball guidance unit in the center accessory of FIG. 169, and FIG. 171 (b) is a right side view of the ball guidance unit. FIG. 172 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 171, FIG. 172 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 171 and FIG. It is a cross-sectional view cut along the Saw line, and FIG. 171 is a cross-sectional view cut along the starter line in FIG. 171. FIG. 173 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 171 disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 173 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 171 disassembled and viewed from the front left.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment differs only in the configuration of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and a part of the front unit 2000. The other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed description of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment is provided with three general winning openings 2001. Further, in the game board 5A, instead of the gate 2002, the second starting port 2005 of the lower right unit 2400 in the game board 5 is used as the normal winning opening 2008, and the variable winning opening 2003 of the game board 5 is used as the normal winning opening 2008. The second starting port 2005 is set to open and close according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol drawn by the acceptance of the ball B. Further, in the game board 5A, a ball guidance unit 2580 capable of guiding the game ball B is provided instead of the specific obstacle nail group 2700.

Due to the above differences, in the game board 5A of the second embodiment, the variable winning opening sensor 2526 of the game board 5 is replaced with the second starting port sensor, and the second starting port sensor 2401 of the game board 5 is replaced. It has replaced the normal winning opening sensor.

The center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A is provided in the space forming portion 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560, and is a ball capable of guiding the game ball B circulating through the right guide passage group 2540. It has a guidance unit 2580 and a flat plate-shaped center right front plate 2590 extending vertically from the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560 so as to cover the front of the ball guidance unit 2580. ..

The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A has an opening 2553 penetrating in a vertically long quadrangle in a flange portion 2502 extending to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and below the opening 2553. It has a lower right first passage 2550a and a lower right second passage 2550b through which the game ball B guided by the ball guidance unit 2580 is provided.

The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are formed in a crank shape that extends downward from the entrance, then extends to the right, and then extends downward. A lower right second passage 2550b is provided on the right side of the lower right first passage 2550a. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are open in the front and are closed by the center right front plate 2590. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are located substantially in the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction when assembled on the game board 5A.

A space is formed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560 so that the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the area.

The lower right second passage 2550b opens downward just above the first sub-out port 2021. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the lower right second passage 2550b is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 than the lower right first passage 2550a. Since the game ball B passing through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 and the second guide passage 2580b of the ball guidance unit 2580 circulates in the lower right second passage 2550b, the game ball B goes to the first sub-out port 2021. In order to reduce the acceptance probability of the game ball B, the player can be made to positively perform a driving operation for entering the game ball B into the right first guide passage 2541. Therefore, when "right-handed", by hitting hard, the game ball B can easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the abutment portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with delicate adjustment. There is no such thing, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

[8-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 2580 guides the game balls B circulating through the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 separately in a state where they can be visually recognized from the front. The ball guidance unit 2580 has a first guide passage 2580a for guiding the game ball B from the right first guide passage 2541 and a second guide passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B from the right second guide passage 2542. doing. A second guide passage 2580b is provided on the right side of the first guide passage 2580a. The first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can guide the game ball B downward while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in a visible state.

The first guide passage 2580a of the ball guidance unit 2580 has an inlet opening toward the front near the upper end and an outlet opening diagonally forward and downward at the lower end. Further, the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b opens forward at a position slightly lower than the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a, and the exit opens diagonally forward and downward at the lower end.

The ball guidance unit 2580 includes a left passage member 2581 provided with a first guidance passage 2580a open to the right and a second guide attached to the right side of the left passage member 2581 and open to the right. It is composed of a right passage member 2582 provided with a passage 2580b and a flat plate-shaped passage closing plate 2583 attached to the right side of the right passage member 2582. The ball guidance unit 2580 is transparently formed.

The left passage member 2581 protrudes to the right from the flat side wall portion 2581a extending in the front-rear direction and up and down, and the side wall portion 2581a facing the right side, and is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction becomes lower. It has a plurality of inclined portions 2581b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided at intervals in which the game ball B can be distributed in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower side is alternately different in the upper and lower sides. Further, in the plurality of inclined portions 2581b, the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b extends outward in the front-rear direction at intervals so that the game ball B can flow from the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b. It is provided.

Further, the left passage member 2581 extends upward from the upper end portion of each inclined portion 2581b to the upper inclined portion 2581b and upward from the upper end portion 2581b, and from the upper end portion of the standing wall portion 2581c to the upper side inclined portion 2581b. It has a top wall portion 2581d that is exposed.
The top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the inclined portion 2581b on the upper side of the inclined portion 2581b on which the standing wall portion 2581c rises. Further, the top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2581b of the upper inclined portion 2581b, and forms a gap between the upper inclined portion 2581b and the upper inclined portion 2581b. ..

Further, the left passage member 2581 is formed by a plurality of first protruding portions 2581e projecting to the right from a portion between the vertically separated inclined portions 2581b on the side wall portion 2581a and the inclined portion 2581b on the side wall portion 2581a. It has a plurality of first projecting piece portions 2581f protruding to the right from the portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2581c. The first protruding portion 2581e is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction of the inclined portion 2581b, and is formed in a flat plate shape extending in parallel with the lower inclined portion 2581b and having a triangular shape having a narrow tip. Has been done. The first projecting piece portion 2581f extends vertically and its lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2581b, and the upper end is inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the left passage member 2581, the uppermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, and the upper end side extends upward in an arc shape to form the lower side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a. .. Further, the lowermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the front end is lowered, and is located behind the front end of the upper inclined portion 2581b, forming the lower side of the exit of the first guide passage 2580a. doing. Further, the lowermost top wall portion 2581d does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c. The left passage member 2581 of the present embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2581b.

The right passage member 2582 includes a flat side wall portion 2582a that closes the first guide passage 2580a that is open to the right, and a plurality of positions that protrude to the left from the left-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a. It has one protruding portion 2582b. Two of the plurality of first protrusions 2582b are provided in one inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 with the first protrusions 2581e in between in the front-rear direction when assembled into the ball guidance unit 2580. In the first protrusion 2582b, the upstream side of the first protrusion 2581e protrudes to the left in a triangular shape, and the downstream side of the first protrusion 2581e has an inclined upstream end and extends downstream to the vicinity of the standing wall portion 2581c. It protrudes to the left in the trapezoidal shape.

Further, the right passage member 2582 projects to the right from the right-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a, and is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction becomes lower, and is provided at intervals in the vertical direction. It has a plurality of inclined portions 2582c which are formed. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are provided at intervals in which the game ball B can be distributed in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower side is alternately different in the upper and lower sides. Further, in the plurality of inclined portions 2582c, the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2582c extends outward in the front-rear direction at intervals so that the game ball B can flow from the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2582c. It is provided.

Further, the right passage member 2582 extends from the upper end of each inclined portion 2582c to the upper side of the upper inclined portion 2582c with the standing wall portion 2582d and from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2582d to the upper side of the inclined portion 2582c. It has a top wall portion 2582e that is exposed.
The top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the inclined portion 2582c on the upper side of the inclined portion 2582c on which the standing wall portion 2582d stands. Further, the top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2582c of the upper inclined portion 2582c, and forms a gap with the further upper inclined portion 2582c. ..

Further, the right passage member 2582 includes a plurality of second protruding portions 2582f projecting to the right from a portion between the vertically separated inclined portions 2582c on the side wall portion 2582a, and the inclined portion 2582c on the side wall portion 2581a. It has a plurality of second projecting piece portions 2582g protruding to the right from the portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2582d. The second projecting piece portion 2582g is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction of the inclined portion 2582c, and has a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined portion 2582c and having a triangular shape having a tapered tip. It is formed. The second projecting piece portion 2582g extends vertically and its lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2582c, and the upper end is inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the right passage member 2582, the uppermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, and the front end forms the lower side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b. Further, the lowermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the front end is lowered, and is located behind the front end of the upper inclined portion 2582c, forming the lower side of the exit of the second guide passage 2580b. doing. Further, the lowermost top wall portion 2582e does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2582d. The right passage member 2582 of the present embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2582c.

The passage closing plate 2583 includes a flat side wall portion 2583a that closes the second guide passage 2580b that is open to the right, and a plurality of positions that protrude to the left from the left-facing surface of the side wall portion 2583a. It has two protrusions 2583b. Two of the plurality of second protrusions 2583b are provided in one inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 with the second protrusion 2582f in between in the front-rear direction when assembled into the ball guidance unit 2580. In the second protrusion 2583b, the upstream side of the second protrusion 2582f protrudes to the left in a triangular shape, and the downstream side of the second protrusion 2582f has an inclined upstream end and extends downstream to the vicinity of the standing wall portion 2582d. It protrudes to the left in the trapezoidal shape.

In the ball guidance unit 2580 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first guidance passage 2580a through the right first guidance passage 2541 of the right guidance passage group 2540, it is moved backward by the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581. Roll towards. Above the inclined portion 2581b, a first protruding portion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protruding portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 project from the right so as to be in front of and behind the first protruding portion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the first protruding portion 2582b, then guided to the right by the next first protruding portion 2581e, and further guided to the left by the next first protruding portion 2582b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2581b.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2581b along the vertical wall portion 2581c onto the lower inclined portion 2581b. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the first protruding portion 2582b is guided to the right by the first projecting piece portion 2581f protruding to the right and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2581b. To do. As a result, the game ball B does not flow vertically from the upper inclined portion 2581b to the lower inclined portion 2581b.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the lower inclined portion 2581b rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2581b. Also above the inclined portion 2581b, the first protruding portion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protruding portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right so as to be in front of and behind the first protruding portion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the first protrusion 2581f on the rear side is guided to the left by the first protrusion 2582b, and then guided to the right by the next first protrusion 2581e. Then, it is further guided to the left by the next first protruding portion 2582b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2581b. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2581b, it is guided to the right by the first projecting piece portion 2581f on the front side and further flows down onto the inclined portion 2581b on the lower side, and exits from the first induction passage 2580a. The movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated until.

Further, in the ball guidance unit 2580, when the game ball B enters the second guidance passage 2580b through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540, it is directed backward by the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582. Roll. In the second guide passage 2580b as well, the game ball B flows down while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction as in the case of the first guide passage 2580a described above. More specifically, a second protruding portion 2582f protrudes from the left above the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, and a second passage closing plate 2583 from the right so as to be in front of and behind the second protruding portion 2582f. Two protruding portions 2583b are projected. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the second protruding portion 2583b, then guided to the right by the next second protruding portion 2582f, and further guided to the left by the next second protruding portion 2583b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2582c.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2582c along the vertical wall portion 2582d onto the lower inclined portion 2582c. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the second protruding portion 2583b is guided to the right by the second projecting piece portion 2582g protruding to the right and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2582c. To do. As a result, the game ball B does not flow vertically from the upper inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the lower inclined portion 2582c rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2582c. Also above the inclined portion 2582c, the second protruding portion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protruding portions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protrude from the right so as to be in front of and behind the second protruding portion 2582f. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the second protruding piece portion 2582g on the rear side is guided to the left by the second protruding portion 2583b, and then guided to the right by the next second protruding portion 2582f. Then, it is further guided to the left by the next second protruding portion 2583b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2582c. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2582c, it is guided to the right by the second projecting piece portion 2582g on the front side and further flows down on the inclined portion 2582c on the lower side, and exits the second induction passage 2580b. The movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated until.

As described above, according to the ball guidance unit 2580 of the present embodiment, the game ball B passing through the right guide passage group 2540 is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and then released downward. Therefore, the residence time (flow time) of the game ball B at the same height is lengthened as compared with the case where the game ball B is allowed to flow down vertically or through a spiral passage. Can be done. As a result, the distribution speed of the game ball B becomes relatively slow, so that the game ball B can be easily seen by the player, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since the game ball B is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, the game ball B is compared with the case where the game ball B is made to flow down by the spiral passage. However, since the movement of the game ball B is complicated, the movement of the game ball B, which has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machines, can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since the left side surface faces the frame of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B in the ball guidance unit 2580 can be seen in the front-rear direction by looking through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to visually recognize the distribution while meandering in a good state, and it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, so that the same action and effect as the above-mentioned specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be obtained. More specifically, for example, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 (for example, "" "Small hit" lottery), the second big winning opening 2007 of the second attacker part 2560 provided below the ball guidance unit 2580 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be accepted (for example). , Small hit rush), the player operates the game ball B so that the game ball B reaches the second big prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second big prize opening 2007 can be accepted. Will be done. At this time, even if the game ball B is to be driven at that timing, the ball guidance unit 2580 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second prize opening 2007. It is possible to make it difficult to take the timing of hitting the game ball B. As a result, it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that the player can be entertained by arousing the rewardingness of the game, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since a gap is formed between the inclined portion 2581b and the top wall portion 2581d and between the inclined portion 2582c and the top wall portion 2582e, the first guide passage 2580a and the first guide passage 2580a and the first (Ii) When a ball clogging occurs inside the guide passage 2580b, the ball clogging can be eliminated by inserting a thin rod-shaped member through the gap.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, the left passage member 2581, the right passage member 2582, and the passage closing plate 2583 form the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B. Compared with the case where a passage is formed by using a plurality of obstacle nails N, the flow path is not deformed (deformation of the obstacle nail N) due to the circulation of the game ball B, and the game ball B is guided in a stable state. can do.

[8-2. Center right front plate]
The center right front plate 2590 of the game board 5A is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape, and covers the front from the vicinity of the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560 so as to cover the front of the center accessory 2500. It is attached to the front end on the right outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 in the above. The center right front plate 2590 covers the front of the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (including the ball guidance unit 2580).

The center right front plate 2590 penetrates back and forth at the lower part, and has a plurality of first accommodating portions 2590a in which the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N are accommodated, and one obstacle nail N penetrating the front and rear. It has a second accommodating portion 2590b in which the head is accommodating, and a peeling hole 2590c penetrating the front and rear.

In the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b, the panel plate of the game panel 1100 whose front surface is exposed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560. The heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in 1110 are accommodated.

The first accommodating portion 2590a is constant with respect to a peripheral line that surrounds and is in contact with the heads of a plurality of accommodating (not shown, but in the present embodiment, two or three) obstacle nails N. It is provided in the shape of an elongated hole forming a gap between the two. As a result, the center of the first accommodating portion 2590a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstacle nail N. The second accommodating portion 2590b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. The first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b correspond to the respective obstacle nails N planted between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560. It is provided at the site.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b. It is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an external impact or the like, and it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow. The ball B can be distributed in a stable state, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b of the center right front plate 2590, on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to reduce the time and effort required for maintenance of the obstacle nail N.

The peeling hole 2590c of the center right front plate 2590 is provided in the mounting boss for mounting the center right front plate 2590 to the main body of the center accessory 2500, and is provided coaxially with the mounting hole of the mounting boss. When a sticker for decoration or protection is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the peeling hole 2590c is inserted with a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side with the sticker attached. By pressing the seal forward from the rear with the rod-shaped member, a part of the seal can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2590. Then, the operator can easily remove (peel off) the seal from the center right front plate 2590 by pulling the rolled portion of the seal. As a result, workability such as re-sticking work at the time of manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal can be improved.

Since the peeling hole 2590c is provided at the portion of the mounting boss, an attempt is made to insert a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the portion where the game ball B is distributed through the peeling hole 2590c. However, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the rear side is closed by the mounting screw, so that it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being inserted, and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed.

If a sticker is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the peeling hole 2590c can be made difficult to see from the front, and the deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2590c can be suppressed, and the player can use the sticker. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2590c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2590c.

Further, if a sticker is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the seal attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590 provides the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590a. Since the front side of the portion 2590b can be closed, the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the sticker is attached, when the obstacle nail N whose head is housed in the first storage part 2590a and the second storage part 2590b is bent through the seal, the trace remains on the sticker. It is possible to make it easier to notice the defect of the obstacle nail N.

[9. Third Embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5B of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. FIG. 174 is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. FIG. 175 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the front component, the game panel, and the panel decorative substrate in the game board of FIG. 174 are assembled, and FIG. 175 (b) is a front view of the front component in the game board of FIG. 174. It is a perspective view seen from the back in a state where the game panel and the panel decorative board are assembled. FIG. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the front component, the game panel, and the panel decorative substrate in the game board of FIG. 174 as viewed from the front in a disassembled state, and FIG. 177 is a front component, the game panel in the game board of FIG. 174. , And is an exploded perspective view seen from the back in a state where the panel decorative substrate is disassembled. In FIG. 174, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is shown with a shading.

In the game board 5B of the third embodiment, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white and opaque, and the front surface of the panel board 1110A is provided with a predetermined pattern (not shown). The configuration is the same as that of the game board 5 of the first embodiment, except that the front sheet 1130 is attached and the panel decorative substrate 1140 is provided behind the panel plate 1110A. Detailed description of the constituent parts will be omitted.

The game board 5B has a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a rear end of the game area 5a that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100, a front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a flat plate-shaped panel decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 1141 capable of irradiating light from the rear are mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. It includes a substrate 1140.

The front component 1000 is the same as the front component 1000 of the game board 5 of the first embodiment. The front component 1000 is transparently formed.

The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110A whose outer circumference is formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the rear side of the front component 1000 which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110A. It is composed of a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the back unit and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A. The panel plate 1110A of the present embodiment is formed in a white opaque form having translucency. Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed to be transparent.

[9-1. Game panel of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, the game panel 1100 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. The game panel 1100 of the game board 5B has a white opaque flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110A having a slightly larger outer circumference than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and having translucency, and a panel plate. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer circumference of the 1110A and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The plate thickness of the panel plate 1110A is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that.

The panel plate 1110A is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the portion corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110A is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110A in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Since the panel plate 1110A is milky white and opaque, as shown in FIG. 174, the inside of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A in the back unit 3000 or the like provided behind the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is removed. The part cannot be visually recognized from the front (player side).

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is opaque in a white color having translucency, the back front peripheral decorative body 3201, the back upper front decorative body 3310, and the back lower front decorative body of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear are provided. When a decorative body such as 3410 is light-emittingly decorated, light from the rear is transmitted through the panel plate 1110A so that the player can visually recognize the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body and the light-emitting color of the decorative body is transmitted as it is. It can be made to show the player a colorful light emission effect.

Since the front component 1000 is transparently formed at a portion of the panel plate 1110A that overlaps the front component 1000 in the front-rear direction, the panel plate 1110A can be visually recognized from the front through the front component 1000 (FIG. 174). reference).

Further, the panel plate 1110A has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and rear, and the upper edge and the lower edge are separated from each other in the left-right direction, so that the plate thickness is thin. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions 1114 and (see FIG. 176). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion 1114 is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw 1125 or the engaging piece 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

In the panel plate 1110A, the large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset upward from the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is the left side and the left side excluding the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

In this panel plate 1110A, in addition to the opening 1112 and the positioning hole 1113, a nail hole for planting an obstacle nail N (not shown), a screw hole for attaching a table unit 2000 such as a center accessory 2500, etc. A plurality of 1116s, positioning holes 1117, and the like are formed. The nail hole, screw hole 1116, and positioning hole 1117 penetrate the panel plate 1110A and the front sheet 1130 in the front-rear direction.

More specifically, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 in the present embodiment includes a main body portion 1151 having light transmittance and a specific part 1152 having light transmittance and different in light transmittance from the main body portion 1151. Have. In the panel plate 1110A, the main part 1151 and the specific part 1152 are integrally formed of the same material, and the light transmittance of the specific part 1152 is made different by making the thickness thinner than the main part 1151. There is.

The specific portion 1152 is provided behind a characteristic portion of the front sheet 1130 in a pattern (not shown). The specific portion 1152 is formed by a blind hole-shaped recess 1115 that is recessed in a columnar shape from the rear surface of the main body portion 1151 to the front, and the front surface is located on the same surface as the front surface of the main body portion 1151. , The rear surface is located in front of the rear surface of the main body 1151 (see FIG. 178).

A plurality of specific portions 1152 of the present embodiment are provided at a portion of the guidance region 2710 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the game panel 1100A is arranged. Specifically, it is provided at the site of the first induction region 2711 in the induction region 2710. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decorative substrate 1140 are made to emit light, the rear side of the induction region 2710 can be made to emit light, and the first induction region 2711 can be made to shine brightly by the plurality of specific portions 1152.

The thickness of the specific portion 1152 is within the range of 10% to 80% of the thickness of the main portion 1151. The reason why the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is within the above range is that when the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is thinner than the above range, the strength of the portion of the specific portion 1152 in the panel plate 1110A is lowered. This is because there is a risk that the specific portion 1152 may be uneven due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, or may be damaged due to the circulation or collision of the game ball B. Further, if the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is thicker than the above range, the light transmittance approaches the light transmittance of the main portion 1151, so that even if the rear LED 1141 is made to emit light, the brightness is the same as that of the main portion 1151. This is because there is a risk that the effect of the light emitting effect produced by the specific unit 1152 cannot be fully exerted.

The specific portion 1152 is provided on the panel plate 1110A so as to avoid the obstacle nail N. That is, the specific portion 1152 is provided at a portion where the obstacle nail N is not planted. It is desirable that the specific portion 1152 is provided at a portion (for example, 1 mm or more) away from the portion where the obstacle nail N is planted. As a result, since the specific portion 1152, which is thinner than the main portion 1151, is provided so as to avoid the portion where the obstacle nail N is planted, the portion around the root of the obstacle nail N in the main portion 1151 becomes thin. By making the root depth of the obstacle nail N relatively shallow, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the holding strength of the obstacle nail N.

The panel plate 1110A of the present embodiment is formed of milky white high-impact polystyrene (HIPS) as a white system. This HIPS is significantly cheaper than the acrylic resin commonly used for transparent game boards. Further, in the present embodiment, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is 20% of the thickness of the main body portion 1151, and the diameter of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152 is the thickness of the main body portion 1151. It is set to 40% of the diameter. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, since the thickness of the main body portion 1151 is 10 mm, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is 2 mm, and the diameter of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 is 4 mm.

As the opacity having translucency in the panel plate 1110A, it is desirable that the light transmittance is 2% to 80% and the haze value is 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it becomes difficult to illuminate and decorate with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it becomes difficult to obtain it as an opaque material. Further, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the member provided at the rear are easily recognized, and there is a possibility that the effect of concealment cannot be sufficiently obtained.

Further, although the panel plate 1110A is milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2 / 0.5)) as a white system, "white Munsell value (N 9.5)" and "munsell color Munsell value (2.5Y)" are used. 9.2 / 0.5) ”,“ Unflower color Munsell value (10Y 9/1) ”,“ Natural color Munsell value (10YR 9/1) ”,“ Lead white Munsell value (N 9) ”,“ Oyster "White Munsell value (5GY 8.5 / 0.3)", "Gray white Munsell value (10YR 9 / 0.5)", "White indigo Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2 / 1.3)", " Secret color Munsell value (2B 8.5 / 2) ”,“ Ivory color Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5 / 1.5) ”,“ Cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5 / 3.5) ”, It may be white, such as "Sakura-colored Munsell value (10RP 9 / 2.5)".

Further, although the panel plate 1110A is made of high impact polystyrene (HIPS), "polystyrene", "acrylic resin", "polycarbonate", "acetal resin", "vinyl chloride", "polyethylene terephthalate", " It may be formed of "polyethylene", "polypropylene", "glass", or the like. Further, although the panel plate 1110A is white depending on the color of the material (high impact polystyrene (HIPS)), it may be white by adding a colorant to the transparent material.

In the panel plate 1110A, an opening 1112, a positioning hole 1113, and the like are formed by cutting with the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the flat plate-shaped base material. More specifically, in the panel plate 1110A, first, the front sheet 1130 is attached to one surface of the flat plate-shaped base material. Subsequently, using an NC router processing machine or the like, the positioning hole 1113, the positioning hole 1117, and the screw hole 1116 penetrating from the surface side (front side) to which the front sheet 1130 of the base material is attached are used. , The engaging step portion 1114, which is recessed from the front side, and the like are processed. Next, the opening 1112 and the specific portion 1152 are processed from the surface side (back surface side) to which the front sheet 1130 of the base material is not attached. Finally, the panel plate 1110A is completed by processing a nail hole (inclined nail bottom hole) for planting the obstacle nail N from the surface side. Then, using a planting machine, the obstacle nail N is planted in the nail hole.

By the way, when cutting is performed using an end mill or the like with an NC router processing machine or the like, the cutting chips are discharged to the base end side of the end mill, so that the cutting target is from the tip end side to the base end side of the end mill. The force acts in the direction toward. Therefore, when cutting is performed by an end mill from the surface side to which the front sheet 1130 is attached, cutting chips are discharged to the side opposite to the base material (panel plate 1110A) and a force acts on the front sheet 1130. Therefore, the front sheet 1130 is likely to be rolled up from the base material, and burrs are likely to be generated on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the penetrating opening 1112 is cut from the back surface side by an end mill, cutting chips are discharged to the base metal side and a force acts on the front sheet 1130. However, when a force acts on the front sheet 1130 in a direction in which it comes into close contact with the base material, the front sheet 1130 is less likely to be peeled off, and the shearing force on the front sheet 1130 is increased, so that burrs on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130 are generated. It can be made difficult to occur and can be made to look good.

Since the specific portion 1152 is processed at the timing of processing the opening 1112, it is not necessary to bother to change the setup of the base material for processing the specific portion 1152, and the processing time is slightly increased. The specific portion 1152 can be processed, and the increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

By the way, in the cutting process (drilling process) of a circular through hole such as a part of the position determination hole 1113, a nail hole, a screw hole 1116, and a position determination hole 1117, a drill is used. When cutting with a drill from the back side of the 1130 to which it is not attached, a strong force acts on the front sheet 1130 in the direction opposite to the base material when the hole penetrates, so that the cut end face of the front sheet 1130 It is easy for the vicinity to be rolled up from the base metal and burrs to be generated on the cutting end face. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, cutting (drilling) of a part of the positioning hole 1113, the nail hole, the screw hole 1116, the positioning hole 1117, etc. is performed from the surface side. It is possible to make it difficult for burrs to occur on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130, and it is possible to improve the appearance.

The positioning hole 1113 and the engaging step portion 1114 are processed from the surface side, but when assembled on the game board 5B, they are located outside the game area 5a and can be visually recognized from the player side. Since it is difficult, the appearance does not deteriorate even if some burrs are generated on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130. Further, in the nail hole and the screw hole 1116, the obstacle nail N, the screw, etc. are inserted from the surface side, so even if a burr is generated on the cutting end surface of the front sheet 1130, the burr is the obstacle nail N, the screw, etc. As a result, it is pushed into the hole and the appearance is not deteriorated. Further, since the panel plate 1110A is opaque, even if burrs on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130 are pushed into the holes, the opaque panel plate 1110A makes it invisible from the outside, and the appearance is improved. Can be done.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110A and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110A (about 20 mm in the present embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1127 (see FIG. 176) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110A and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through-hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface to the front. The upper portion of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008 (see FIGS. 175 (b) and 177).

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion 1127 and a plurality of protruding pins 1124 projecting forward from the holding step portion 1127 and each of which is inserted into a plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110A. A plurality of engaging claws 1125 that elastically engage with the engaging step portion 1114 of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110A, and the panel protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion 1127. It comprises a pair of engaging pieces 1126 that engage with each of the two engaging steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110.

The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step portion 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110A with the engaging piece 1126 from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 to the rear to move the upper part and the lower left side. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion 1114 of the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125, the panel plate 1110A can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion 1127. At this time, the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110A is positioned with respect to the panel holder 1120.

In the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in front is made opaque in white, the end face of the opening 1112 to which the center accessory 2500 or the like is attached. Is white. Therefore, as compared with the case where plywood is used for the game panel, the end face of the opening 1112 can be made inconspicuous, and the end face can be beautifully finished, the end face can be decorated, and the center accessory attached to the opening 1112 can be used. There is no need to hide the end face with 2500 or the like, and the cost for the game panel 1100 can be reduced. Further, even if the center accessory 2500 or the like attached to the opening 1112 is formed of a transparent material, the end face of the opening 1112 is not conspicuous, so that the center accessory 2500 or the like can be transparently formed of the material.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made opaque in white, a white decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided on the end face of the opening 1112 to which the center accessory 2500 is attached. The decorative substrate can be made to appear as if it is integrated with the end face of the opening 1112, the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous, and the LED of the decorative substrate can be made to emit light to make the panel plate 1110A. It is possible to make it emit light or to make the center side of the center accessory 2500 emit light.

[9-2. Front sheet of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, the front sheet 1130 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described. The front sheet 1130 is attached to the entire front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 178 and the like). The front sheet 1130 is formed of a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm and having excellent wear resistance. Although not shown, the front sheet 1130 is printed with a predetermined pattern. The front sheet 1130 is formed so that a part of the pattern shines brightly through the panel plate 1110A by causing the LED 1141 of the panel decorative substrate 1140 to emit light.

Although not shown, the design of the front sheet 1130 has a characteristic portion, and a specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is provided behind the characteristic portion. As a result, the characteristic portion of the pattern can be made to shine brighter than the other portions via the specific portion 1152.

The front sheet 1130 (picture) may have a transparent portion, an opaque and translucent portion, or a translucent portion. You may. For example, in the front sheet 1130, if the portion corresponding to the specific portion 1152 is surrounded by a translucent (low translucent) portion, the contrast of appearance can be increased and the specific portion 1152 It is possible to make the part corresponding to the above shine brighter.

As the material of the front sheet 1130 in the present embodiment, "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", " Examples thereof include "polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "impact resistant polystyrene resin", and "polyvinyl chloride".

The front sheet 1130 is machined together with the base material in a state of being attached to the base material of the panel plate 1110A before processing.

According to the front sheet 1130 of the present embodiment, since the front sheet 1130 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, the front sheet 1130 can protect the panel plate 1110A from the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to use an inexpensive material having low wear resistance as the material of the panel plate 1110A, and it is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[9-3. Panel decorative board of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, the panel decorative substrate 1140 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. The panel decorative substrate 1140 is provided behind the portion of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged, that is, the portion where the guidance region 2710 is provided in the front. The panel decorative substrate 1140 is provided with white solder resist on the front surface and the rear surface, and the front surface and the rear surface are formed in white. A plurality of LEDs 1141 are mounted on the front surface of the panel decorative substrate 1140. The plurality of LEDs 1141 are composed of a first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A and a second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151.

The plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decorative substrate 1140 are high-brightness full-color LEDs. The first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152 may be a narrow-angle LED having a narrow irradiation range, and the second LED 1141b located behind the main unit 1151 may be a wide-angle LED having a wide irradiation range. ..

Although not shown, a connector for connection, a 24-bit LED driver for causing a plurality of LEDs 1141 to emit light, and the like are provided on the rear surface of the panel decorative substrate 1140.

When the second LED 1141b is made to emit light, the panel decorative substrate 1140 can make the portion behind the second induction region 2712 in the main body 1151 of the panel plate 1110A brightly emit light, and when the first LED 1141a is made to emit light, the panel plate 1110A is made to emit light. The portion behind the first lead region 2711 in the above can be made to emit light so as to shine brighter than the second lead region 2712 via the specific portion 1152.

[9-4. Light emission effect by the game panel and the panel decorative board of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, the light emitting effect by the game panel 1100 and the panel decorative substrate 1140 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 schematically shows the relationship between the game panel and the panel decorative board, and FIG. 178 (a1) is an explanatory view seen from the front with the LED of the panel decorative board turned off. (A2) is an explanatory view showing (a1) in a cross section, (b1) in (b) is an explanatory view seen from the front with the LED of the panel decorative substrate lit, and (b2) is (b2). It is explanatory drawing which shows b1) in the cross section. In FIG. 178, for convenience, the color of the white (milky white) material of the panel plate 1110A is dark gray, the amount of light is indicated by the shade, and the pattern of the front sheet 1130 is omitted.

In the game board 5B of the present embodiment, the translucent front sheet 1130 is attached to the front surface of the translucent white (milky white in this case) opaque panel plate 1110A, and the panel plate is attached. Behind the 1110A, a panel decorative substrate 1140 on which a plurality of LEDs 1141 are mounted on the front surface is provided. The panel plate 1110A is composed of a main body portion 1151 having a predetermined thickness and a plurality of specific parts 1152 having a thickness thinner than that of the main body portion 1151. The specific portion 1152 is formed by processing a blind hole-shaped recess 1115 in the main portion 1151 (panel plate 1110A) so as to be recessed in a columnar shape from the rear surface to the front. Therefore, the front surface of the specific portion 1152 is on the same surface as the front surface of the main body portion 1151.

The panel decorative substrate 1140 is coated with a white solder resist on the front surface and the rear surface. The plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decorative substrate 1140 are composed of a second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151 of the panel plate 1110A and a first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152.

In the normal state in which the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decorative substrate 1140 are not emitted from the game board 5B, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), the entire front surface of the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) has uniform brightness. Therefore, the specific portion 1152 and the panel decorative substrate 1140 provided at the rear are invisible from the front player side.

Since the entire interior of the panel plate 1110A is uniformly opaque, the amount of light is attenuated (decreased) as the light incident from the rear surface goes forward. In the panel plate 1110A, the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 are made of the same opaque material, and the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is different from the thickness of the main body portion 1151, so that the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1151 and the specific portion are made of the same material. The amount of attenuation of the amount of light from the front surface to the front is different between 1152 and 1152, and the light transmittance of the specific portion 1152 and the light transmittance of the main portion 1151 are different.

When a plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decorative substrate 1140 are made to emit light from this normal state according to the progress of the game, the light emitted forward from the LEDs 1141 is directed to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A (main unit 1151 and specific unit 1152). It will be irradiated and incident on the inside having translucency.

The light radiated forward from the second LED 1141b provided behind the thick main body 1151 is incident on the inside from the rear surface of the main body 1151 while spreading in a truncated cone shape, and further before reaching the front surface. As it spreads, the amount of light is relatively greatly attenuated by the opaque material (see (b2) in FIG. 178 (b)). As a result, the portion in front of the second LED 1141b on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) has a circular shape with a relatively large diameter and emits light brighter than the other portions ((FIG. 178 (b)). b1)).

On the other hand, the light emitted forward from the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152, which is thinner than the main portion 1151, is irradiated to the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 while spreading in a truncated cone shape. However, the light spreading from the first LED 1141a is diffusely reflected on the inner surface of the recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152, and is irradiated to the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 in a state where the spread is suppressed. Therefore, in the specific portion 1152, the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is irradiated even though the distance from the rear surface to the LED 1141 (first LED 1141a) is longer than the distance from the rear surface of the main body portion 1151 to the LED 1141 (second LED 1141b). The amount of light emitted is almost the same as the amount of light emitted to the rear surface of the main body 1151.

Then, the amount of light incident on the inside from the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is attenuated (decreased) as it goes forward, but since the thickness is thin, it becomes a truncated cone shape by the time it reaches the front surface. The spread range is narrow, and the attenuation of the amount of light due to the opaque material is relatively small (see (b2) in FIG. 178 (b)). As a result, the portion in front of the first LED 1141a (specific portion 1152) on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) has a circular shape having a smaller diameter than the portion in front of the second LED 1141b, and is in front of the second LED 1141b. It emits light so as to shine brighter than the portion (see (b1) in FIG. 178 (b)). In the present embodiment, the brightness is the same as when the panel plate 1110A is made transparent, and light is emitted so that the portion of the specific portion 1152 shines brightly.

For this reason, in a pattern (not shown) of the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, a specific portion 1152 is provided behind a characteristic portion of the pattern to provide a panel decorative substrate. By emitting light from the first LED 1141a of 1140, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the characteristic portion of the pattern shines brightly. As a result, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided, and the characteristic part of the pattern shines brightly to the player. Since it is possible to suggest the arrival of an opportunity, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

Specifically, for example, a predetermined character is given as a pattern of the front sheet 1130, and a specific portion 1152 is placed behind a characteristic part (for example, eyes, teeth, scars, moles, etc.) of the character. When the light is radiated forward from the first LED 1141a behind the specific portion 1152, the characteristic portion of the character can be made to shine brightly by the specific portion 1152, which gives a strong impact to the player. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to.

According to the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a through which the game ball B circulates is provided and the front sheet 1130 having a predetermined pattern is attached to the front surface is transparent. Since it is composed of a white-based main body 1151 having a property and a specific part 1152 provided at a portion corresponding to the pattern of the front sheet 1130, which has higher light transmission than the main body 1151, the game progresses. Correspondingly, when the second LED 1141b provided behind the main body 1151 in the panel decorative substrate 1140 is made to emit light, the light from the second LED 1141b is diffused in the main body 1151 to brighten the pattern of the front sheet 1130. When the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific part 1152 is made to emit light, the amount of light traveling straight is increased because the light transmission is higher than that of the main part 1151. Since the number is increased, the part corresponding to the specific part 1152 in the pattern can be made to shine brighter than the other parts, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko machines that use plywood or transparent plates as the game panel 1100, the front sheet 1130 has a shining pattern in the game area 5a that has never been seen before. Since the pachinko machine 1 that emits light by itself with brightness can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided. Since a part of the pattern shines brightly, it is possible to suggest the arrival of an opportunity to the player, so it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and the player's game. It is possible to raise expectations for pachinko and suppress the decline in interest.

[9-5. Specific parts with different embodiments in the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, another embodiment of the specific portion 1152 of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179 to 181. FIG. 179 (a) is an explanatory view showing a part of a game panel provided with a specific portion having a different form from that of FIG. 178 in a perspective view, and FIG. 179 (b) is an explanatory view showing a part of the game panel provided with a specific portion having a different form. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part of the game panel which is provided in the perspective view, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the game panel which is provided with the specific part of the further different form in the perspective view. FIG. 180 (a) is an explanatory view showing a game panel provided with specific portions having different thicknesses in cross section together with a panel decorative substrate, and FIG. 180 (b) is provided with specific portions having a conical rear surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game panel with a panel decorative board in the cross section, (c) is the cross section of the game panel which provided the specific part which provided the light-shielding coating on the side surface of the blind hole-shaped recess together with the panel decorative board. (D) is an explanatory view showing a game panel provided with a specific portion provided with a light-shielding sleeve in a blind hole-shaped recess in a cross section together with a panel decorative substrate. FIG. 181 (a) is an explanatory view showing a game panel provided with a specific portion formed by a groove-shaped recess in a cross section together with a panel decorative substrate, and FIG. 181 (b) is provided with a substrate accommodating recess for accommodating the panel decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game panel together with a panel decorative substrate in the cross section, (c) is a panel decoration of the game panel which is provided with the specific part which filled the blind hole-shaped concave part from the rear surface of a game panel with a transparent material. It is explanatory drawing which shows in the cross section together with the substrate, (d) is the explanation which shows the game panel which is provided with the specific part filled with the transparent material in the blind hole-shaped concave part from the front surface of the game panel, together with the panel decorative substrate in the cross section. It is a figure.

First, in the embodiment of FIG. 179 (a), in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), the specific portion 1152 is formed by the triangular columnar blind hole-shaped recess 1115 formed in the main portion 1151. In this embodiment, the rear surface (front view shape) of the specific portion 1152 is triangular. As a result, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative substrate 1140 provided at the rear is made to emit light, the portion of the specific portion 1152 in the panel plate 1110A can be made to emit light so as to shine brightly in a triangular shape.

Further, in the embodiment of FIG. 179 (b), in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), the specific portion 1152 is formed by the recess 1115 of the star-shaped columnar blind hole formed in the main portion 1151. In this embodiment, the rear surface (front view shape) of the specific portion 1152 is star-shaped. As a result, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative substrate 1140 provided at the rear is made to emit light, the portion of the specific portion 1152 in the panel plate 1110A can be made to emit light so as to shine brightly in a star shape.

In the embodiments of FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is shown to be triangular or star-shaped, but the shape is not limited to this, and is "elliptical" or "quadrangle". , "Pentagon", "Hexagon", "Polygon", "Heart", "Indeterminate form", "Shape of predetermined character or item", "Shape of characters such as logo", etc. may be used.

Further, in the embodiment of FIG. 179 (c), in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), the specific portion 1152 is formed by the hexagonal tubular blind hole-shaped recess 1115 formed in the main portion 1151. In other words, the specific portion 1152 is formed by a groove-shaped recess 1115 having a constant width extending along the outer circumference of the hexagon. In this embodiment, the rear surface (front view shape) of the specific portion 1152 is an annular hexagon. As a result, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative substrate 1140 provided at the rear is made to emit light, the portion of the specific portion 1152 in the panel plate 1110A can be made to emit light so as to shine brightly in an annular hexagon. The number of first LEDs 1141a may be one for one specific portion 1152 (recessed portion 1115), or a plurality of first LEDs 1141a may be provided depending on the size and shape of the specific portion 1152.

In the embodiment of FIG. 179 (c), the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is shown to be an annular hexagon, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, and is "annular circular" or "annular ellipse". , "Circular Triangle", "Circular Rectangle", "Circular Pentagon", "Circular Polygon", "Circular Star", "Circular Heart", "Circular Indefinite", "Predetermined It may be "the shape of the outer circumference of a character or an item", "the shape of the outer circumference of a character such as a logo", or the like.

Further, in the embodiment of FIG. 179 (c), the specific portion 1152 formed by extending a groove having a constant width in an annular shape is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the groove is extended linearly or curvedly. The specific portion 1152 may be formed by the formed groove.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 179, since the specific portion 1152 has various shapes, the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative substrate 1140 is made to emit light according to the progress of the game, so that the front surface of the game panel 1100 (front sheet 1130) is emitted. The portion in front of the specific portion 1152 in the above can be made to shine brightly with the same shape as the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152. As a result, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to attract the player's interest strongly, and to make the player think that there is something good. , It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Specifically, for example, the front sheet 1130 is provided with a pattern of a predetermined character, and the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is provided with a groove shape along the outer circumference of the character to form a specific portion 1152, and the rear panel is formed. When the first LED 1141a of the decorative substrate 1140 is made to emit light, the outer circumference of the character can be made to shine brightly, and the player can be shown a light emitting effect that can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Subsequently, in the embodiment of FIG. 180A, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is made different in one panel plate 1110A. As a result, the thicker the specific portion 1152, the lower the light transmittance. Therefore, even if the first LED 1141a provided at the rear emits light with the same brightness, the thicker the specific portion 1152, the lower the brightness of the front surface of the specific portion 1152. Get dark. Therefore, since the front surface of the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) emits light with various brightnesses, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of light emission effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. ..

Further, when the specific portion 1152 is formed by cutting, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed only by changing the cutting program. Alternatively, when the specific portion 1152 (game panel 1100) is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed by simply changing the amount of protrusion of the core pin or mandrel for forming the specific portion 1152. Can be done. Therefore, since the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed, it is possible to easily respond to a design change or a model change, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. At the same time, it is possible to easily provide the specific portion 1152 having a higher effect of effect, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

In the embodiment of FIG. 180 (b), the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is formed in a conical shape so that the center is the thinnest. As a result, the center of the specific portion 1152 becomes the thinnest. Therefore, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative substrate 1140 is made to emit light, a light emitting effect is produced so that the center shines brightest in the portion in front of the specific portion 1152 in the panel plate 1110A. It can be shown to the player.

Further, since the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is conical, the decrease in strength of the panel plate 1110A due to the formation of the recess 1115 is suppressed as compared with the case where the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is reduced as a whole. be able to. As a result, the specific portion 1152 can be made to shine brighter while maintaining the strength of the panel plate 1110A. Further, since the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is conical, it can be easily machined by a drill having a conical tip, and an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the embodiment of FIG. 180 (b), the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is shown as a cone whose center is located in the front, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cone is such that the center is located in the rear. It may be shaped like a cone, and can be made to shine in an annular shape by the light from the first LED 1141a.

Further, the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 may be a "pyramid shape", a "relief shape imitating a character, an item, a logo, etc.", a "geometric pattern shape", or the like. If the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is shaped like a relief or a geometric pattern, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 will differ depending on the portion so as to follow the shape of the rear surface. By being different, the light from the first LED 1141a makes it possible to see the light with light and shade along the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 in the portion in front of the specific portion 1152 in the panel plate 1110A (front sheet). A predetermined character, pattern, or the like can be projected on the front surface of 1130), and it is possible to provide a light emitting effect that can strongly attract the interest of the player.

In the embodiment of FIG. 180 (c), a light-shielding coating film 1153 is provided on the side surface of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152. The coating film 1153 is formed by applying a paint having a high light-shielding property and attaching a film or a metal foil having a high light-shielding property. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 180 (d), a light-shielding sleeve 1154 is provided (inserted) in the blind hole-shaped recess 1115. The sleeve 1154 is made of a synthetic resin having a high light-shielding property, paper, wood, metal, or the like. The sleeve 1154 is attached to the recess 1115 by press fitting or adhesion. Alternatively, the sleeve 1154 is provided by insert molding or two-color molding when the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) is injection-molded.

According to the embodiments of FIGS. 180 (c) and 180 (d), when the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative substrate 1140 provided behind the specific portion 1152 is made to emit light, the specific portion in the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) is emitted. Since only the portion in front of the 1152 can be brightly lit, the decorative effect and the effect of the effect due to the brilliance of the portion can be surely exhibited, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be provided.

More specifically, in the panel plate 1110A, the side surface of the recess 1115 forming the specific portion 1152 is provided behind the specific portion 1152 because it is formed by the main body portion 1151 having translucency. When the light from the first LED 1141a is irradiated to the side surface of the recess 1115, a part of the irradiated light is incident on the main body 1151, and the light incident on the main body 1151 causes the panel plate 1110A. The portion around the specific portion 1152 in the main portion 1151 of the above shines brightly. Therefore, when the periphery of the specific portion 1152 in the main portion 1151 shines together with the specific portion 1152, the shape of the specific portion 1152 becomes unclear, or the portion of the design of the front sheet 1130 that does not correspond to the specific portion 1152 emits light. Or, there is a risk that the effect of emitting light emitted by the specific unit 1152 will be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the coating film 1153 and the sleeve 1154 having a high light-shielding property are provided on the side surface of the recess 1115 forming the specific portion 1152, light is incident on the main portion 1151 from the side surface. Can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the portion around the specific portion 1152 in the main portion 1151 from shining due to the light from the first LED 1141a behind the specific portion 1152, and it is possible to make only the specific portion 1152 shine brightly. It is possible to reliably exert the effect of the brilliance of the specific portion 1152, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

The coating film 1153 and the sleeve 1154 may have high light reflectance. As a result, the light from the first LED 1141a can be diffusely reflected by the inner surface of the coating film 1153 and the sleeve 1154 to be guided (guided) forward, so that the light emitted from the first LED 1141a to the front can be guided (guided). Most of it can be irradiated on the rear surface of the specific portion 1152, and the specific portion 1152 can be made to shine brighter.

Further, in the embodiments of FIGS. 180 (c) and 180 (d), a coating film 1153 and a sleeve 1154 are provided on the side surface of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a coating film 1153 or a sleeve 1154 may be provided on the side surface of the groove-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152.

Next, in the embodiment of FIG. 181 (a), the second LED 1141b is provided behind the main body portion 1151 between the two specific parts 1152 formed by the groove-shaped recess 1115. As a result, the portion (range a) of the specific portion 1152 can be made to shine brightly by the light emission of the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152, and the portion (range a) of the specific portion 1152 is sandwiched between the specific portions 1152 in the main portion 1151. By emitting light from the second LED 1141b provided behind the part (range b), only the part (range b) sandwiched by the specific part 1152 can be made to shine brightly, and the boundary between light and dark is clear. The light emission effect can be shown to the player.

More specifically, in the panel plate 1110A, since the main body 1151 has translucency, when the light from the second LED 1141b provided at the rear is incident on the inside from the rear surface of the main body 1151, the light is said. Will also diffuse in the direction along the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, but if the panel plate 1110A has a recess 1115 that is recessed in a groove shape in order to form the specific portion 1152, the recess 1115 causes light. The light is not diffused to the main portion 1151 side on the opposite side beyond the portion of the specific portion 1152. Therefore, in FIG. 181 (a), when the second LED 1141b is made to emit light, only the portion (range b) sandwiched by the specific portion 1152 can be made to emit light brightly, which is outside the specific portion 1152. The part can be darkened.

Therefore, for example, if the specific portion 1152 formed by the groove is provided along the outer periphery of a characteristic character or the like in the pattern of the front sheet 1130, the panel decorative substrate 1140 provided behind the character is the first. (2) The light from the LED 1141b can make only the character emit bright light while the part outside the character is darkened, and the light from the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152 causes the outer periphery of the character to emit light. You can make it shine. As a result, the character can be made to stand out, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and by appropriately setting the light emission patterns of the first LED 1141a and the second LED 1141b, the player can produce a variety of light emission effects. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be shown to the player and entertains the player.

In the embodiment of FIG. 181 (b), a substrate accommodating recess 1155 recessed forward is provided on the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), and the panel decorative substrate 1140 is accommodated in the substrate accommodating recess 1155. It was done. As a result, the rear surface of the panel decorative substrate 1140 can be positioned in front of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A, so that it is possible to easily secure a space behind the panel plate 1110A, and the decorative body of the back unit 3000 can be easily secured. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a production having a higher effect by making the above relatively large.

Further, by accommodating the panel decorative substrate 1140 in the substrate accommodating recess 1155, the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152 can be brought closer to the rear surface of the specific portion 1152, so that the specific portion 1152 can be further moved. It can make it shine brightly.

In the embodiments of FIGS. 181 (c) and 181 (d), recesses 1115 such as blind holes and grooves for forming the specific portion 1152 are filled with a transparent filling portion 1156. The filling portion 1156 may be provided with the filling portion 1156 having the same shape as the recess 1115 by press fitting or adhesion after the specific portion 1152 is formed by the recess 1115. Alternatively, when the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) is injection-molded, the filling portion 1156 may be provided by insert molding or two-color molding. According to the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110A can be made to have a constant thickness by the filling portion 1156, and the strength and rigidity of the panel plate 1110A are reduced as compared with the case where the hollow recess 1115 is formed. It can be suppressed.

More specifically, in the embodiment of FIG. 181 (d), the front surface of the specific portion 1152 is positioned behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, and the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is located on the same surface as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A. The filling portion 1156 is filled in a recess 1115 such as a blind hole or a groove in front of the specific portion 1152 so that the front surface of the filling portion 1156 and the front surface of the panel plate 1110A are on the same surface. As a result, the surface of the panel plate 1110A can be made a flat surface without unevenness, the front sheet 1130 can be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A in a good state, and the surface on which the game ball B is distributed can be distributed. Can be a flat surface.

In the panel plate 1110A, the front surface of the specific portion 1152 may be positioned behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, and the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 may be positioned in front of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A. That is, a specific portion 1152 thinner than the main portion 1151 may be provided at an intermediate portion in the thickness of the panel plate 1110A (main portion 1151). In this case, it is desirable to fill at least the portion in front of the specific portion 1152 with the filling portion 1156 so that the front surface of the filling portion 1156 and the front surface of the panel plate 1110A are on the same surface. As a result, the front surface of the panel plate 1110A can be flattened, and the front sheet 1130 can be attached in a good state without floating.

[9-6. Game panels with different embodiments in the game board of the third embodiment]
Subsequently, in the game board 5B of the third embodiment, the game panels 1100A having different embodiments will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 182 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a game panel having a varying plate thickness and a panel decorative substrate, and FIG. 182 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship different from that of (a). FIG. 182 shows a portion where the plate thickness of the game panel 1100A is changed. The game panel 1100A of the present embodiment has a main body portion 1151 having a predetermined thickness and a specific part 1152 whose light transmittance is enhanced by being thinner than the main body portion 1151. Behind the game panel 1100A, a first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152 and a second LED 1141b (not shown in FIG. 182) located behind the main body portion 1151 are mounted on the front surface. A panel decorative substrate 1140 is provided.

In the game panel 1100A of the present embodiment, the plate thickness of the portion where the plurality of obstacle nails N are planted (for example, the portion where the game region 5a is provided in front) is increased, and the plate thickness of the other portions is decreased. ing. As a result, in the game panel 1100A, the weight can be reduced while maintaining the holding strength of the obstacle nail N. Further, by forming the gaming panel 1100A of the present embodiment by injection molding, the amount of synthetic resin applied to the gaming panel 1100A can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire gaming panel 1100A is formed with a constant thickness. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In the embodiment of FIG. 182 (a), the panel decorative substrate 1140 is extended to the rear of the portion where the plate thickness of the game panel 1100A is changed, and the plate decorative substrate 1140 is extended to the rear of the portion where the plate thickness is changed. An LED 1141c capable of irradiating light forward is provided. As a result, when the LED 1141c is made to emit light, the portion in front of the portion where the plate thickness is changed on the front surface of the game panel 1100A is emitted so as to become brighter toward the left on the paper surface. That is, the light from the LED 1141c can cause the peripheral edge of the game area 5a to emit light in a ring shape so as to become brighter toward the outside. For this reason, in this embodiment, the portion of the game panel 1100A where the plate thickness is changed is designated as a type of the specific portion 1152.

In the embodiment of FIG. 182 (a), the portion where the plate thickness is changed is defined as the peripheral portion of the game area 5a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the center accessory 2500 or the like can be attached. The plate thickness may be changed by slanting the end surface of the opening 1112 penetrating the front and rear, and the LED 1141c may be provided behind the plate thickness.

In the embodiment of FIG. 182 (b), the portion where the plate thickness of the game panel 1100A changes in the direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100A outside the portion where the plate thickness of the game panel 1100A changes. A second panel decorative substrate 1145 on which an LED 1146 capable of irradiating light is mounted is provided. As a result, when the LED 1146 is made to emit light, the portion where the plate thickness is changed is irradiated with light toward the front surface of the game panel 1100A, and the light incident on the inside of the game panel 1100A from the portion is emitted. By diffusing, the portion in front of the portion where the plate thickness of the game panel 1100A is changed and the portion inside the portion can be made to emit light darker than that of the embodiment of FIG. 182 (a). Therefore, for example, when the portion where the plate thickness is changed is the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, the light from the LED 1146 can emit light in an annular shape from the peripheral edge of the game area 5a inward with a constant width.

[9-7. Features of the game board of the third embodiment]
Subsequently, the main features of the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177 and the like. As described above, the game board 5B of the third embodiment includes a transparent front component 1000, a game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and provided with a game area 5a in the front, and a game panel 1100. It includes a front sheet 1130 which is attached to the front surface and has a predetermined pattern, and a panel decorative substrate 1140 which can irradiate the game panel 1100 with light from the rear.

The game panel 1100 holds a white opaque flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110A in which a game area 5a is provided in the front and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted, and a panel plate 1110A that can be detachably attached from the front. It is composed of a transparent frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. The panel plate 1110A has a main body portion 1151 having light transmittance and a specific part 1152 having higher light transmittance than the main body portion 1151. The specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is provided behind a characteristic portion of the front sheet 1130 in a pattern (not shown).

The panel decorative substrate 1140 is provided at a position in the front-rear direction between the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A and the rear surface of the panel holder 1120. The surface (front surface and rear surface) of the panel decorative substrate 1140 is formed in white. A plurality of LEDs 1141 capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface of the panel decorative substrate 1140. The plurality of LEDs 1141 are composed of a first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A and a second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151.

According to the game board 5B of the present embodiment, according to the progress of the game (for example, according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005). When the second LED 1141b provided behind the main body portion 1151 of the panel plate 1110A in the panel decorative substrate 1140 is made to emit light, the light from the second LED 1141b is diffused in the main body portion 1151 to brighten the pattern of the front sheet 1130. It is possible to make it appear as if it is self-luminous, and when the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152 is made to emit light, the amount of light traveling straight is higher than that of the main portion 1151. Therefore, the part corresponding to the specific part 1152 in the pattern can be made to shine brighter than the other parts, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Therefore, compared to the conventional pachinko machine 1 that uses plywood or a transparent plate as the game panel, the design of the front sheet 1130 shines, and the inside of the game area 5a that has never been seen before is various. Since the pachinko machine 1 that emits light by itself with a bright brightness can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided. , A part of the pattern shines brightly, which can suggest the arrival of an opportunity to the player, so it can make the player think that there is something good, and the player's It is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Specifically, for example, a predetermined character is given as a pattern of the front sheet 1130, and a specific portion 1152 is placed behind a characteristic part (for example, eyes, teeth, scars, moles, etc.) of the character. When the specific portion 1152 is provided, when light is irradiated from the rear to the front of the specific portion 1152, the characteristic portion of the character can be made to shine brightly by the specific portion 1152, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. , It can strongly attract the player's interest, and at the same time, it can make the player think that there is something good, raise the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

Further, since the front sheet 1130 having a pattern is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A and the panel plate 1110A (main unit 1151) is recessed from the rear to form the specific portion 1152, the game is played. The specific portion 1152 of the panel 1100 is made invisible from the front. As a result, until the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is irradiated with light by the light emission of the LED 1141 provided on the panel decorative substrate 1140 and the main unit 1151 and the specific unit 1152 shine with different brightness, the light emission effect is executed. Can make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the specific portion 1152, so that the player can be surprised by increasing the impact of executing the light emitting effect (light emitting decoration) of the game panel 1100. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game by making the player think that there is something good about it.

Further, since the main body portion 1151 of the panel plate 1110A is opaque in white and the specific portion 1152 is invisible from the front, the color of the front surface of the panel plate 1110A is uniform in white, so that the gaming area 5a The inside can be made to look bright, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily seen, and the decorative body (for example, the starting port unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500) provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be easily seen. Since the color of the table unit 2000), etc. can be made relatively conspicuous, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be strongly exerted, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Pachinko machine 1 can be provided. Further, as described above, since the front surface of the panel plate 1110A has a uniform white color, the color development of the pattern applied to the front sheet 1130 can be improved, and the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 can be surely exhibited. be able to.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is white and opaque, and the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decorative substrate 1140 are full-color LEDs, the emission color of the LED 1141 is changed according to the progress of the game, so that the panel plate 1110A is the main body. It is possible to make the part 1151 and the specific part 1152 emit light in various colors, and it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect of various colors, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and the light emitting color makes it possible for the player to emit light. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the player, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white and opaque, the inside of the game area 5a provided in front can be made to appear bright, and the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily seen. At the same time, the color of the decoration of the front unit 2000 provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be made relatively conspicuous, so that the decoration effect of the decoration can be strongly exerted and the player's interest is strong. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be attracted. Further, as described above, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white, it is possible to improve the color development of the pattern of the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface, and the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 is ensured. Can be demonstrated.

Further, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is made thinner than the main portion 1151 to have different light transmittances, a recess such as a blind hole or a groove is provided with respect to the main portion 1151. By forming 1115 and making the thickness different, the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittance can be easily provided. As a result, the specific portion 1152 can be made of the same material as the main portion 1151, and the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) is applied as compared with the case where the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittance is inserted into the main portion 1151. The cost can be reduced.

Further, in the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittance is provided by forming the concave portion 1115 with respect to the main portion 1151 to have different thicknesses, and the specific portion 1152 is the main body. Since the same material as the portion 1151, the cost required for the game panel 1100 can be reduced as compared with the case where specific portions having different light transmittances are inserted into the main portion. Further, since the specific portion 1152 is formed by cutting, it is possible to easily change the thickness (light transmittance), shape, and position of the specific portion 1152 simply by changing the cutting program. , It is possible to easily respond to design changes and model changes, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to easily provide a specific portion 1152 having a higher effect of effect. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a person.

Further, when the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is formed by cutting, a nail hole (prepared hole) for planting an obstacle nail N in the panel plate 1110A and a center accessory in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A). It is possible to cut the opening 1112, etc. that penetrates the front and back for mounting the front unit 2000 such as 2500 and the lower right unit 2400 at the timing of cutting. As a result, it is not necessary to bother to perform setup change in order to cut the specific portion 1152, and the specific portion 1152 can be processed with a slight increase in processing time, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. be able to.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is made opaque in white, it is planted in the panel plate 1110A even if the front sheet 1130 has a transparent portion as compared with the case where the panel plate is transparent. The roots of the plurality of obstacle nails N (the portion inserted in the panel plate 1110A) can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is made opaque in white, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3201 and the back lower front effect unit 3400 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) are provided. It is possible to make a part of the front decoration body 3410 under the back invisible from the front (player side). Then, when the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 or the like provided behind the panel plate 1110A is light-emittingly decorated, the light from the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 or the like is transmitted forward through the translucent panel plate 1110A. Therefore, the panel plate 1110A can be partially luminescent and decorated, and the player can be made aware of the presence of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 and the like provided at the rear. At this time, since the panel plate 1110A is white, when the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 or the like provided behind the panel plate 1110A is light-emittingly decorated, the light-emitting color can be transmitted forward. It is possible to entertain the player with a colorful light-emitting effect, and it is possible to present a variety of light-emitting effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white and opaque, a part of the back lower front decorative body 3410 of the back lower front effect unit 3400 provided behind the panel plate 1110A is forward (player). Since it can be made invisible from the side), when the back lower front decoration body 3410 is raised to a portion behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110A, the back lower front decoration body is passed through the opening 1112. The entire 3410 can be visually recognized from the front, and the player can be shown a movable effect in which a part of the back lower front decorative body 3410 is hidden or the entire 3410 can be seen. It can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is white and opaque and the surface of the rear panel decorative substrate 1140 is white, the panel decorative substrate 1140 can be made difficult to see through the panel plate 1110A, and the game panel 1100 ( It is possible to prevent the appearance of the game area 5a from being deteriorated, and the white panel decorative substrate 1140 can reflect the light from the LED 1141 and the panel plate 1110A side forward, so that the panel plate 1110A (front sheet) can be prevented from being deteriorated. 1130) can be made to emit light brighter.

Further, the panel plate 1110A is made of opaque material (synthetic resin), and the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A protects the panel plate 1110A from the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a. Therefore, as compared with the case where the panel plate 1110A is made transparent, an inexpensive synthetic resin (here, high impact polystyrene) having a low grade such as abrasion resistance is used as the material of the panel plate 1110A. This makes it possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is white and opaque and the front sheet 1130 is provided with a pattern, the front surface of the panel plate 1110A can be easily focused when the player looks inside the game area 5a. Just by looking at the panel board 1110A, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is naturally focused. At this time, as described above, the panel plate 1110A (main unit 1151 and specific unit 1152) is in a state of self-luminous light due to the light from the LED 1141 of the panel decorative substrate 1140. Since the circulating game ball B can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear, it is possible to make it easier to see the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a, and the movement of the game ball B can be seen. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is thinner than the main portion 1151, when the second LED 1141b of the panel decorative substrate 1140 provided behind the main portion 1151 emits light, it diffuses in the main portion 1151. The light from the second LED 1141b is blocked from being diffused by the portion recessed to form the specific portion 1152, and it is possible to emit light only in the portion in front of the second LED 1141b in the main portion 1151. Become. Therefore, for example, when an annular groove is formed in the main body portion 1151 and the groove portion is designated as the specific portion 1152, the second portion provided behind the inner portion of the annular specific portion 1152 in the main body portion 1151. When the LED 1141b is made to emit light, only the portion inside the specific portion 1152 can be made to emit light brightly, and the portion outside the specific portion 1152 can be made dark. That is, depending on the shape of the specific portion 1152 and the arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decorative substrate 1140, it is possible to make only an arbitrary portion of the main portion 1151 emit light, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of executing a wider variety of light emission effects. Can be provided.

Further, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is thinner than the main portion 1151, it is specified when the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 has a three-dimensional relief shape imitating a predetermined character, item, logo, or the like. Since the thickness of the portion 1152 differs so as to follow the shape of the rear surface, when the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152 in the panel decorative substrate 1140 is made to emit light, the light is transmitted by the portion of the specific portion 1152. Due to the different degrees, when viewed from the front (player side), light with shading along the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 can be seen, and the light emitted from the first LED 1141a on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A determines a predetermined value. It is possible to project a character or the like, and to provide a light emitting effect that can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is formed by being recessed from the rear surface of the main body portion 1151, the front surface of the specific portion 1152 is on the same surface as the front surface of the main body portion 1151. The game ball B can be smoothly distributed in the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the front component 1000 is transparent, the portion of the front component 1000 that overlaps the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 in the front-rear direction is also a pattern of the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A. In addition to being able to decorate the panel plate 1110A, the light emission of the panel plate 1110A can be shown to the player. In other words, since the front component 1000 is transparent, the entire panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider range can be decorated (see FIG. 174).

Further, since the panel plate 1110A in the game panel 1100 is opaque, it is possible to eliminate the need for a process for hiding the wiring or the like behind the panel plate 1110A. That is, in the transparent panel board, in order to improve the appearance, it is necessary to hide the wiring and the like behind the panel board. However, in the present embodiment, since the panel board 1110A is opaque, it is behind the panel board 1110A. There is no need to hide the wiring etc. As a result, compared to the case where the game panel (panel board) is made transparent, a member for hiding the wiring etc. behind the panel board 1110A is separately provided, and the wiring etc. is devised so as to be difficult to see. There is no need to do this, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is provided with a plurality of recesses 1115, the weight of the panel plate 1110A can be reduced by the plurality of recesses 1115, and the game board 5 can be reduced in weight. In addition to the light emitting effect due to the difference in light transmittance as described above, the panel plate 1110A may be provided with a lightweight recess 1115 to further reduce the weight of the game board 5 (panel plate 1110A). be able to.

In the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is composed of the panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1100 is composed of one member. May be.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110A obtained by cutting a flat plate-shaped base material is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an injection-molded panel plate 1110A (game panel 1100) may be used. By injection molding the panel plate 1110A, it is possible to form a specific portion 1152 having a complicated shape or a sharp shape that cannot be obtained by cutting. Further, by using insert molding or two-color molding (multicolor molding) for molding the panel plate 1110A, the specific portion 1152 can be made of a material having a different light transmittance from the main portion 1151, and the sleeve 1154 and the filling portion 1156 can be formed. It can be formed integrally.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 1151 (panel plate 1110A) is recessed to have different thicknesses to form the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittances, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the specific portion 1152 may be formed of a material having a light transmittance different from that of the main portion 1151. Specifically, for example, a material having a light transmittance different from that of the main body 1151 is provided so as to penetrate the main body 1151 (insert, press-fit, inject, insert molding, two-color molding, etc.). The specific portion 1152 may be formed accordingly.

When the game panel 1100 (including the panel plate 1110A) is formed by injection molding, the main portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittances can be integrally formed at the same time. Further, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, a transparent material can be insert-molded or multicolor-molded in a portion (recessed portion 1115) forming a specific portion 1152 having a thickness thinner than that of the main portion 1151. The thickness of the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 can be made the same, and by eliminating the recessed portion, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the strength and rigidity of the game panel 1100. Further, in this case, since the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 have the same thickness, the obstacle nail N can be planted in the specific portion 1152 as well, and the degree of freedom in arranging the specific portion 1152 is increased. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be enhanced and has a higher decorative effect and directing effect.

Further, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the amount of protrusion of the core pin or mandrel into the cavity for forming a recessed portion (recessed portion 1115) by the specific portion 1152, which is thinner than the main portion 1151 is changed. The thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be changed, and the light transmittance of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed.

Further, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, a finer shape or a sharper shape is formed with respect to the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152, the shape of the front view of the specific portion 1152, etc., as compared with the cutting process. be able to. Therefore, the specific portion 1152 that can further enhance the effect of the effect can be provided, the player can be entertained, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided. Can be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, a white opaque panel plate 1110A is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel plate 1110A (game panel 1100) is "a predetermined color (for example, red)". , Blue, yellow, mixed color, etc.) opaque (colored opaque), or "colorless or colored transparent". The opaque panel plate 1110A includes "the whole including the inside is opaque", "a part of the inside is opaque", "the inside is transparent and at least one surface is opaque", and "translucency". Molded with opaque synthetic resin with properties ”,“ A transparent plate and an opaque plate with translucency bonded together ”,“ Translucency on at least one surface of the transparent plate "Those with an opaque film (cell) attached", "Those with a transparent plate back surface treated with UV curable ink", "Those with a transparent plate back surface sandblasted", etc. Can be mentioned. In addition, as colored ones, "red-based ones", "blue-based ones", "yellow-based ones", and "mixed-colored ones (multiple specific colors are mixed into a single color)". , "Multicolored ones (one in which each color is dispersed in a state such as a mottled pattern, a striped pattern, a polka dot pattern, a geometric pattern, etc.)", and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, the specific unit 1152 has a higher light transmittance than the main unit 1151, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific unit 1152 has a lower light transmittance than the main unit 1151. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 1151 of the panel plate 1110A is shown to be opaque, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main body portion 1151 may be transparent. In this case, since the light transmittance does not change significantly even if the thickness of the main body portion 1151 is changed, the specific portion 1152 having a different light transmittance from the main body portion 1151 depending on the color or material is provided. As a result, the specific portion 1152 can be made to appear to be floating in the air with respect to the transparent main portion 1151, and the inside of the game area 5a can be decorated by the shape of the specific portion 1152. At this time, when the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) is irradiated with light, the specific portion 1152 that appears to float in the air emits light so as to self-emit, so that the player's interest in the specific portion 1152 is strong. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be attracted and has a high appeal to the player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel decorative substrate 1140 is provided behind the panel plate 1110A to irradiate the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A with light, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel plate 1110A is not limited to this. A decorative substrate may be provided on the outside of the side surface or the end surface to irradiate the side surface or the end surface of the panel plate 1110A with light.

In the above embodiment and the embodiment described later, the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110A, the panel plate 1110B, etc. of the game panel 1100 in which the obstacle nail N is planted are made of resin regardless of whether they are transparent or opaque (milky white). As compared with the case where a plywood such as a veneer is used for the game panel, the accuracy of the interval between the planted obstacle nails N is good and the change over time is small.

[10. Fourth Embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5C of the fourth embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is an exploded perspective view of the panel plate, the rear surface sheet, and the panel decorative substrate in the game board of the fourth embodiment as viewed from the front by disassembling them. In the game board 5C of the fourth embodiment, the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made opaque to a white color having translucency, and the rear surface sheet 1160 having a predetermined pattern on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B is used. A panel decorative substrate 1170 on which a plurality of LEDs 1171 capable of irradiating light from the rear to the front of the rear sheet 1160 are mounted on the front surface is provided. Other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed description of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

The panel plate 1110B has the same shape as the game panel 1100 and the game panel 1100A described above, and is held in a frame-shaped transparent panel holder 1120 detachably from the front, and has a transparent front configuration via the panel holder 1120. It is attached to the rear side of the member 1000.

The panel plate 1110B of the present embodiment is formed of milky white high-impact polystyrene (HIPS) as a white system.

As the opacity having translucency in the panel plate 1110B, it is desirable that the light transmittance is 2% to 80% and the haze value is 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it becomes difficult to illuminate and decorate with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it becomes difficult to obtain it as an opaque material. Further, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the member provided at the rear are easily recognized, and there is a possibility that the effect of concealment cannot be sufficiently obtained.

Further, although the panel plate 1110B is milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2 / 0.5)) as a white system, "white Munsell value (N 9.5)" and "munsell color Munsell value (2.5Y)" are used. 9.2 / 0.5) ”,“ Unflower color Munsell value (10Y 9/1) ”,“ Natural color Munsell value (10YR 9/1) ”,“ Lead white Munsell value (N 9) ”,“ Oyster "White Munsell value (5GY 8.5 / 0.3)", "Gray white Munsell value (10YR 9 / 0.5)", "White indigo Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2 / 1.3)", " Secret color Munsell value (2B 8.5 / 2) ”,“ Ivory color Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5 / 1.5) ”,“ Cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5 / 3.5) ”, It may be white, such as "Sakura-colored Munsell value (10RP 9 / 2.5)".

Further, although the panel plate 1110B is made of high impact polystyrene (HIPS), "polystyrene", "acrylic resin", "polycarbonate", "acetal resin", "vinyl chloride", "polyethylene terephthalate", " It may be formed of "polyethylene", "polypropylene", "glass", or the like. Further, although the panel plate 1110A is white depending on the color of the material (high impact polystyrene (HIPS)), it may be white by adding a colorant to the transparent material.

The opaque panel plate 1110B includes "the whole including the inside is opaque", "a part of the inside is opaque", "the inside is transparent and at least one surface is opaque", and "translucency". Molded with opaque synthetic resin with properties ”,“ A transparent plate and an opaque plate with translucency bonded together ”,“ Translucency on at least one surface of the transparent plate "Those with an opaque film (cell) attached", "Those with a transparent plate back surface treated with UV curable ink", "Those with a transparent plate back surface sandblasted", etc. May be.

Further, a front sheet having excellent wear resistance may be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B as in the game board 5B of the third embodiment. The front sheet attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B may or may not have a pattern. As a result, the panel plate 1110B can be protected from the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a by the front sheet. Therefore, as a material of the panel plate 1110B, an inexpensive synthetic resin having a low grade such as wear resistance (here). , High-impact polystyrene) can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

The rear sheet 1160 is attached to the entire rear surface of the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100. The rear sheet 1160 is formed of a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm. Although not shown, the rear sheet 1160 is printed with a predetermined pattern having translucency. The rear sheet 1160 can project a pattern on the white opaque panel plate 1110B by causing the LED 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 to emit light.

The rear sheet 1160 (picture) may have a transparent portion, or may have a translucent portion other than the front of the panel decorative substrate 1170.

As the material of the rear sheet 1160 in the present embodiment, "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", " Examples thereof include "polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "impact resistant polystyrene resin", and "polyvinyl chloride".

The panel decorative substrate 1170 is provided behind two locations in the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100, a portion between the gate 2002 and the side upper left unit 2300, and a portion where the guidance region 2710 is provided in the front. .. The panel decorative substrate 1170 is provided with white solder resist on the front surface and the rear surface, and the front surface and the rear surface are formed in white. A plurality of LEDs 1171 are mounted on the front surface of the panel decorative substrate 1170. The plurality of LEDs 1171 are high-brightness full-color LEDs.

Although not shown, the rear surface of the panel decorative substrate 1170 is provided with a connector for connection, a 24-bit LED driver for causing a plurality of LEDs 1171 to emit light, and the like.

In the game board 5C of the present embodiment, in a normal state in which a plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative board 1170 are not emitted, the entire front surface of the panel board 1110B is white with uniform brightness, and the front (player). From the side), the design of the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decorative substrate 1170 provided at the rear are invisible.

When a plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 are made to emit light from this normal state according to the progress of the game, the light is emitted forward through the rear surface sheet 1160 and the panel plate 1110B. At this time, since the rear sheet 1160 is provided with a predetermined pattern, the pattern is projected on the white opaque panel plate 1110B by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171, and the player is asked. The design of the rear sheet 1160 can be made visible.

As described above, according to the game board 5C of the fourth embodiment, a special lottery result is drawn according to the progress of the game (for example, by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005). By causing the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 to emit light, the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 can be projected on the panel plate 1110B, so that the pattern is projected on the rear surface of the game area 5a in which the game ball B is distributed. By doing so, it is possible to show the game area 5a in which the pattern emerges in the rear, which has never been seen in conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and the player. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of the player and has a high appeal to the player.

In addition, since the pattern is projected on the panel board 1110B according to the progress of the game, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it raises the expectation for the game and is a hobby. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 is used to project (project) the translucent pattern of the rear sheet 1160 onto the panel plate 1110B. Since the light transmittance can be different depending on the color, ink (paint), etc., the main part 1151 and the specific part 1152 of the panel plate 1110A in the game board 5B of the third embodiment are made according to the pattern of the rear sheet 1160. Can be given the same function as. More specifically, in the rear sheet 1160, for example, by increasing the light transmittance of the portion of the pattern and decreasing the light transmittance of the portion other than the pattern, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 causes other than the pattern. The part of the pattern can be made to shine brightly, and the part of the pattern can be made to shine brightly. Therefore, the game board 5C of the present embodiment can also exhibit the same effects as the game board 5B of the third embodiment as described above.

Further, since the panel plate 1110B is white and the surface of the panel decorative substrate 1170 provided behind the panel plate 1110B is formed white, the color of the panel decorative substrate 1170 is the same as the color of the panel plate 1110B. It can be assimilated so that it cannot be seen from the front, and it is possible to prevent the player from noticing the presence of the panel decorative substrate 1170 and thus the rear sheet 1160 (the pattern). Then, when the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 are made to emit light, the shadow of the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 is projected on the panel plate 1110B, so that the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 can be seen through the panel plate 1110B, so that the existence can be predicted. By noticing the existence of the rear sheet 1160 (picture) that was not available, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can be strongly reminded that an opportunity has arrived. It can be shown to the player, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, since the rear surface sheet 1160 is formed of a sheet material, the rear surface sheet 1160 can be relatively lightened, and an increase in the weight of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Further, since the rear sheet 1160 is formed flat and is provided so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, the space required for arranging the rear sheet 1160 in the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5C) in the front-rear direction is provided. Since it can be made as small as possible, it is easy to secure a space for arranging other members (for example, an effect device, an effect display device, etc.) relatively behind the panel plate 1110B (rear surface sheet 1160). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of showing a player a wider variety of effects.

In the above embodiment, the rear surface sheet 1160 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rear surface sheet 1160 is provided behind the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 can be seen through the panel plate 1110B, and the impact of the appearance of the pattern when the pattern is projected by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170. Can be further enhanced.

Further, in the above embodiment, the rear surface sheet 1160 is provided on the entire surface of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rear surface sheet 1160 is provided on a part of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B. May be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 is set to be translucent, and the light transmitted through the pattern is projected onto the panel plate 1110B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern is opaque. As a sex, the shadow of the pattern may be projected on the panel board 1110B.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one provided with the panel decorative substrate 1170 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting decorative body of the back unit 3000 provided behind the rear sheet 1160 (for example,). , The back front peripheral decorative body 3201 and the back lower front decorative body 3410), the effect display device 1600, and the like may be used to project the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 onto the panel plate 1110B.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one provided with the rear surface sheet 1160 and the panel decorative substrate 1170 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the rear surface sheet 1160 and the panel decorative substrate 1170, the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B is provided. The panel board 1110B may be projected with a light-emitting decorative body or an effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided in the panel. More specifically, the translucent decorative body provided behind the panel plate 1110B is used instead of the pattern of the rear sheet 1160, and the decorative substrate on which the LED for emitting and decorating the decorative body is mounted is used as the panel. Instead of the decorative substrate 1170. Alternatively, the liquid crystal panel for displaying the effect image on the effect display device 1600 is used instead of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160, and the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the panel decorative substrate 1170 are used. As a result, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained, and by moving the decorative body or making the effect image into a moving image, the pattern projected on the panel board 1110B moves, and the light emission is more effective. The production can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110B is shown to be white, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel plate 1110B may have a color. Colored items include "red", "blue", "yellow", "mixed (mixed with multiple specific colors to make a single color)", and " Multicolored ones (one in which each color is dispersed in a state such as a mottled pattern, a striped pattern, a polka dot pattern, a geometric pattern, etc.) ", and the like can be mentioned.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel decorative substrate 1170 is provided behind the panel plate 1110B to irradiate the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B (rear surface sheet 1160) with light, but the present invention is not limited to this. , A decorative substrate may be provided on the outside of the side surface or end surface of the panel plate 1110B to irradiate the side surface or end surface of the panel plate 1110B with light.

Further, in the above embodiment, the front sheet 1130 may be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B. At this time, the front sheet 1130 may be provided with a predetermined pattern corresponding to the pattern of the rear sheet 1160. Specifically, for example, if the shadow of the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 due to the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 is projected on the portion excluding the characteristic portion of the pattern of the front sheet 1130. In the state where the LED1171 is not emitted, the pattern of the front sheet 1130 can be shown with the same brightness as a whole, and when the LED1171 is emitted according to the progress of the game, the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 by the light from the LED1171 is displayed. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of brightening (shining) a characteristic portion of the pattern of the front sheet 1130 by the shadow and strongly attracting the attention of the player. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 is provided between the panel plate 1110B and the panel decorative substrate 1170, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel plate 1110B and the panel decorative substrate 1170 are used. In between, a projectile that can be moved or deformed according to the progress of the game may be provided. As a result, the shadow of the projectile projected on the game panel 1100B by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 can be moved or deformed, which can greatly surprise the player. , It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) that is advantageous to the player may occur, raise the expectation of the player, and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

Further, the above-mentioned projectile can be moved according to the progress of the game between a retracted position that cannot be seen from the front by the panel plate 1110B and an appearance position that can be seen from the front through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110B. You may try to do it. As a result, when the projectile is in the retracted position, it cannot be seen from the front due to the opaque panel plate 1110B. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 are not emitted, the projectile is projected onto the panel plate 1110B. Since the shadow of is not projected, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the projectile. In this state, if the LED 1171 is made to emit light according to the progress of the game, the shadow of the projectile is projected on the panel plate 1110B by the light from the LED 1171. The shadow of the projection body can be shown to the player, the player can be made to indirectly recognize the existence of the projection body, and the shadow of the projection body is projected on the panel plate 1110B to make the player. It can be astonishing and can attract the attention of the player. Then, when the projecting body is moved to an appearance position that can be seen from the front through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110B according to the progress of the game, the projecting body becomes directly visible through the opening 1112, which greatly enhances the player. It can be astonishing, can have a strong impact on the player, and strongly reminds the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) may occur. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, as described above, when the projectile is moved between the retracted position and the appearance position, the panel due to the shadow of the projected object projected on the panel plate 1110B by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 at the retracted position. The decoration mode of the plate 1110B may be different from the decoration mode of the projection body itself (for example, the pattern applied to the projection body). Specifically, for example, when the outer shape of the projection body is the shape of the initial form of a predetermined character and the pattern of the final form of the character is applied to the front surface of the projection body, the LED 1171 is displayed at the retracted position. Since the initial form of the character is projected onto the panel plate 1110B by the light, the player can be made to recognize the existence of the projection body (decorative body) of the character in the initial form. Then, when the projectile is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position according to the progress of the game, the character in the final form appears, contrary to the expectation that the character in the initial form appears. It is possible to give a strong impact, and it is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player will occur, and at the same time, it is possible to raise the expectation for the game, and the player is entertained and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the shadow of the pattern of the flat plate-shaped rear sheet 1160 is projected onto the panel plate 1110B by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the rear sheet 1160, a three-dimensionally formed projection body may be provided so that the shadow of the projection body is projected on the panel plate 1110B. In this case, if the three-dimensional projection body is made translucent, the shadow of the projection body projected on the panel plate 1110B by the light from the LED 1171 will have shades, and the decoration of the projection body will be shown to the player. It can attract the attention of the player strongly.

Further, when the sheet material is made into a three-dimensional shape by air forming or vacuum forming, the projection body can be made lighter than the apparent size. Then, if the projectile is made movable according to the progress of the game, the projectile can be moved even with a small force (energy). Therefore, a drive motor, a solenoid, or the like for moving the projectile is used. A small drive source having a small output can be used, the space required for driving can be relatively small, and an inexpensive drive source can be used. Further, since the projection body can be made lighter, the projection body can be supported by a support mechanism having a relatively low rigidity, and the support mechanism of the projection body can be easily miniaturized (space saving). The support mechanism can be inexpensive. For this reason, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members, and by arranging the other members, it is possible to show and entertain the player with a wider variety of effects, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. Such cost can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the game board 5C, the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in which the game ball B is circulated is made into an opaque white system having translucency. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a can be made to appear bright, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily seen, and the LED and the effect display device 1600 provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be used. When the panel plate 1110B is irradiated with light, light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from another pachinko machine, etc., the light is diffused in the panel plate 1110B. Therefore, the panel plate 1110B can be made to appear to be dimly lit and self-luminous. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko machines that use plywood or transparent plates as the game panel 1100, it is possible to show the player the pachinko machine 1 that emits light in the game area 5a, which has never been seen before. Therefore, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, since the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is opaque with translucency, the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 provided behind the panel plate 1110B (rear surface sheet 1160) are not emitted. In the state (normal state), the rear sheet 1160 (projector) and the panel decorative substrate 1170 are invisible from the front due to the opaque panel plate 1110B, and the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decorative substrate 1170 are invisible to the player. It can make it difficult to notice its existence. When the LED 1171 is made to emit light according to the progress of the game from this normal state, the shadow of the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 is projected (projected) on the panel plate 1110B by the light from the LED 1171, so that the translucency is improved. The shadow of the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 can be visually recognized by the player through the panel plate 1110B, and the panel plate 1110B can be made to emit light so as to have light and darkness. At this time, since the panel plate 1110B is made opaque in white, the emission color of the LED 1171 and the color of the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 can be transmitted forward, and the player can enjoy the colorful emission effect. At the same time, it is possible to present a variety of light emitting effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest. In this way, since the shadow of the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 is projected behind the game area 5a, the inside of the game area 5a can be decorated by the shadow, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. It can give a strong impact to the player and can strongly attract the player's interest. In addition, since the design of the rear sheet 1160, which cannot be seen under normal conditions, can be seen by the light from the LED 1171 that emits light as the game progresses, there may be something good for the player. It can be reminded, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, as described above, the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is in a state of self-luminous light due to light from the outside or the like, or the panel plate 1110B is emitted by light from a plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170. Since the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel plate 1110B, it is distributed in the game area 5a. The game ball B can be easily visually recognized, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. Further, since the game ball B in the game area 5a can be easily visually recognized, it is possible to easily finely adjust the driving strength of the game ball B, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be performed. Pachinko machine to devise 1 You can enjoy the original game.

Further, since the rear surface sheet 1160 is formed of a sheet material, the rear surface sheet 1160 can be relatively lightened, and an increase in the weight of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Further, since the rear surface sheet 1160 is formed in a flat shape so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, the space required for arranging the rear surface sheet 1160 in the pachinko machine 1 can be made as small as possible in the front-rear direction. it can. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members (for example, an effect device, an effect display device, etc.) behind the panel plate 1110B (rear surface sheet 1160), and more various effects can be produced. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be shown and entertained by a player, and it is possible to make the rear sheet 1160 inexpensive and reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made of a translucent opaque material (synthetic resin), the grade is higher than that of the case where the panel plate 1110B (game panel 1100) is made transparent. A low synthetic resin can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the panel plate 1110B is opaque, the player can use the roots of the plurality of obstacle nails N (the portion inserted in the panel plate 1110B) to be planted in the panel plate 1110B as compared with the case where the panel plate 1110B is made transparent. It can be made invisible from the side, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

Further, since the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is white, the color of the decorative body provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be made relatively conspicuous, so that the decorative effect of the decorative body is strongly exerted. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player. Further, since the panel plate 1110B is white, when the front sheet 1130 with the pattern is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B, the color of the pattern applied to the front sheet 1130 can be improved. Therefore, the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 can be surely exhibited.

Further, by attaching the front sheet 1130 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B, the panel plate 1110B can be protected from the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a by the front sheet 1130. Therefore, as the material of the panel plate 1110B, it is possible to use an inexpensive material having a low grade such as wear resistance, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is opaque, it is possible to eliminate the need for a process for hiding the wiring or the like behind the panel plate 1110B. That is, in the transparent game panel, in order to improve the appearance, it is necessary to hide the wiring and the like behind the game panel. However, in the present embodiment, since the panel plate 1110B is opaque, it is behind the panel plate 1110B. There is no need to hide the wiring etc. As a result, compared to the case where the game panel (panel board) is made transparent, a member for hiding the wiring etc. behind the panel board 1110B is separately provided, and the wiring etc. is devised so as to be difficult to see. There is no need to do this, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[11. Detailed composition of winning openings in the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the winning opening in the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 184 to 189. FIG. 184 (a) is a plan view showing the configuration of a winning opening in the game board, and FIG. 184 (b) is a side sectional view of (a). FIG. 185 (a) is a side sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the winning opening of the present embodiment, and FIG. 185 (b) is a side sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the conventional winning opening. FIGS. 186 (a) and 186 (b) are perspective views showing a winning opening in which a guide piece portion of a different embodiment is provided in a winning opening whose ball entry direction is inclined, and FIGS. 187 (a) and 187 (b). ) Is a perspective view showing a winning opening provided with a guide piece portion of a further different embodiment, and FIGS. 188 (a) and 188 (b) show a winning opening provided with a guide piece portion of a further different embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows. FIG. 189 is a perspective view showing a conventional winning opening whose entry direction is inclined.

In the following, the relationship between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 constituting the winning opening unit 2030 having the winning opening 2015, and the guide piece portion 2035 or the guiding provided in the winning opening 2015 or the winning opening 2016. The configuration of the piece 2050 will be described in detail. The winning opening 2015 or the winning opening 2016 can be applied to the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the ordinary winning opening 2008, the sub-out opening, and the like. Further, the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 can be applied to a guide passage, a discharge passage, and the like through which the game ball B is distributed, in addition to the winning opening unit 2030.

[11-1. Relationship between upstream passage and downstream passage]
First, the relationship between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 in the winning opening unit 2030 having the winning opening 2015 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 184. Note that FIG. 184 (b) shows only the cut end face. The winning opening unit 2030 of the present embodiment has a winning opening 2015, and is an upstream passage portion capable of receiving the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a and changing the distribution direction rearward. It has 2031 and a downstream passage portion 2032 provided behind the upstream passage portion 2031 and through which the game ball B received in the winning opening 2015 can be distributed.

The upstream passage portion 2031 is a box-shaped (container-shaped) upstream main body 2031a whose upper and rear sides are open, and a rib-shaped guide piece standing upward from the center in the left-right direction of the bottom of the upstream main body 2031a. It has a part 2035 and. The upstream main body 2031a is formed in a size that allows only one game ball B to enter. The upper end surface of the guide piece 2035 is inclined so as to be highest on the front end side and lower toward the rear. The height of the rear end of the induction piece 2035 is higher than that of the upper surface of the bottom of the upstream main body 2031a.

The upper end surface (tip surface) of the guide piece portion 2035 is bent so that the inclination angle changes in the middle of the front-rear direction. More specifically, in the induction piece 2035, the front part of the bend is steeply inclined at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the part behind the bend is at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. It is gently inclined. The portion of the induction piece portion 2035 that is inclined at a steep angle (the steep piece portion 2035a) is formed in a triangular shape (generally a right-angled isosceles triangle shape) in the side view, and the distribution direction of the game ball B is changed. It is a change piece that can be changed backwards. On the other hand, the portion of the guiding piece portion 2035 that is inclined at a gentle angle (loose piece portion 2035b) is a rear piece portion that guides the game ball B rearward. Therefore, the upstream passage portion 2031 can guide the game ball B that has entered the upstream main body 2031a from above to the downstream passage portion 2032 provided in the rear by the guide piece portion 2035.

In the winning opening unit 2030 of the present embodiment, since the guide piece portion 2035 of the upstream passage portion 2031 has a shape in which a straight line having a triangular shape is bent on the side surface of the front side portion, the front portion has an arc shape. Compared with the case, the length of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 in the front-rear direction can be shortened. As a result, the guiding distance (rolling distance) until the gaming ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning opening 2015 is guided backward can be shortened as much as possible, so that the gaming ball B can be quickly introduced. It is possible to guide the game ball B to the rear, suppress the stagnation of the game ball B, and make it difficult for the ball to become clogged. At the same time, it is possible to increase the number of game balls B received per unit time to the winning opening 2015. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player more.

The downstream passage portion 2032 has a gutter-shaped downstream main body 2032a whose front-rear direction and upper side are open, and a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2032b extending from the front end of the downstream main body 2032a in the left-right direction and the downward direction. There is. The bottom of the downstream main body 2032a is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The width w1 in the left-right direction of the downstream main body 2032a is formed to be larger than the width w2 in the left-right direction inside the upstream main body 2031a of the upstream passage portion 2031 (see FIG. 184 (a)). The flange portion 2032b is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in contact with the rear surface.

By the way, when the flow path through which the game ball B flows is formed by a plurality of passage portions as in the winning opening unit 2030 of the present embodiment, the upstream passage portion 2031 on the upstream side and the downstream passage portion on the downstream side are formed. When assembled on the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) at the boundary with 2032, if the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 are set to have the same height, the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion are set. Due to manufacturing error (error or tolerance) of 2032, assembly error, etc., there is a possibility that the downstream passage portion 2032 may have a step higher than that of the upstream passage portion 2031 (also referred to as a reverse step). When a reverse step is generated between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, the game ball B stagnates due to the reverse step and causes ball clogging, or the game ball B is upstream due to the reverse step. By bouncing back to the side, the upstream passage portion 2031 may flow back and be discharged from the entrance of the upstream passage portion 2031, so that the winning may be invalidated or a problem may occur.

On the other hand, when the winning port unit 2030 of the present embodiment is assembled, the step G of the upstream passage portion 2031 is higher than that of the downstream passage portion at the boundary between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032. Is formed so that More specifically, a step 2033 (see FIG. 184 (b)) having a high upstream passage portion 2031 side can be formed between the rear end of the upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2031b and the front end of the bottom portion of the downstream main body 2032a. It is formed. As a result, a step 2033 higher in the upstream passage portion 2031 is formed between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, so that the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 can be manufactured. Even if there is an error, an assembly error, or the like, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reverse step in which the downstream passage portion 2032 side becomes higher. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as clogging of the game ball B due to the reverse step and invalidation of winning due to the backflow of the game ball B.

Incidentally, it is desirable that the height G of the step 2033 between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 is within the range of 0.5 mm to 5 mm, preferably within the range of 0.5 mm to 1 mm. The reason why the height G of the step 2033 is within this range is that if the height G of the step 2033 is smaller than the above range, the manufacturing error of each of the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 and the upstream passage portion Depending on the assembly error between 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, etc., a reverse step may occur in which the downstream main body 2032a side becomes higher, and the reverse step obstructs the distribution of the game ball B, resulting in ball clogging. This is because there is a risk that the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2015 will flow backward and be discharged from the winning opening 2015, invalidating the winning. On the other hand, if the height G of the step 2033 is larger than the above range, the game ball B from the upstream passage portion 2031 is likely to bounce significantly at the bottom of the downstream passage portion 2032, so that the game ball B is located in the downstream passage portion 2032. The upper and lower parts of the winning opening unit 2030 may be popped out from the open upper end side, or the game ball B may be violent in the downstream passage portion 2032, causing a blockage in distribution and causing ball clogging. This is because there is a risk that the dimension in the direction will be unnecessarily large. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 are composed of separate members, a remarkable effect can be expected because of the influence of mounting error and the like. Even when the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 are integrally configured, the effect of preventing the backflow of the game ball B can be expected due to the step 2033.

In the above embodiment, the steep piece portion 2035a of the induction piece portion 2035 is shown to have a triangular side surface shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an arc shape may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B circulates (rolls) at the bottom of the downstream main body 2032a of the downstream passage portion 2032, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the downstream passage portion 2032 is downstream. An induction rib (induction piece portion) that projects upward from the bottom of the main body 2032a and extends in the front-rear direction so that the rear portion is lowered and the game ball B rolls on the upper end surface may be provided. When the guide rib is provided in the downstream passage portion 2032, the front end of the guide rib is set to be lower than the rear end of the upstream passage portion 2031 (guide piece portion 2035). Further, when the guide rib is provided in the downstream passage portion 2032, the bottom portion of the downstream main body 2032a may be formed horizontally.

Further, in the above embodiment, the rear end side of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 in the upstream passage portion 2031 is shown to have a pin angle, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rear end side of the upper end surface is not limited to this. A chamfered portion such as C chamfer or R chamfer may be provided. As a result, when the upstream passage portion 2031 is plated, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged with the plating pool. More specifically, when a plating pool is formed on the rear end side of the upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2035, the plating pool also bulges upward, so that the game ball B is caught in the plating pool, resulting in a ball. There is a risk of clogging. On the other hand, by providing a chamfered portion on the rear end side, the plating (plating liquid) can be released downward to make it difficult for a plating pool to be formed, and even if a plating pool is formed, the plating pool can be formed. Can be suppressed from bulging above the upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2035, and the occurrence of ball clogging due to plating accumulation can be prevented.

Further, in the above embodiment, the downstream passage portion 2032 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the upstream passage portion 2031 is attached to the rear end side. May extend to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the downstream passage portion 2032 may be a ball guiding member (or a ball discharging member) provided behind the game panel 1100.

Further, in the above embodiment, the winning opening unit 2030 is shown by the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage are not limited to this. The unit 2032 may constitute a guide passage or a discharge passage through which the game ball B is distributed.

[11-2. Prevention of ball clogging at the winning opening]
Next, prevention of ball clogging in the winning opening 2015 (winning opening unit 2030) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 185. The winning opening unit 2030 having the winning opening 2015 of the present embodiment has the same configuration as the winning opening unit 2030 of FIG. 185, and is composed of the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032. The winning opening 2015 is opened upward so as to accept the game ball B in the game area 5a. The winning opening unit 2030 has a guiding piece portion 2035 for guiding the received game ball B to the rear. The guide piece portion 2035 is formed so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the rear, and is bent so that the inclination angle changes in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The guide piece portion 2035 is a steep piece portion 2035a in which the portion on the front side of the bend is steeply inclined at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the portion on the rear side of the bend is 5 with respect to the horizontal. It is said that the loose piece portion 2035b is gently inclined at an angle of degree. The steep piece portion 2035a in the guide piece portion 2035 is formed in a triangular shape (generally a right-angled isosceles triangle shape) in a side view, and is a changing piece portion that changes the distribution direction of the game ball B rearward. .. On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2035b in the guiding piece portion 2035 is a rear piece portion that guides the game ball B backward.

Therefore, when the game ball B enters the winning opening 2015 from above, the distribution direction is changed so that the game ball B first comes into contact with the steep piece portion 2035a of the guiding piece portion 2035 and is reflected by the inclination of the steep piece portion 2035a. It can be changed from the bottom to the back. Then, the game ball B whose distribution direction is changed to the rear by the steep piece portion 2035a is guided to the rear by the loose piece portion 2035b. As a result, the game ball B can be quickly guided backward from the entrance of the winning opening 2035.

In the winning opening unit 2030 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 185 (a), the center of the game ball B in contact with both the steep piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b of the guiding piece portion 2035 is the winning opening. The guide piece portion 2035 is formed so as to be located at a distance shorter than the length of the radius of the game ball B from the front surface to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) constituting the rear end of 2015.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), the winning opening unit 2901 having the conventional winning opening 2900 has a guiding piece portion 2902 for guiding the accepted game ball B backward. .. The guide piece portion 2902 is formed so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the rear, and is bent so that the inclination angle changes in the middle of the front-rear direction. More specifically, the induction piece portion 2902 has a steep piece portion 2902a and a loose piece portion 2902b that continues from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2902a and has a gentler inclination than the steep piece portion 2902a. There is.

In the induction piece portion 2902 of the conventional winning opening unit 2901, the center of the game ball B in contact with the sharp piece portion 2902a and the loose piece portion 2902b forms the rear end of the winning opening 2900. It is located in front of the front surface of the panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) with respect to the length of the radius of the game ball B. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), when the game ball B in contact with the steep piece portion 2902a and the loose piece portion 2902b comes into contact with the game ball B in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 from above, Due to the load from the upper game ball B, a forward force acts on the lower game ball B, and the lower game ball B cannot move backward, resulting in ball clogging (ball jam). appear. The occurrence of ball clogging at the winning opening 2900 may cause discomfort to the player and reduce the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the winning opening unit 2030 of the present embodiment, as described above, the center of the game ball B in contact with both the steep piece 2035a and the loose piece 2035b of the guide piece 2035 is the game panel. Since it is located at a distance shorter than the length of the radius of the game ball B from the front surface to the front of the 1100, the game ball B is in contact with both the steep piece 2035a and the loose piece 2035b of the guide piece 2035. When the game ball B in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 comes into contact with the game ball B from above, a rearward force acts on the lower game ball B due to the load from the upper game ball B. The lower game ball B can be moved backward by the force, and the game ball B does not stagnate on the guide piece portion 2035. Therefore, since the ball jam (ball jam) does not occur at the winning opening 2015, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the ball jam, and the player can enjoy the game. The decrease can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the downstream passage portion 2032, the flange portion 2032b does not extend to the upper side of the winning opening 2015 in the front view, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the front view, it is not limited to this. A downstream passage portion 2032 having a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2032b extending may also be provided at a portion directly above the winning opening 2015 on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In this case, the center of the game ball B in contact with both the steep piece 2035a and the loose piece 2035b of the induction piece 2035 is from the front surface to the front of the flange portion, rather than the length of the radius of the game ball B. Try to be located at a short distance.

[11-3. Detailed configuration of the winning opening with a slanted entry direction]
Next, the detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 2040 having the winning opening 2016 in which the entry direction of the game ball B is inclined with respect to the vertical will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 186 to 189 and the like. The winning opening 2016 of the present embodiment is capable of accepting the game ball B in the game area 5a. The winning opening unit 2040 extends rearward from the flat plate-shaped front plate portion 2041 provided in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and the front plate portion 2041 and is open diagonally upward and rearward. The gutter-shaped receiving portion 2042, the flat plate-shaped flange portion 2043 extending outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 and capable of contacting the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the flange portion 2043 to the receiving portion 2042 are continuous. It has a gutter-shaped rear extension portion 2044 that extends rearward as described above. In the winning opening unit 2040, the winning opening 2016 is formed by the front plate portion 2041 and the receiving portion 2042.

Further, the winning opening unit 2040 has a guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B received in the winning opening 2016 to the rear. The guiding piece portion 2050 has a changing piece portion 2051 that changes the distribution direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 to the rear, and a rear piece portion 2052 that guides the game ball B to the rear. The modified piece portion 2051 is provided so that the tip surface (upper end surface) with which the game ball B abuts is directed in a direction (parallel direction) facing the ball entry direction of the game ball B at the winning opening 2016. The rear piece 2052 is provided so that the tip surface (upper end surface) with which the game ball B abuts is directed in a direction different from the ball entry direction (including the opposite direction).

By the way, in the conventional winning opening 2910 in which the entering direction of the game ball B is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. 189, for guiding the game ball B received in the winning opening 2910 to the rear. The guide piece 2911 is erected in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the winning opening 2910 from diagonally above, the game ball B easily comes into contact with the corner side of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2911, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2911, and the like. Since a force acts on the guide piece portion 2911 in a direction different from the standing direction due to the contact of the game ball B, there is a problem that the guide piece portion 2911 is easily fatigued and damaged at an early stage. Then, when the guide piece portion 2911 is damaged, the ball is clogged due to the broken piece, and the game is obliged to be interrupted, which causes a problem that the player's interest is lowered.

On the other hand, in the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B rearward extends in a direction (parallel direction) opposite to the entering direction of the winning opening 2016. Since the modified piece portion 2051 is provided, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the modified piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner side of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, etc. Since it is possible to prevent the induction piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the contact, the broken pieces of the induction piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Subsequently, a specific embodiment of the winning opening unit 2040 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the winning opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 186 (a) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of the winning opening unit 2040 extends horizontally in the front-rear direction with the bottom surface curved in a semicircular shape, and is formed in a U-shape with an inclined front view. The guide piece portion 2050 extends upward from the lowest portion of the semicircular bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and extends in the front-rear direction from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042. The rear extending portion 2044 has a gutter shape that is open upward, and the bottom surface is curved in an arc shape having a radius larger than the radius of the arc shape bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, which is lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It is provided at the position.

The winning opening unit 2040 extends upward from the lowest portion on the bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044, and further extends the rear guiding piece portion 2045 in which the upper end surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear. Have. The rear guide piece portion 2045 is provided directly behind the guide piece portion 2050, the front end on the upper end surface is located lower than the rear end of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2050, and the front end of the rear extension portion 2044. It extends back and forth from to the rear end. As a result, in the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, a high step is formed between the guide piece portion 2050 and the rear guide piece portion 2045 on the guide piece portion 2050 side.

In this winning opening unit 2040, the front plate portion 2041, the receiving portion 2042, and the guide piece portion 2050 are integrally formed, and the flange portion 2043, the rear extension portion 2044, and the rear guide piece portion 2045 are integrally formed. The receiving portion 2042 side (upstream passage portion side) and the flange portion 2043 side (downstream passage portion side) are separate members from each other.

The guide piece portion 2050 of the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment is vertically erected upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and the portion from the front end to the rear within a predetermined range is the ball entering direction of the winning opening 2016 ( It bends in the direction (parallel direction) opposite to the direction of the arrow in the figure and extends upward. In the present embodiment, the portion of the induction piece portion 2050 that is bent and extends in the direction opposite to the ball entry direction (parallel direction) is referred to as the modified piece portion 2051, and the portion behind it is the rear piece portion. It is set to 2052.

The upper end surface of the rear piece 2052 of the induction piece 2050 is inclined from the rear end of the modified piece 2051 so as to be lower than the upper surface of the modified piece 2051 at a gentle angle, and then further inclined in the middle of the front-rear direction. It is bent so that it becomes loose. As a result, the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2050 is bent so as to have a gentle inclination in two steps from the front end side.

In the winning opening unit 2040 of FIG. 186 (a), when the game ball B enters the winning opening 2016 along the entry direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the upper end surface of the modified piece portion 2051 of the guide piece portion 2050. The flow direction of the unit is changed from the direction of entry along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the rear and downward directions, and the upper end surface of the rear piece 2052 following the rear end of the changed piece 2051 is rearward. Will be transferred to. As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning opening 2016 can be smoothly and quickly guided backward.

As described above, according to the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B rearward extends in the direction (parallel direction) opposite to the entering direction of the winning opening 2016. Since the modified piece portion 2051 is provided, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface of the modified piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner side of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, etc. Since it is possible to prevent the induction piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the contact, the broken pieces of the induction piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 186 (b) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of the winning opening unit 2040 extends horizontally in the front-rear direction with the bottom surface curved in a semicircular shape, and is formed in a U-shape with an inclined front view. The flange portion 2043 extends outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042. The bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044 is curved in a semicircular shape, and is provided at a position lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As a result, a step high on the receiving portion 2042 side is formed between the receiving portion 2042 and the rear extending portion 2044. In this embodiment, two induction pieces 2050 are provided. The winning opening unit 2040 is integrally formed as a whole.

The two guide pieces 2050 are provided on both sides of the winning opening 2016, each of which is parallel to the entry direction of the game ball B (the direction of the arrow in the drawing). The guide piece portion 2050 above the center line extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the portion in front of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and faces the ball entry direction from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It extends upward (entrance side) in the direction (parallel direction). The upper end surface of the upper guide piece portion 2050 is inclined so that the front end side becomes lower from the portion below the entrance of the winning opening 2016 (the upper end side of the front plate portion 2041) toward the rear, and the rear end is It coincides with the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. The guide piece portion 2050 is formed in a triangular shape (substantially right-angled isosceles triangle shape) on the side surface, and has only the modified piece portion 2051 that changes the distribution direction of the game ball B.

On the other hand, the guide piece portion 2050 below the center line extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the rear extension portion 2044, and is half of the receiving portion 2042 and the rear extension portion 2044. It extends vertically upward from the lowest part of the bottom surface that is curved in an arc shape, and from the middle, it bends so as to face the direction of entry (parallel direction) and extends upward (entrance side). It is out. The portion of the lower guide piece portion 2050 in the direction opposite to the ball entry direction (parallel direction) is provided at a position symmetrical to the upper guide piece portion 2050 with respect to the center line of the winning opening 2016. The upper end surface thereof is formed on the same surface as the upper end surface of the upper guide piece portion 2050. Therefore, in the lower guide piece portion 2050, the portion in the direction facing the ball entry direction (parallel direction) is set as the modified piece portion 2051, and the portion standing vertically behind it is designated as the modified piece portion 2051. It is a rear piece 2052, and the upper end surface is twisted between the modified piece 2051 and the rear piece 2052. The rear end of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2050 is located above the bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044.

From the above, the induction piece 2050 of the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment has two modified pieces 2051 and one rear piece 2052, and is one of the two. The modified piece 2051 is integrally continuous with the rear piece 2052.

In the winning opening unit 2040 of FIG. 186 (b), when the game ball B enters the winning opening 2016 along the entry direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the direction opposite to the entry direction (parallel direction). Each of the two guide pieces 2050 provided in the above is abutted against the upper end surface of the piece 2051, and its flow direction is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the rear and downward directions. To. Then, the game ball B whose distribution direction is changed backward by the changed piece portion 2051 rolls backward on the upper end surface of the rear piece portion 2052 in the lower guide piece portion 2050. As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning opening 2016 can be smoothly and quickly guided backward.

As described above, according to the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B rearward extends in the direction (parallel direction) opposite to the entering direction of the winning opening 2016. Since the modified piece portion 2051 is provided, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface of the modified piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner side of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, etc. Since it is possible to prevent the induction piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the contact, the broken pieces of the induction piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, in the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, two modified piece portions 2051 extending in a direction opposite to the winning ball direction (parallel direction) are provided, and two game balls B entering the winning opening 2016 are provided. Since the contact is made to abut on the two modified pieces 2051, the impact due to the contact of the game ball B on the one changed piece 2051 can be reduced, and the durability of the changed piece 2051 (induction piece 2050) can be reduced. The winning opening 2016 can be applied to a winning opening in which more game balls B enter.

Next, the winning opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 187 (a) will be described. A part of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 of the winning opening unit 2040 is curved in an arc shape and is lowered. The rear end surface of the receiving portion 2042 is in contact with the front surface of the flange portion 2043, and an opening 2043a is formed in a portion corresponding to the downstream end of the receiving portion 2042 so that the game ball B can pass through. ing. The lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 is located below the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As a result, a step high on the receiving portion 2042 side is formed between the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and the opening portion 2043a. A part of the bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044 is curved in an arc shape and is lowered, and is provided at a position lower than the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043. As a result, a step high on the flange portion 2043 side is formed between the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 and the rear extending portion 2044.

The winning opening unit 2040 further has a pair of rear guide piece portions 2045 that are inclined toward the rear on both the left and right sides of the lowest portion of the rear extension portion 2044. The pair of rear guide piece portions 2045 extend back and forth from a portion on the same surface as the front surface of the flange portion 2043 to a portion rearward from the rear end of the rear extension portion 2044. The front end of the upper end surface of the pair of rear guide piece portions 2045 protrudes into the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 at a height lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042.

In this winning opening unit 2040, the front plate portion 2041, the receiving portion 2042, and the guide piece portion 2050 are integrally formed, and the flange portion 2043, the rear extension portion 2044, and the rear guide piece portion 2045 are integrally formed. The receiving portion 2042 side (upstream passage portion side) and the flange portion 2043 side (downstream passage portion side) are separate members from each other.

The winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment is provided with two guiding pieces 2050 for guiding the game ball B. One guide piece portion 2050 extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to a portion in front of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and faces the direction facing the ball entry direction on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It extends from the portion in the vicinity of the entrance of the winning opening 2016 (the portion on the entrance side of the receiving portion 2042 to the lower portion) in the direction opposite to the ball entry direction (parallel direction). The guide piece portion 2050 extending in the direction opposite to the ball entry direction (parallel direction) has the upper end surface inclined at a steep angle with respect to the side (bottom side) in contact with the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. ing. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050 is formed to be close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and the distribution direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be changed from the entry direction to the rear. It is a possible change piece 2051.

On the other hand, the remaining guide piece portion 2050 extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and is upward from the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 which is curved in an arc shape. It extends vertically to. The guide piece portion 2050 has an upper end surface that is inclined at a gentle angle with respect to the horizontal so as to be lowered rearward, and is a rear piece portion 2052 that can guide the game ball B rearward. The entire rear piece 2052 projects upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. The rear piece 2052 is provided so as to be located in front of the pair of rear guide pieces 2045.

For the above reasons, the induction piece 2050 of the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment is provided with the modified piece 2051 and the rear piece 2052 separately.

In the winning opening unit 2040 of FIG. 187 (a), when the game ball B enters the winning opening 2016 along the entry direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the entry direction of the two guide pieces 2050 It abuts on the upper end surface (tip surface) of the change piece portion 2051 provided in the direction opposite to (parallel direction), and its flow direction is rearward and downward from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100. Change direction. Since the modified piece 2051 extends toward the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece 2052, which is the remaining guiding piece 2050 below, the flow direction is rearward due to the modified piece 2051. The game ball B changed to abuts on the upper end surface of the rear piece 2052 and rolls backward on the upper end surface. Then, the game ball B that has rolled the rear piece 2052 rolls backward from the rear end of the rear piece 2052 so as to straddle the pair of rear guidance pieces 2045. As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning opening 2016 can be guided smoothly and quickly to the rear, and the pair of rear guiding pieces 2045 can straighten the game ball B to the rear. ..

As described above, according to the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B rearward extends in the direction (parallel direction) opposite to the entering direction of the winning opening 2016. Since the modified piece portion 2051 is provided, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the modified piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner side of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, etc. Since it is possible to prevent the induction piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the contact, the broken pieces of the induction piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, a part (upper end side) of the changed piece portion 2051 is extended to the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece portion 2052 (in a plan view, the upper end surface and the rear piece of the changed piece portion 2051). Since the upper end surface of the portion 2052 is crossed), the game ball B that has entered (entered) the winning opening 2016 is changed in the distribution direction by the changed piece portion 2051 and is moved backward by the rear piece portion 2052. Can be induced. As a result, even if the entry direction of the winning opening 2016 is close to the horizontal direction, the entered game ball B can be guided backward in a good state.

Further, as in the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, even when the positions of the guide piece 2050 and the rear guide piece 2045 provided in the front and rear are different and are not continuous, the rear guide piece on the rear side Since the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the portion 2045 is lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, it does not interfere with the flow of the game ball B.

Next, the winning opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 187 (b) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of the winning opening unit 2040 extends horizontally in the front-rear direction with the bottom surface curved in a semicircular shape, and is formed in a U-shape with an inclined front view. The flange portion 2043 has a rear end surface of the receiving portion 2042 in contact with the front surface thereof, and a U-shaped notched opening 2043a having a size that allows the game ball B to pass through a portion corresponding to the downstream end of the receiving portion 2042. Is formed. The lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 is located below the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As a result, a step high on the receiving portion 2042 side is formed between the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and the opening portion 2043a.

The rear extending portion 2044 has a J-shaped front view, and the bottom surface is curved in a semicircular shape having a radius larger than the radius of the U-shaped portion of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043. At the same time, it is provided at a position lower than the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043. As a result, a step high on the flange portion 2043 side is formed between the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 and the rear extending portion 2044.

The winning opening unit 2040 extends upward from the lowest portion on the bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044, and further extends the rear guiding piece portion 2045 in which the upper end surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear. Have. The rear guide piece portion 2045 extends back and forth from the same portion as the front surface of the flange portion 2043 to the rear end of the rear extension portion 2044. Further, in the rear guide piece portion 2045, the front end of the upper end surface extends upward to the same height as the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and protrudes into the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043.

In this winning opening unit 2040, the front plate portion 2041, the receiving portion 2042, and the guide piece portion 2050 are integrally formed, and the flange portion 2043, the rear extension portion 2044, and the rear guide piece portion 2045 are integrally formed. The receiving portion 2042 side (upstream passage portion side) and the flange portion 2043 side (downstream passage portion side) are separate members from each other.

The winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment is provided with two guiding pieces 2050 for guiding the game ball B. One guide piece portion 2050 extends from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 in the front-rear direction, and from a portion of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 that faces the direction of the ball entering. It extends in the direction opposite to the ball entry direction (parallel direction) to the portion near the entrance of the winning opening 2016 (the portion on the entrance side of the receiving portion 2042, which is closer to the entrance side than the lowest portion). The guide piece portion 2050 extending in the direction opposite to the ball entry direction (parallel direction) has an upper end surface (tip surface) steep with respect to a side (bottom surface) in contact with the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It is tilted at an angle. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050 is formed to be close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and the distribution direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be changed from the entry direction to the rear. It is a possible change piece 2051.

On the other hand, the remaining guide piece portion 2050 extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and is higher than the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 which is curved in an arc shape. It extends upward from the portion opposite to the modified piece 2051. The guide piece portion 2050 has an upper end surface (tip surface) inclined at a gentle angle with respect to the horizontal so as to be lowered rearward, and is a rear piece portion 2052 capable of guiding the game ball B rearward. .. The entire rear piece 2052 projects upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. The rear piece 2052 is provided below the modified piece 2051.

For the above reasons, the induction piece 2050 of the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment is provided with the modified piece 2051 and the rear piece 2052 separately.

In the winning opening unit 2040 of FIG. 187 (b), when the game ball B enters the winning opening 2016 along the entry direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the entry direction of the two guide pieces 2050 It abuts on the upper end surface (tip surface) of the change piece portion 2051 provided in the direction opposite to (parallel direction), and its flow direction is rearward and downward from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100. Change direction. Since the modified piece 2051 extends toward the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece 2052, which is the remaining guiding piece 2050 below, the flow direction is rearward due to the modified piece 2051. The game ball B changed to abuts on the upper end surface (tip surface) of the rear piece 2052 below the changed piece 2051 and rolls backward.

At this time, since the rear piece 2052 is provided on the side opposite to the modified piece 2051 with the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 in between, the game ball B has the changed piece 2051 and the rear piece 2051. It rolls backward while being in contact with both of the 2052. As a result, the game ball B is suppressed from swinging in the left-right direction, and is rectified straight backward. Then, the game ball B guided backward rolls backward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 on the upper end surface of the rear guiding piece portion 2045. As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning opening 2016 can be smoothly and quickly guided backward.

As described above, according to the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B rearward extends in the direction (parallel direction) opposite to the entering direction of the winning opening 2016. Since the modified piece portion 2051 is provided, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the modified piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner side of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, etc. Since it is possible to prevent the induction piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the contact, the broken pieces of the induction piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, a part (upper end side) of the changed piece portion 2051 is extended to the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece portion 2052 (in a plan view, the upper end surface and the rear piece of the changed piece portion 2051). Since the upper end surface of the portion 2052 is crossed), the game ball B that has entered (entered) the winning opening 2016 is changed in the distribution direction by the changed piece portion 2051 and is moved backward by the rear piece portion 2052. Can be induced. As a result, even if the entry direction of the winning opening 2016 is close to the horizontal direction, the entered game ball B can be guided backward in a good state.

Further, as in the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, even when the positions of the guide piece 2050 and the rear guide piece 2045 provided in the front and rear are different and are not continuous, the rear guide piece on the rear side Since the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the portion 2045 is lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, it does not interfere with the flow of the game ball B.

Next, the winning opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 188 (a) will be described. A part of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 of the winning opening unit 2040 is curved in an arc shape and is lowered. The flange portion 2043 extends outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042. The front end surface of the rear extending portion 2044 is in contact with the rear surface of the flange portion 2043. Further, the bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044 is curved in an arc shape with a radius larger than the radius of the arcuate bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and is provided at a position lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As a result, a step high on the receiving portion 2042 side is formed between the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and the bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044.

The winning opening unit 2040 extends upward from the lowest portion of the rear extending portion 2044, and extends back and forth over the entire length of the rear extending portion 2044. I have more. The rear guide piece 2045 is gently inclined so that the upper end surface is lowered toward the rear. The front end of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece 2045 is substantially the same height as the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042.

In this winning opening unit 2040, the front plate portion 2041, the receiving portion 2042, the guide piece portion 2050, and the flange portion 2043 are integrally formed, and the rear extension portion 2044 and the rear guide piece portion 2045 are integrally formed. The receiving portion 2042 side (upstream passage portion side) and the rear extending portion 2044 side (downstream passage portion side) are separate members from each other.

The winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of (three here) guiding pieces 2050 for guiding the game ball B. One guide piece portion 2050 extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to a portion in front of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and faces the direction facing the ball entry direction on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It extends from the portion in the vicinity of the entrance of the winning opening 2016 (the portion on the entrance side of the receiving portion 2042 to the lower portion) in the direction opposite to the ball entry direction (parallel direction). The guide piece portion 2050 extending in the direction opposite to the ball entry direction (parallel direction) has an upper end surface (tip surface) steep with respect to a side (bottom surface) in contact with the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It is tilted at an angle. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050 is formed to be close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and the distribution direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be changed from the entry direction to the rear. It is a possible change piece 2051.

On the other hand, the remaining guide piece portion 2050 extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the same portion as the rear surface of the flange portion 2043, and the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 that is curved in an arc shape. It extends vertically upward from the left and right sides of the space. The pair of guide piece portions 2050 has an upper end surface (tip surface) inclined at a gentle angle with respect to the horizontal so as to be lowered rearward, and becomes a rear piece portion 2052 capable of guiding the game ball B rearward. ing. The entire rear piece 2052 projects upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. The pair of rear piece portions 2052 are provided so that the portion between them is located in front of the rear guide piece portion 2045.

From the above, in the induction piece portion 2050 of the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, one modified piece portion 2051 and two (pair) rear piece portions 2052 are separately provided.

In the winning opening unit 2040 of FIG. 188 (a), when the game ball B enters the winning opening 2016 along the entry direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the direction opposite to the entry direction (parallel direction). It comes into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the change piece portion 2051 provided in the above, and the flow direction thereof is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the rear and downward directions. Since this changed piece 2051 extends toward the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the pair of lower rear pieces 2052, which is a part of the remaining induction piece 2050, the flow direction is increased by the changed piece 2051. The game ball B whose is changed to the rear abuts on the upper end surface (tip surface) of the pair of rear piece portions 2052, and rolls backward in a state of straddling the pair of rear piece portions 2052. With this pair of rear piece portions 2052, the game ball B can be rectified straight backward. Then, the game ball B guided backward rolls backward from the rear end of the pair of rear piece portions 2052 on the upper end surface of the rear guidance piece portion 2045. As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning opening 2016 can be smoothly and quickly guided backward.

As described above, according to the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B rearward extends in the direction (parallel direction) opposite to the entering direction of the winning opening 2016. Since the modified piece portion 2051 is provided, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the modified piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner side of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, etc. Since it is possible to prevent the induction piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the contact, the broken pieces of the induction piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, a part (upper end side) of the changed piece portion 2051 is extended to the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece portion 2052 (in a plan view, the upper end surface and the rear piece of the changed piece portion 2051). Since the upper end surface of the portion 2052 is crossed), the game ball B that has entered (entered) the winning opening 2016 is changed in the distribution direction by the changed piece portion 2051 and is moved backward by the rear piece portion 2052. Can be induced. As a result, even if the entry direction of the winning opening 2016 is close to the horizontal direction, the entered game ball B can be guided backward in a good state.

Further, as in the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, even when the positions of the guide piece 2050 and the rear guide piece 2045 provided in the front and rear are different and are not continuous, the rear guide piece on the rear side Since the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the portion 2045 is lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, it does not interfere with the flow of the game ball B.

Next, the winning opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 188 (b) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of the winning opening unit 2040 has a side wall 2042a which is vertically erected so as to face the winning opening 2016. The bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 is formed in a flat shape and is gently inclined so as to be lowered rearward. The guide piece portion 2050 is provided in the receiving portion 2042. The flange portion 2043 extends outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042. The rear extending portion 2044 extends rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2043.

The winning opening unit 2040 is erected vertically upward from the bottom surface of the rear extension portion 2044, is gently inclined so that the upper end surface is lowered toward the rear, and the total length of the rear extension portion 2044. It further has a rear guide piece 2045 that extends back and forth over. The front end of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045 is provided at a position lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. In the present embodiment, on the paper of FIG. 188, the winning opening 2016 on the left side is provided with a pair of rear guiding piece portions 2045, and the winning opening 2016 on the right side is provided with one rear guiding piece portion 2045.

The winning opening unit 2040 is integrally formed with a front plate portion 2041, a receiving portion 2042, a guide piece portion 2050, a flange portion 2043, a rear extension portion 2044, and a rear guide piece portion 2045.

The guide piece portion 2050 of the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to a portion in front of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and enters from the side wall 2042a of the receiving portion 2042. It extends in the direction opposite to the ball direction (parallel direction) to the portion near the entrance of the winning opening 2016. The guide piece portion 2050 extending in the direction opposite to the ball entry direction (parallel direction) has an upper end surface (tip surface) steep with respect to a side (bottom surface) in contact with the side wall 2042a of the receiving portion 2042. It is tilted at an angle. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050 is formed to be close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and the distribution direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be changed from the entry direction to the rear. It is a modified piece 2051.

In the winning opening unit 2040 of FIG. 188 (b), when the game ball B enters the winning opening 2016 along the entry direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the direction opposite to the entry direction (parallel direction). It comes into contact with the tip end surface (upper end surface) of the change piece portion 2051 provided in the above, and the flow direction thereof is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the rearward and downward directions. Since the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 that is gently inclined toward the rear is provided below the changed piece portion 2051, the game ball B whose distribution direction is changed to the rear by the changed piece portion 2051 is received. It comes into contact with the bottom surface of the portion 2042 and rolls backward. Then, the game ball B that has rolled backward on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 so as to straddle the pair of rear guiding piece portions 2045 from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, or the upper end surface of one rear guiding piece portion 2045. Will be rolled backwards. As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning opening 2016 can be smoothly and quickly guided backward.

As described above, according to the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B rearward extends in the direction (parallel direction) opposite to the entering direction of the winning opening 2016. Since the modified piece portion 2051 is provided, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the tip surface (upper end surface) of the modified piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner side of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050, etc. Since it is possible to prevent the induction piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the contact, the broken pieces of the induction piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, as in the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the game ball B on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 rolls at the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the rear guiding piece portion 2045 on the rear side of the receiving portion 2042. Since it is configured to be lower than the part to be played, it does not interfere with the flow of the game ball B.

In the above embodiment, the modified piece portion 2051 of the induction piece portion 2050 is shown to have a triangular side surface, that is, a flat surface having a straight upper end surface (tip surface), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the upper end surface (tip side) may be a curved surface curved in an arc shape.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), when the opening 2043a through which the game ball B passes in the flange portion 2043 is a through hole, that is, the flange portion 2043 is above the winning opening 2016 in the front view. When it has an opening 2043a formed of a through hole extending to and through which the game ball B passes, the winning direction of the winning opening 2016 is guided regardless of the vertical direction or the direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction. It is desirable that the upper end surface (tip surface) of the modified piece portion 2051 (or the steep piece portion) in the piece portion 2050 is a curved surface that is curved in an arc shape.

More specifically, assuming that the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 is a through hole, the flange portion 2043 that is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) exists on the rear end side of the entrance of the winning opening 2016. Therefore, the rear end of the entrance of the winning opening 2016 is located forward by the thickness of the flange portion 2043, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the winning opening 2016 is the thickness of the flange portion 2043. Just get smaller. When the winning opening 2016 is provided with the modified piece portion 2051 having a triangular side surface and a flat upper end surface (tip surface), the modified piece portion 2051 (guide piece portion) is provided from the upper end of the opening 2043a. Since the distance to 2050) becomes shorter and then longer from the upper end of the modified piece 2051 toward the bottom, the size of the flow path of the game ball B is partially narrowed, so that the game is played. The rapid distribution of the ball B is suppressed, and there is a risk that the game ball B may be stagnant or the ball may be clogged. On the other hand, if the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changed piece portion 2051 is a curved surface that is curved so as to be recessed in an arc shape, the changed piece portion 2051 (guide piece portion) is formed from the upper end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043. The distance to 2050) hardly changes even from the upper end of the changed piece portion 2051 downward, and the size of the flow path of the game ball B can be kept substantially constant. As a result, the distribution of the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning opening 2016 is not suppressed, the game ball B can be quickly distributed, and the game ball B is stagnant or jammed. Can be avoided.

It should be noted that the guidance piece 2050 of the winning opening 2016 in which the entry direction of the game ball B is inclined with respect to the vertical direction as described above has a function of preventing ball shaving as shown in FIG. The configuration of one piece 2035 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball shavings even in the winning opening 2016 in which the ball entry direction is inclined.

[12. Relationship between the front unit and the game panel on the game board]
Subsequently, the relationship (mounting relationship) between the table unit 2000 and the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192 and the like. FIG. 190 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the start port unit and the center accessory in the front unit of another embodiment from the front, and FIG. 190 (b) shows the positioning pin, the mounting hole, and the game panel in (a). It is explanatory drawing which expands the relationship with and shows in the cross section. FIG. 191 is an explanatory view showing a portion of a positioning pin in a table unit of a further different embodiment in a cross section. FIG. 192 (a) is an explanatory view showing a portion of a positioning pin in a table unit of a further different embodiment from the front, FIG. 192 (b) is an explanatory view showing (a) in a cross section, and FIG. 192 (c) is an explanatory view showing (b). It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which a part of) was brought into contact with a game panel in a cross section. The same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 190 (a), the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 in the present embodiment extends in a flat plate shape to the left and right outside with the first start port 2004 in between, and is a game panel 1100 (panel). It has a flange portion 2103 that abuts on the front surface of the plate 1110). Further, the start port unit 2100 has a mounting hole 2106 for mounting the start port unit 2100 on the game panel 1100, and a positioning pin 2107 for positioning the start port unit 2100 at a predetermined position on the game panel 1100. There is.

The mounting hole 2106 is a countersunk hole (see FIG. 190 (b)) that penetrates the flange portion 2103 in the front-rear direction. The positioning pin 2107 projects in a columnar shape from the rear surface of the flange portion 2103 to the rear, and the tip thereof is formed in a conical shape. The mounting hole 2106 and the positioning pin 2107 of the starting port unit 2100 are a set in which the distance L1 between the centers of the starting port units 2100 is within a predetermined range (for example, a range of 5 mm to 8 mm). In the left and right flange portions 2103, two sets of mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 are provided symmetrically with respect to the vertical center line CL passing through the center in the left-right direction of the first starting port 2004.

The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 in the present embodiment is formed in a frame shape as a whole, and has a flat flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and a center accessory 2500. It has a mounting hole 2504 for mounting on the game panel 1100, and a positioning pin 2505 for positioning the center accessory 2500 at a predetermined position on the game panel 1100.

The mounting hole 2504 is a countersunk hole (see FIG. 190 (b)) that penetrates the flange portion 2502 in the front-rear direction. The positioning pin 2505 projects from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 to the rear in a columnar shape, and the tip thereof is formed in a conical shape. The mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 of the center accessory 2500 are a set in which the distance L1 between the centers is within a predetermined range (for example, in the range of 5 mm to 8 mm).

Further, the center accessory 2500 has a stage 2513 at a lower side portion in the frame, in which the game ball B is rolled in the left-right direction and then released into the game area 5a. The center accessory 2500 is also provided with a flange portion 2502 below the stage 2513, and two sets of attachments are provided at a portion of the flange portion 2502 below the stage 2513 with the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in between. Holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505 are provided on both the left and right sides, respectively.

The two sets of mounting holes 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 provided below the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 are centered in the left-right direction of the central discharge portion 2513a, that is, the center passing through the center in the left-right direction of the first starting port 2004. It is provided at a position symmetrical with respect to the line CL. Although not shown, the center line CL passes through the center of two obstacle nails N (so-called navel nails) planted directly above the first starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, the two sets of mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 (mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505) affect games such as the first starting port 2004, the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, and the navel nail. It is provided at symmetrical positions with the center line CL passing through the center of a certain portion as a boundary. As a result, by inserting the positioning pin 2107 and the positioning pin 2505 of the starting port unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2004 and the stage 2513 The central discharge portion 2513a of the above can be accurately positioned at a specific position (on the center line CL) in the game area 5a. As a result, the acceptance probability that the game ball B released from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is accepted by the lower first starting port 2004 can be set within a desired range, and the game board 5 can be used. Variations for each (product) can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, since the positioning pin 2107 and the positioning pin 2505 are provided symmetrically with the center line CL as a boundary, the game panel 1100, the starting port unit 2100, and the center accessory are provided due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity. Even if 2500, etc. expands and contracts and deforms, the center of the first starting port 2004 and the central discharge portion 2513a can be maintained on the center line CL, and the game ball B is received into the first starting port 2004. It is possible to prevent the probability from changing.

Further, since it has a plurality of positioning pins 2505, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2505 can be inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100. Since the center accessory 2500 can be positioned, the center accessory 2500 may move or float from the game panel 1100 when the mounting screw is screwed into the screw hole 1116 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504. It is possible to prevent this from happening, and it is possible to facilitate the mounting work, and even if the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504 and tightened, the center accessory 2500 does not move slightly. Instead, the center accessory 2500 can be reliably attached to a specific position on the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

Further, in the present embodiment, a member such as a front plate portion that is separated forward from the flange portion 2502 is not provided in front of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 extends rearward. In other words, the positioning pin 2505 is not provided in the rear portion of the flange portion 2502 where the front plate portion separated from the flange portion 2502 is provided. As a result, when the game board 5 is assembled, the front plate portion does not get in the way when the positioning pin 2505 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, and the positioning pin 2505 on the flange portion 2502 By pressing the front surface of the provided portion, the positioning pin 2505 can be reliably pushed into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100. In a portion where a worker's finger can be inserted between the flange portion 2502 and the front plate portion, a positioning pin 2505 may be provided at a portion behind the front plate portion.

In the above embodiment, two sets of mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 (mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505) are applied to the first starting port 2004 (central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001, the gate 2002, the variable winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2005, the first major winning opening 2006, the second major winning opening 2007, and the ordinary winning opening 2008, Etc. may be applied.

Next, an embodiment different from the above will be described with reference to FIG. 191 at a portion of the center accessory 2500 where the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 are provided. In the present embodiment, on the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, a groove portion 2506 recessed forward so as to surround the outer circumference of the positioning pin 2505 is provided at the base of the positioning pin 2505 projecting rearward. , Have.

By the way, when the center accessory 2500 is formed by injection molding or the like, R is likely to be attached to the root of the positioning pin 2505, and the root of the positioning pin 2505 becomes thicker due to the R. Then, when an attempt is made to insert the position determination pin 2505 into the position determination hole 2505 of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) with an R attached to the base, the thickened portion of the base enters the position determination hole 1117. The insertion of the positioning pin 2505 is stopped halfway, and the insertion of the positioning pin 2505 is incomplete (there is a gap between the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 and the front surface of the game panel 1100). There is a risk that the center accessory 2500 will be attached to the game panel 1100. Further, a decorative or protective sheet is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and when the positioning hole 1117 or the like is formed in the game panel 1100, the positioning hole 1117 or the like is formed. Burrs may occur on the front edge. Then, when the positioning pin 2505 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 with burrs formed on the front end edge of the positioning hole 1117, the burrs are sandwiched between the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the rear surface of the flange portion 2502. There is a risk that the center accessory 2500 will be attached to the game panel 1100 in a state where the positioning pin 2505 is incompletely inserted. As described above, when the positioning pin 2505 is incompletely inserted, the positioning effect cannot be sufficiently exerted, so that the above-mentioned action and effect may not be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove portion 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the root of the positioning pin 2505 in the flange portion 2502, the root of the positioning pin 2505 is the groove portion 2506 in front of the rear surface of the flange portion 2502. Even if it becomes the bottom and has an R at the base of the positioning pin 2505, the portion of the positioning pin 2505 behind the flange portion 2502 does not become thicker, and the thickness of the effective range of the positioning pin 2505 ( The diameter) can be made uniform, and the positioning pin 2505 can be completely inserted into the positioning hole 1117 until the front surface of the game panel 1100 abuts on the rear surface of the flange portion 2502. Further, even if burrs are generated on the front end edge of the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the burrs are accommodated in the groove portion 2506, so that the burrs are sandwiched between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502. It is possible to avoid the problem, and the positioning pin 2505 can be completely inserted into the positioning hole 1117. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can surely exert the positioning effect by the positioning pin 2505 and surely exerts the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, even if the positioning pin 2505 has an R at the base, the portion thickened by the R can be moved to the front of the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 due to the presence of the groove portion 2506, so that the positioning pin 2505 can be moved forward. There is no gap between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 due to the incomplete insertion into the positioning hole 1117 due to the thickened portion of the root. Further, since the burr generated at the front end edge of the positioning hole 1117 can be accommodated in the groove portion 2506, the burr is formed between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 at the portion of the mounting hole 2504 of the flange portion 2502. There are no gaps. Therefore, the center accessory 2500 is not attached to the game panel 1100 with a gap between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502, and the center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1100 is used. There is no rattling.

Further, since the groove portion 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 on the rear surface of the flange portion 2502, the difference in plate thickness due to the presence of the positioning pin 2505 on the flange portion 2502 during injection molding of the center accessory 2500. As a result, when the molten resin is cured, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of sink marks on the front surface side of the flange portion 2502.

In the above embodiment, the groove portion 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 of the center accessory 2500, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the groove portion is provided on the starting port unit 2100 and the side. It may be provided on a member attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 such as a unit 2200, a side upper left unit 2300, a lower right unit 2400, and a gate member 2600.

Next, an embodiment different from the above will be described with reference to FIG. 192 at a portion of the center accessory 2500 where the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 are provided. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 192, the center accessory 2500 has a seat surface portion 2507 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502. The rear surface of the seat surface portion 2507 is formed on a flat surface parallel to the rear surface of the flange portion 2502.

A set of mounting holes 2504 and a positioning pin 2505 are provided at the portion of the seat surface portion 2507. In other words, a seating surface portion 2507 is provided so as to surround a set of mounting holes 2504 and a positioning pin 2505. Therefore, the outer shape of the seat surface portion 2507 is tear-shaped. The seat surface portion 2507 projects rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 by a predetermined length (for example, in the range of 0.2 mm to 1 mm).

According to the present embodiment, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the seat surface portion 2507 comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, so that the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 come into contact with each other. A predetermined amount of gaps will be formed between them. As a result, even if the flange portion 2502 is wavy when the center accessory 2500 is injection-molded, the unevenness due to the waviness can be absorbed by the gap, and the center accessory 2500 is securely attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. be able to.

Further, when the expansion / contraction rate of the center accessory 2500 is different from that of the game panel 1100 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, a gap is formed between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 by the seat surface portion 2507. Therefore, the difference in expansion and contraction between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 can be absorbed by the gap, and the distortion of the center accessory 2500 can be suppressed.

Further, since a set of mounting holes 2504 and a seating surface portion 2507 surrounding the positioning pin 2505 are provided, for example, when the center accessory 2500 is transparent, the tear-shaped seating surface portion 2507 is visually recognized from the front side. Therefore, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the position of the attachment hole 2504 can be easily grasped by the seat surface portion 2507, and the time and effort required for attachment can be facilitated.

In the above embodiment, the seat surface portion 2507 is provided on the center accessory 2500, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the seat surface portion is provided with the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the side upper left unit 2300. , Lower right unit 2400, gate member 2600, etc. may be provided on a member attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

[13. Detailed configuration of a distribution passage with a game ball detection sensor]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the distribution passage 2061 having the detection sensor 2060 of the game ball B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a distribution passage in which the passage is cranked on the downstream side of the detection sensor, and FIG. 193 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution passage of an embodiment different from (a). (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution passage having a conventional detection sensor. In the present embodiment, the guidance unit 2062 for guiding the game ball B is provided in the distribution passage 2061 to prevent one game ball B from being detected by the detection sensor 2060 a plurality of times (so-called double count). The "horizontal direction" in the following may be a horizontal direction, may be a left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1, or may be a front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 1.

First, the conventional distribution passage 2920 shown in FIG. 193 (c) will be described. The conventional distribution passage 2920 has a first horizontal portion 2920a extending in the horizontal direction so as to be lower on the downstream side, and a first vertical portion 2920b extending downward from the downstream end of the first horizontal portion 2920a. The second horizontal portion 2920c extending in the horizontal direction so as to be lower from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2920b, and the second horizontal portion 2920c extending downward from the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2920c. It has two vertical portions 2920d. A detection sensor 2060 for detecting the game ball B is provided in the middle of the first vertical portion 2920b. The second lateral portion 2920c is provided below the first lateral portion 2920a. Therefore, on the downstream side of the detection sensor 2060, the passage is cranked by the first vertical portion 2920b, the second horizontal portion 2920c, and the second vertical portion 2920d.

In the conventional distribution passage 2920, the outer corner of the portion where the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2920b and the upstream end of the second horizontal portion 2920c are in contact with each other is formed on the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2920b and the second horizontal portion 2920c. It is in contact with the bottom wall. Further, the outer corner of the portion where the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2920c and the upstream end of the second vertical portion 2920d are in contact with each other is in contact with the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2920d. It is in the form of. For this reason, the conventional distribution passage 2920 has two walls in different directions that the game balls B can come into contact with at the same time. That is, the conventional distribution passage 2920 has a portion where walls in different directions simultaneously contact the game ball B, which may hinder the distribution of the game ball B.

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 193 (c), the detection sensor 2060 is detected on the game ball B in contact with the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2920b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c. When the game ball B in contact with the inner surface on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2920b in the hole 2060a comes into contact with the inner surface from above, the center of the lower game ball B becomes closer to the center of the upper game ball B than the center of the upper game ball B. Since it is located on the outer wall side of one vertical portion 2920b, the lower game ball B is moved to the outer wall side of the first vertical portion 2920b, that is, the upstream side of the second horizontal portion 2920c due to the load from the upper game ball B. The lower game ball B cannot move to the downstream side of the second lateral portion 2920c.

Therefore, the upper game ball B bounces upward due to the reaction of contacting the lower game ball B from above, and the upper game ball B moves up and down in the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060. Therefore, the upper game ball B is detected a plurality of times by the detection sensor 2060. Therefore, the detection sensor 2060 has a problem that it detects (falsely detects) more than the number of game balls B actually circulated in the distribution passage 2920. If the detection sensor 2060 erroneously detects, the load on the game hall side increases due to the extra payout of the game ball B, or a problem such as ball clogging occurs due to a discrepancy with the count number of the game ball B separately counted. There is a problem that it is determined that the player is present and the game is interrupted. Further, as described above, there is a problem that the ball clogging occurs in the distribution passage 2920 because the lower game ball B cannot move to the downstream side of the second lateral portion 2920c.

Although not shown, the game ball B in contact with the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2920d is in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c from the upstream side. When the existing game ball B comes into contact with the game ball B, the center of the game ball B on the downstream side is located above the center of the game ball B on the upstream side. It will be pressed against the top wall of 2920c), and the game ball B on the downstream side will not be able to flow down the second vertical portion 2920d, which may cause ball clogging. Then, when the game ball B that has stagnated due to the occurrence of ball clogging in the relevant portion accumulates below the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 (downstream end of the first vertical portion 2920b), the game ball B that has flowed down from the upstream is released. When it comes into contact with the game ball B below the detection hole 2060a and bounces off, it may move up and down in the detection hole 2060a and be detected a plurality of times, which causes the same problem as described above.

On the other hand, the distribution passage 2061 of the present embodiment has a first horizontal portion 2061a extending in the lateral direction so as to be lower on the downstream side, and a first lateral portion 2061a extending downward from the downstream end of the first horizontal portion 2061a. One vertical portion 2061b, a second horizontal portion 2061c extending in the horizontal direction so as to be lower from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b, and a second horizontal portion 2061c extending downward from the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2061c. It has a second vertical portion 2061d and a protruding second vertical portion 2061d.

The first lateral portion 2061a and the second lateral portion 2061c are gently inclined at an angle of θ1 (for example, in the range of 2 degrees to 7 degrees, here 5 degrees) with respect to the horizontal. The second lateral portion 2061c is provided below the first lateral portion 2061a. The distribution passage 2061 is provided with a detection sensor 2060 that detects the game ball B in the middle of the first vertical portion 2061b. Therefore, on the downstream side of the detection sensor 2060, the passage is cranked by a part of the first vertical portion 2061b, the second horizontal portion 2061c, and the second vertical portion 2061d.

Further, in the distribution passage 2061, the first lateral portion 2061a is provided above the detection sensor 2060, and the second lateral portion 2061c is provided below the detection sensor 2060. As a result, since the distribution passage 2061 meanders around the detection sensor 2060 in the vertical direction, the size of the distribution passage 2061 in the lateral direction can be made compact. Further, in the distribution passage 2061, when the vertical length of the first vertical portion 2061b is such that the first horizontal portion 2061a and the second horizontal portion 2061c wrap around the detection sensor 2060 vertically, the detection sensor 2060 is inserted between them. It is formed to the minimum length required for installation. The length of the first vertical portion 2061b (distance from the top wall of the first horizontal portion 2061a to the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c) is in the range of 2.5 to 3.5 times the diameter of the game ball B. It is inside. As a result, the detection sensor 2060 can be provided in the first vertical portion 2061b, and an increase in the circulation speed (falling speed) of the game ball B can be suppressed in the first vertical portion 2061b.

As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the distribution passage 2061 of the present embodiment has a first vertical portion 2061b between the top wall of the first horizontal portion 2061a and the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b. The guide portion 2062 is provided between the outer wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d, respectively. The guide portion 2062A of FIG. 193 (a) is formed in an arc shape having a radius r centered on the lower end on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2061b in the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060.

It is desirable that the radius r of the arc of the guiding portion 2062A is larger than the diameter of the game ball B. More specifically, the arcuate radius r of the guide portion 2062A is within a range of 1 to 1.5 times (for example, 11 mm to 16 mm, preferably 11 mm to 13 mm) with respect to the diameter of the game ball B. Is desirable. The reason for limiting the radius r of the arc-shaped guide portion 2062A to the above range is that if the radius r of the guide portion 2062A is smaller than this range, the game ball directly below the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 in the guide portion 2062A. Since the angle of the tangent line of the portion where B contacts becomes close to horizontal, the force for guiding the game ball B in the lateral direction becomes weak and the game ball B does not move quickly downstream, so that the game ball B comes into contact with the guiding portion 2062A. This is because the repulsive force when the later game ball B comes into contact with the first game ball B becomes large, and the later game ball B may bounce upward and be detected again by the detection sensor 2060. Further, if the radius r of the guide portion 2062A is larger than this range, the lateral direction and the vertical direction of the distribution passage 2061 may be unnecessarily large, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the distribution passage 2061 may be reduced. By increasing the height of the lateral portion 2061c, the speed of the game ball B flowing down from the first vertical portion 2061b to the second horizontal portion 2061c becomes faster, and the impact when it comes into contact with the guiding portion 2062A becomes stronger. This is because the distribution passage 2061 may be quickly fatigued and easily damaged by the impact. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the radius r of the arc is 12 mm.

According to the present embodiment, a circle is formed between the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c, and between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d. Since the arc-shaped guiding portion 2062A is provided, the walls in two different directions do not come into contact with the game ball B at the same time, and the game ball B is prevented from having a portion that hinders the distribution of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B that has passed through the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 can be quickly moved from the lower side of the detection hole 2060a to the downstream side by the arc-shaped guiding portion 2062A. Even if the late (upper) game ball B comes into contact with the side) game ball B, the starting game ball B moves to the downstream side (lateral direction) due to the impact of the late game ball B contacting. Since the repulsive force acting on the later game ball B is as small as possible, the later game ball B does not bounce upstream, and the game ball B is not detected multiple times by the detection sensor. .. Therefore, since the number of game balls B circulating in the distribution passage 2061 can be accurately detected (counted), it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being paid out due to unnecessary detection, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress the burden on the gaming hall side, and there is no discrepancy with the count number of the game ball B counted by a separate detection sensor, and the game is interrupted due to the discrepancy. It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable and deteriorating the interest due to the interruption of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the arc-shaped guiding portion 2062A can quickly guide the game ball B to the downstream side, so that the occurrence of ball clogging in the distribution passage 2061 is prevented. be able to.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the distribution passage 2061 is cranked, the vertical dimension of the distribution passage 2061 can be made as small as possible, and the degree of freedom in arranging the distribution passage 2061 can be increased. it can.

By the way, although not shown, when the length of the first vertical portion 2920b is increased and the detection sensor 2060 is provided near the upper end of the first vertical portion 2920b as the conventional distribution passage 2920, that is, the detection sensor When the portion of the 2060 on the downstream side of the detection hole 2060a is extended straight downward, the later game ball B having a high distribution speed immediately after the first game ball B passes through the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060. When the ball passes through the detection hole 2060a and collides with the starting game ball B, the later game ball B may bounce upward and be detected (double-counted) again by the detection sensor 2060, which is the same problem as described above. Occurs. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the length of the first vertical portion 2061b is shortened, the passage is cranked on the downstream side of the detection sensor 2060, and the starting game ball B is detected by the guiding portion 2062. It can be quickly moved from the portion below the detection hole 2060a of the sensor 2060. In other words, the guidance unit 2062 directly below the detection sensor 2060 can quickly shift the center of the starting game ball B and the later game ball B in the lateral direction. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the late-starting game ball B, which has a high speed, to collide with the starting game ball B at the portion directly below the detection hole 2060a, and even if it collides, it is bounced laterally and bounces upward. It can be made difficult, and it is possible to prevent the later game ball B from being detected (double count) again by the detection sensor 2060, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above.

Subsequently, another embodiment of the distribution passage 2061 shown in FIG. 193 (b) will be described. The distribution passage 2061 of the present embodiment is the same as the distribution passage 2061 of FIG. 193 (a) except that the shape of the guide portion 2062B is different, and the description of the same configuration is omitted. The guide portion 2062B of the flow passage 2061 is formed in a straight line inclined at an angle of θ2 with respect to the vertical line, and is in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the guide portion 2062. The center of the game ball B on the side of the second horizontal portion 2061c with respect to the center of the upper game ball B in contact with the inner surface on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2061b in the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060. It is formed so as to be separated by a distance L2 in the downstream direction.

The inclination angle θ2 of the guide portion 2062B that is inclined in a straight line is preferably in the range of 40 degrees to 50 degrees. The reason for limiting the inclination angle of the guide unit 2062B to the above range is that if the inclination angle is smaller than the above range, the game ball B is laterally moved when the game ball B flowing down from the detection sensor 2060 comes into contact with the game ball B. Since the force to guide the game ball B is weakened and the game ball B does not move to the downstream promptly, the repulsive force when the game ball B of the later player comes into contact with the game ball B of the starter in contact with the guidance portion 2062B is large. This is because the later game ball B may bounce upward and be detected again by the detection sensor 2060. Further, if the inclination angle is larger than the above range, when the game ball B comes into contact with the game ball B, the force for guiding the game ball B downward becomes stronger, so that the impact acting on the bottom wall of the second lateral portion 2061c is relative. This is because the circulation passage 2061 may be tired early and easily damaged due to the impact. Incidentally, in this embodiment, θ2 is set to 45 degrees.

Further, the distance L2 at which the center of the lower game ball B and the center of the upper game ball B are separated is preferably within the range of 0 mm to 5.5 mm, preferably 3 mm to 4 mm. The reason for limiting the distance L2 to this range is that the distance L2 is smaller than this range (the center of the lower game ball B is located on the upstream side of the second lateral portion 2061c of the taller game ball B on the upper side. ), And the game ball B flowing down from the detection sensor 2060 is likely to come into contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c substantially at the same time as the guide portion 2062B. This is because the upward repulsive force of the game ball B becomes large, and there is a possibility that the game ball B will bounce back to the detection sensor 2060 side and be detected again. If the distance L2 is larger than this range, the distance from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 near the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2061b to the inclined guide portion 2062B becomes shorter. As the flow path becomes narrower, the game ball B tends to be stagnant, and when the later game ball B comes into contact with the stagnant starting game ball B, the game ball B tends to bounce upward again by the detection sensor. This is because there is a risk of being detected. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the distance L2 is set to 3.5 mm.

According to the present embodiment, a straight line is formed between the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c, and between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d. The guide portion 2062B is provided so as to be inclined in a shape, and the center of the game ball B in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the guide portion 2062 is the first in the inner wall of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060. The guide portion 2062B is provided so as to be separated by a distance L2 in the downstream direction of the second lateral portion 2061c from the center of the game ball B in contact with the portion in the downstream direction of the second lateral portion 2061c. As a result, on the lower game ball B that is in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the guide portion 2062B at the same time, on the inner surface on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2061b in the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060. When the upper game ball B in contact comes into contact with the upper game ball B, the lower game ball B is pressed toward the downstream side of the second lateral portion 2061c by the load from the upper game ball B, and the downstream game ball B is pressed. Will move away from the induction unit 2062B to the downstream side.

Therefore, even if the upstream game ball B comes into contact with the downstream game ball B, the downstream game ball B moves to the downstream side due to the impact of the upstream game ball B contacting the upstream side. Since the repulsive force acting on the game ball B is as small as possible, the game ball B on the upstream side does not bounce back to the upstream side, and the game ball B is not detected multiple times by the detection sensor. .. As a result, the number of game balls B circulating in the distribution passage 2061 can be accurately detected (counted), so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being paid out due to unnecessary detection, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to suppress the burden on the installed game hall side, and there is no discrepancy with the count number of the game ball B counted by a separate detection sensor, and the game caused by the discrepancy does not occur. It is possible to avoid the interruption, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable and deteriorating the interest due to the interruption of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as described above, since the game ball B on the downstream side can be moved downstream by the inclined guide portion 2062B, the occurrence of ball clogging in the distribution passage 2061 is prevented. can do.

As described above, according to the embodiments of FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), even if the later game ball B comes into contact with the first game ball B below the detection sensor 2060, the guidance unit 2062 causes the subsequent game ball B to start later. Since it is possible to suppress the bounce of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B (the number of game balls B) circulating in the distribution passage 2061. ) Can be accurately detected.

Further, the guide portion 2062 provided between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d promptly causes the game ball B that has circulated through the second horizontal portion 2061c to the second vertical portion. Since it can be moved downward of 2061d, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls B whose momentum has been weakened by circulating in the lateral direction in the second horizontal portion 2061c from being congested, and at the same time, congesting. It is possible to prevent the later game ball B from coming into contact with the game ball B and bouncing back to the detection sensor 2060 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060. Therefore, it is possible to accurately detect (the number) of the game balls B circulating in the distribution passage 2061.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times (also referred to as double count, false detection, etc.) by the detection sensor 2060. Therefore, for example, false detection of the game ball B (also referred to as double count, false detection, etc.) It is possible to prevent the granting of benefits such as the payout of the game ball B due to (extra detection), and it is possible to suppress the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Alternatively, as described above, since the double count of the game ball B can be prevented, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy from the count number of the game ball B counted by a separate detection sensor. By avoiding the interruption of the game due to the discrepancy, it is possible to prevent the interruption of the game from causing discomfort to the player and deteriorating the interest.

Further, since the second horizontal portion 2061c extends laterally from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b, the second horizontal portion 2061c can suppress an increase in the distribution speed of the game ball B. The distribution speed (momentum) of the game ball B detected by the detection sensor 2060 can be weakened, and the game ball B is in a good state (for example, less impact) with respect to the member provided on the downstream side of the distribution passage 2061. It can be delivered in a state, a rectified state, etc.).

Further, in the distribution passage 2601, the first horizontal portion 2061a extending in the lateral direction is provided on the upstream side of the first vertical portion 2061b in which the detection sensor 2060 is provided. The increase in the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed, and the momentum of the game ball B is weakened, so that the first horizontal portion 2061a is circulated, and the top wall of the first horizontal portion 2061a and the first vertical portion 2061b are circulated. When the game ball B between the game ball B and the outer wall of the guide portion 2602 comes into contact with the guide portion 2602, it can be made difficult to bounce upstream, and the guide portion 2062 can smoothly guide the game ball B downward. The detection sensor 2060 directly underneath can reliably detect one by one.

In the above embodiment, the guide portion 2062 of the distribution passage 2061 is shown as a wall-shaped guide portion, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a rib-shaped guide portion may be used.

Further, as the detection sensor 2060 in the above embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the first large winning opening sensor 2525. , The second grand prize opening sensor 2561, the pseudo grand winning opening sensor 2403 used for the production, the out sensor 664, and the like.

[14. Stop prevention part of the game ball on the rolling surface]
Subsequently, the stop prevention portion 2071 of the game ball B on the rolling surface 2070 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a stop prevention unit for a game ball on a rolling surface, and FIG. 194 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a stop prevention unit different from (a). c) is an explanatory diagram showing a stop prevention unit of a further different embodiment, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional rolling surface having no stop prevention unit. The rolling surface 2070 of the present embodiment has a portion (horizontal portion 2070a) in contact with the horizontal line (horizontal plane) from below, and the stop prevention portion 2071 for preventing the game ball B from stopping at the horizontal portion 2070a. Further has.

First, as shown in FIG. 194 (d), the conventional rolling surface 2070 on which the game ball B rolls is the highest portion in the middle of the range in which the game ball B can roll, that is, from below. It has a horizontal portion 2070a in contact with a horizontal line (or a horizontal plane). As a result, depending on the rolling direction (distribution direction) and rolling speed (distribution speed) of the game ball B, the game ball B may stop at the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070, and the game ball B stops. As a result, the game may be stagnant, which may reduce the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the stop prevention portion 2071 is provided on the horizontal horizontal portion 2070a on the rolling surface 2070, the stop prevention portion 2071 can prevent the game ball B from stopping at the portion. it can.

More specifically, the stop prevention portion 2071A shown in FIG. 194 (a) protrudes upward in a semicircular shape with a predetermined width (for example, 1 mm to 3 mm) in the left-right direction, and extends in the front-rear direction with the same cross-sectional shape. It is the one of the ridge. Further, the stop prevention portion 2071B shown in FIG. 194 (b) has a protrusion having a base projecting upward in a triangular shape having a predetermined length (for example, 1 mm to 3 mm) and extending in the front-rear direction with the same cross-sectional shape. It belongs to the article. The height of the stop prevention unit 2071 is a height that the game ball B can overcome, and is, for example, in the range of 1 mm to 3 mm (or 0.1 to 0.3 times the diameter of the game ball B). Inside.

According to the present embodiment, since the stop prevention portion 2071 projecting in a semicircular shape or a triangular shape is provided on the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070, the game ball B stops at the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070. You can't. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being stagnant due to the stop of the game ball B on the rolling surface 2070, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the height of the stop prevention unit 2071 is set to a height that the game ball B can get over, depending on the rolling speed of the game ball B, the horizontal portion 2070a (stop prevention unit 2071) is placed in between. Since the game ball B can roll from one side of the moving surface 2070 to the other side, the function as the rolling surface 2070 on which the game ball B rolls can be exerted, and the player can exercise the rolling surface 2070. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B in the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the stop prevention portion 2071 is shown as a ridge, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop prevention portion 2071 is provided with protrusions such as a hemispherical shape, a conical shape, and a polygonal pyramid shape. May be.

Further, the stop prevention portion 2071C shown in FIG. 194 (c) is a columnar shape extending in the front-rear direction at a portion directly above the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070. The columnar stop prevention portion 2071C is provided within a predetermined range (for example, within a range of 1 mm to 3 mm) upward from the rolling surface 2070, and the game ball B rolling on the rolling surface 2070 is opposite. It is said that it is possible to get over to the side. The stop prevention unit 2071C can also exert the same effect as described above.

The columnar stop prevention portion 2071C may be an obstacle nail N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), or a flange for attaching the rolling surface 2070 to the front surface of the game panel 1100. It may extend forward from the part.

The rolling surface 2070 of the present embodiment may be provided on the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the lower right unit 2400 (pseudo-attacker unit), the center accessory 2500, the gate member 2600, and the like. it can. Further, the rolling surface 2070 may be movable (for example, a wind turbine, a movable shelf, a distribution member, an opening / closing door, etc.).

If there is a space in front of or behind the rolling surface 2070 (at least the horizontal portion 2070a) through which the game ball B can flow, the stop prevention unit 2071 guides the game ball B to the space side. It may be in the form (for example, protrusion, groove, etc.). In this case, the rolling surface 2070 may be the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500, and the stop prevention portion 2071 may be the central discharge portion 2513a.

[15. Relationship between the present invention and embodiments]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 of the present embodiment is a rear unit of the present invention, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 in the present embodiment is a holding body of the present invention, and the functional surface portion 3011 of the back box 3010 in the present embodiment is On the specific surface portion of the present invention, the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the present embodiment is formed on the decorative body of the present invention, such as the peripheral wall of the functional surface portion recessed rearward in the back box 3010 in the present embodiment. The side walls of the back box 3010 correspond to the regulatory parts of the present invention, respectively.

[16. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 that can be visually recognized through the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) provided with the game area 5a in front is provided. , The game is held in the back box 3010 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), and the front surface of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is projected forward from the back box 3010. The distance from the person to the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can be shortened as compared with the conventional case, and the decoration of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can be made more visible. At this time, since the functional surface portion 3011 of the back box 3010 is provided behind the front surface of the back box 3010, the functional surface portion 3011 does not come into contact with the game panel 1100, which causes a problem of the back box 3010 (back unit 3000). It can be attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can be made more conspicuous than the functional surface portion 3011. Further, since the front surface of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is projected forward from the front surface of the back box 3010, the position of the front surface (decoration) of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 in the front-rear direction is set to the front and back of the game area 5a. Since the position in the direction can be as close as possible, when the game area 5a is focused, the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is also focused, and the back front peripheral decoration body is also focused while visually recognizing the inside of the game area 5a. The decoration of the 3201 can be clearly seen, and the decoration of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can be surely shown to the player. From such a thing, the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can be made to stand out, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the decorative effect of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can be sufficiently and surely exhibited. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can execute a predetermined effect (light emitting effect) according to the progress of the game, when the back front peripheral decorative body 3201 executes a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. Since the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can be made to stand out by the effect, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can enjoy the production by the back front peripheral decoration body 3201. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided on the back box 3010 holding the back front peripheral decoration body 3201, for example, in assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is provided on the back box 3010. When laying down on a predetermined member 3015 made of a mounting table such as a workbench with the front end side facing downward, the back front peripheral edge decoration is placed between the predetermined member 3015 and the functional surface portion 3011. By interposing a columnar or block-shaped intermediate member 3016 that is higher than the distance from the front surface of the body 3201 to the functional surface portion 3011, it is possible to avoid contact of the predetermined member 3015 with the front surface of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201. .. At this time, since the functional surface portion 3011 of the back box 3010 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the back unit 3000, the back box 3010 may tilt or swing when the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 is laid down. The back box 3010 can be laid face down in a stable state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 from being scratched by the contact of the predetermined member 3015, and the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can be maintained in a good state, and the back front peripheral decoration It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defective products (defective products) due to scratches on the body 3201, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, as described above, since the functional surface portion 3011 of the back box 3010 can prevent the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 from coming into contact with the predetermined member 3015, the back box 3010 holding the back front peripheral decoration body 3201. Other members (for example, the back box rear unit 3030) can be attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 and wiring work can be performed with the back box 3010 face down.

Further, since the back box 3010 is provided with the functional surface portion 3011, as compared with the case where the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is provided with the functional surface portion, the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is not held during the assembly. The back box 3010 can be laid face down even in the state, and it can correspond to various working states.

Further, the back box 3010 has a regulating portion (here, the peripheral wall of the functional surface portion 3011 recessed rearward in the back box 3010) capable of restricting the relative movement of the intermediate member 3016 in contact with the functional surface portion 3011. Therefore, in the assembly work or the like, when the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 is placed face down by interposing the intermediate member 3016 between the predetermined member 3015 such as the work table and the functional surface portion 3011, the intermediate member 3016 is placed. By abutting on the regulating portion, it is possible to restrict the movement of the back box 3010 (back unit 3000) in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member 3015. Therefore, the restricting portion of the back box 3010 can prevent the functional surface portion 3011 from falling off from the intermediate member 3016 and tilting or dropping the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000, so that the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 can be tilted or dropped. It is possible to prevent the front surface of the back front peripheral decorative body 3201 from coming into contact with the predetermined member 3015, and it is possible to surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, as described above, since the regulation portion of the back box 3010 can restrict the movement of the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 in the direction along the predetermined member 3015, the back box 3010 or the back of the back box 3010 in a prone state. Since the unit 3000 can be made difficult to move, it is possible to easily perform the assembly work in the state of being laid down, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided so as to face the rear of the back unit 3000 (visible in the rear view), the assembly work is such that the back box 3010 holds the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 and the like from the front. With the front end side of the back box 3010 facing upward (turning on its back), the distance between the functional surface portion 3011 and the predetermined member 3015 is greater than the distance from the functional surface portion 3011 to the rear surface of the back unit 3000. By interposing a long columnar or block-shaped intermediate member 3017, it is possible to avoid contact of the predetermined member 3015 with the rear surface of the back unit 3000, so that the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 is stable when lying on its back. The assembly work from the front end side of the back box 3010 can be facilitated.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B circulates downward in the first vertical portion 2061b of the circulation passage 2061, the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 is formed near the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b. After being detected by the detection sensor 2060 by passing through, it enters the second horizontal portion 2061c from the downstream end below the detection sensor 2060 in the first vertical portion 2061b, and then heads toward the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2061c. The second vertical portion 2061d, which circulates in the lateral direction and extends downward from the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2061c, flows down. At this time, the game ball B that has passed through the detection sensor 2060 comes into contact with the guide portion 2062 provided between the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c, so that the game ball B can be distributed. The direction is changed from the lower side to the lateral direction, and the second horizontal portion 2061c is quickly circulated toward the downstream side. In such a distribution passage 2061, when the starting game ball B (lower game ball B) in contact with the guide portion 2062 comes into contact with the later game ball B (upper game ball B) from above, the ball B (upper game ball B) is brought into contact with the starting game ball B (lower game ball B). The lower game ball B is pressed downstream by the impact and is quickly moved away from the lower position of the detection sensor 2060 by the arc-shaped or linear guide portion 2062, and the repulsive force acting on the upper game ball B is possible. It can be made as small as possible, and the upward bounce of the upper game ball B can be suppressed as much as possible. Therefore, even if the later game ball B comes into contact with the starting game ball B below the detection sensor 2060, the guide unit 2062 promptly shifts the center of the starting game ball B and the later game ball B laterally. As a result, it is possible to suppress the upward bounce of the later game ball B, so that it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and the distribution passage 2061 is distributed. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of accurately detecting (the number of) game balls B to be played.

Further, in this circulation passage 2061, since an arcuate or linear guide portion 2062 is also provided between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d, the second vertical portion 2061b After being detected by the detection sensor 2060 provided in the second horizontal portion 2061c, the game ball B in which the increase in the distribution speed is suppressed by circulating the second horizontal portion 2061c extending in the lateral direction is Since it can be guided downward by the guide portion 2062 provided between the top wall and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d, it can be quickly moved downward of the second vertical portion 2061d. It is possible to suppress that a plurality of game balls B whose momentum is weakened in the lateral portion 2061c are congested, and the later game ball B comes into contact with the congested game ball B on the detection sensor 2060 side. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from bouncing back to the ball, prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and accurately determine (the number) of the game balls B circulating in the distribution passage 2061. Can be detected.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times (also referred to as double count, false detection, etc.) by the detection sensor 2060. Therefore, for example, false detection of the game ball B is possible. It is possible to prevent the granting of benefits such as the payout of the game ball B due to (extra detection), and it is possible to suppress the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Alternatively, as described above, since the double count of the game ball B can be prevented, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy from the count number of the game ball B counted by a separate detection sensor. By avoiding the interruption of the game due to the discrepancy, it is possible to prevent the interruption of the game from causing discomfort to the player and deteriorating the interest.

Further, as described above, since the game ball B can be quickly guided to the downstream side by the guiding unit 2062, it is possible to suppress the game ball B from being stagnant in the distribution passage 2061, and the game ball B is stagnant. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging (ball shavings) due to the above.

Further, since the detection sensor 2060 is provided in the first vertical portion 2061b and the second horizontal portion 2061c extends laterally from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b, the game ball is formed by the second horizontal portion 2061c. It is possible to suppress an increase in the distribution speed of B, and it is possible to weaken the distribution speed (momentum) of the game ball B detected by the detection sensor 2060. The game ball B can be delivered in a good state (for example, a state with little impact, a rectified state, etc.).

Further, since the guiding portion 2062A has an arc shape having a radius larger than the diameter of the gaming ball B, the gaming ball B can be smoothly guided to the downstream side, and the gaming ball B in contact with the guiding portion 2062A is less likely to bounce. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the violence caused by the meandering of the game ball B in the second horizontal portion 2061c and the second vertical portion 2061d, and the game ball B can be quickly distributed to cause ball clogging due to stagnation. Can be prevented.

Further, regarding the action and effect of the induction piece portion 2210 of the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and the guiding piece portion 2050 of the winning opening 2016 of the winning opening unit 2040 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. This will be described in detail. Here, the winning opening unit 2040 will be described as an example, but the side unit 2200 can also exert the same effect. According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a winning opening unit is attached to the front surface of a game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in which a game area 5a is provided in front of the game board 5 via a flange portion 2043. In 2040, the front plate portion 2041 and the receiving portion 2042 form a winning opening 2016 in which the entering direction (accepting direction) is inclined, and when the game ball B in the game area 5a enters the winning opening 2016, The upper end surface (rolling surface) of the rib-shaped guiding piece portion 2050 provided in the receiving portion 2042 is rolled and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. The guide piece portion 2050 has a modified piece portion 2051 that changes the flow direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 whose entry direction is inclined, and the changed piece portion 2051 is referred to in the entry direction. The upper end surface (rolling surface of the game ball B) of the modified piece portion 2051 contains a component in the direction perpendicular to the axis parallel to the ball entry direction because it extends in the direction opposite to the ball entering direction. More specifically, the upper end surface of the modified piece 2051 is a surface obtained by inclining a surface perpendicular to the ball entry direction (a surface facing the ball entry direction). When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2016 whose entry direction is inclined, it first comes into contact with the upper end surface (rolling surface) of the changed piece portion 2051 in the induction piece portion 2050, and the flow direction thereof is the entry direction. The direction is changed from the direction to the rear, and then the guide is guided to the rear downstream passage portion by the upper end surface (rolling surface) of the rear piece portion 2052 of the guide piece portion 2050. At this time, since the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 comes into contact with the upper end surface of the changed piece portion 2051, the impact due to the contact of the game ball B can be received on the surface. Since the ball B does not come into contact with the corners of the guide piece 2050 (changed piece 2051), damage to the guide piece 2050 due to contact with the game ball B can be reduced as much as possible, and the guide piece can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of ball clogging due to damage to the portion 2050, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to the ball clogging, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the player's interest. be able to.

Further, since the winning opening unit 2040 has a modified piece portion 2051 and a rear piece portion 2052 as the guiding piece portion 2050 for guiding the game ball B, the modified piece portion 2051 determines the distribution direction of the game ball B. Since the game ball B whose distribution direction has been changed to the rear can be guided to the rear by the rear piece 2052 as well as being able to be changed from the entry direction to the rear, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be quickly guided to the rear. The game ball B can be delivered to the rear downstream passage portion without any problem.

Further, the guiding piece portion 2050 has a rear piece portion 2052 that extends in a direction different from that of the modified piece portion 2051 and guides the game ball B rearward, and at least the game ball that is guided backward by the rear piece portion 2052. Since B is supported, the game ball B can be reliably guided backward by the rear piece 2052 as compared with the case where the guidance piece 2050 is composed of only the modified piece 2051, and the winning opening It is possible to prevent the distribution of the game ball B from being stopped and stagnated in the unit 2040.

Further, since the winning direction of the winning opening 2016 capable of accepting the game ball B is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the game ball B is received by the movement of the game ball B in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to change the movement of the game ball B in the game area 5a to make it difficult to become monotonous, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B and the direction of entry. It is possible to entertain the acceptance of the game ball B into the winning opening 2016, which is inclined, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the winning opening unit 2040, a low step is formed on the rear side (downstream side) between the receiving portion 2042 (guidance piece portion 2050) and the rear extension portion 2044 (rear guidance piece portion 2045). Since it is possible to prevent the backflow of the game ball B from the rear extending portion 2044 side to the receiving portion 2042 side, the game ball B in the receiving portion 2042 is inclined because the entry direction of the winning opening 2016 is inclined. Even if the height difference of the distribution is small, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 does not return to the winning opening 2016 due to the backflow, and the winning direction is inclined in the game area 5a. The 2016 can be provided, and the winning opening 2016 in which the entry direction is inclined can entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the winning opening unit 2040, since the guiding piece portion 2050 is provided in the receiving portion 2042 that is open in the direction facing the ball entering direction and in the rear, the game ball B guided to the rear is supported from below. The rear piece 2052 is ribbed from the bottom of the receiving portion 2042, and the wall thickness of the receiving portion 2042 can be increased by the amount of the rear piece 2052. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the impact of receiving the game ball B into the winning opening 2016 from directly acting on the receiving portion 2042, it is possible to prevent the receiving portion 2042 from becoming fatigued and easily damaged at an early stage. It is possible to make the receiving portion 2042 (winning opening unit 2040) difficult to damage, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the winning opening unit 2040. , It is possible to entertain the player to accept the game ball B into the winning opening 2016 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the guide piece portion 2050 is extended in a rib shape to guide the game ball B by the upper end surface, the wall thickness can be increased by the amount of the extension of the guide piece portion 2050. Therefore, even if the game ball B vigorously enters the winning opening 2016, the impact can be received by the guiding piece portion 2050, and the guiding piece portion 2050 or the like can be made difficult to be damaged. Therefore, as the winning opening 2016, the parts where the game ball B enters vigorously or is frequently distributed (for example, general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2004, second starting opening 2005, first large winning opening). It can be suitably used for 2006, the second prize opening 2007, etc.).

Further, the winning opening 2016 unit having the winning opening 2016 and the guide piece portion 2050 is provided in front of the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) via the flange portion 2043, that is, at the same position in the front-rear direction as the gaming area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space behind the winning opening 2016 unit. Therefore, by providing a directing device in the space, the pachinko machine 1 can be more entertained by the player. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning opening unit 2030 in which the game ball B is open to be accepted in the game area 5a in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in the game board 5. When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2015 of the upstream passage portion 2031, the game ball B rolls on the rolling surface (upper end surface) of the guide piece portion 2035 protruding upward in a rib shape, and is downstream of the rear. It is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 via the downstream passage portion 2032 connected to the side. The induction piece portion 2035 has a steep piece portion 2035a and a loose piece portion 2035b having different inclination angles, and the steep piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b are inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear. Therefore, when a force including the front from above is applied to the game ball B in contact with the steep piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b, the strength of the force and the angle of the loose piece portion 2035b on the downstream side are determined. Depending on the situation, the game ball B can be stopped as it is, and the position where the game ball B is in contact with the two steep piece portions 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b is set as a specific position. At this time, the two sharp pieces 2035a and the rear end of the game ball B located at a specific position are located behind the rear end of the winning opening 2015 (here, the front end of the game panel 1100). Since the loose piece portion 2035b (induction piece portion 2035) is formed, the game ball B at a specific position is in contact with the rear end (front surface of the game panel 1100) of the winning opening 2015 from above (upper side). When the game ball B) comes into contact with the game ball B), the contact point becomes a position in front of the center of the game ball B at a specific position (lower side). A force including a vector to the rear is applied, the lower game ball B is pressed backward, and the game ball B can be pushed backward, and the game is played at the winning opening 2015 (upstream passage portion 2031). The ball B does not get stuck (ball jam), the game ball B can be discharged rearward satisfactorily, and the ball trash at the winning opening 2015 can be prevented from occurring, so that the game can be played. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that does not cause discomfort to a person and can entertain a player and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the induction piece portion 2035 is composed of the steep piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b having different inclinations, the inclination of the slope portion becomes gentler (closer to horizontal) toward the rear end side, so that the winning opening It is possible to suppress the increase in the circulation speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B that has entered 2015, and it is possible to reduce the momentum of the game ball B that is discharged (released) to the downstream downstream passage portion 2032 behind. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from vigorously contacting the downstream passage portion 2032 provided behind (downstream side) of the upstream passage portion 2031, so that the downstream passage portion 2032 is less likely to be damaged. This makes it possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage to the downstream passage portion 2032 (winning opening unit 2030).

Further, the induction piece portion 2035 is composed of a steep piece portion 2035a and a loose piece portion 2035b having different inclinations, and as described above, the steep piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b suppress the momentum of the game ball B. Since the game ball B can be circulated to the rear downstream passage portion 2032 side in a stable state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging or stagnation on the downstream passage portion 2032 side. , The game ball B can be smoothly discharged from the winning opening unit 2030.

Further, since the guide piece portion 2035 in the upstream passage portion 2031 is projected upward in a rib shape, it is probable that the rear end of the guide piece portion 2035 is provided on the downstream side of the downstream passage portion 2032. Since it is higher than the bottom portion, a step 2033 having a low downstream side can be formed between the upper end surface of the guide piece piece portion 2035 and the bottom portion of the downstream passage portion 2032. Therefore, when the game ball B tries to regurgitate from the downstream passage portion 2032 side to the upstream passage portion 2031 side, it must overcome the step 2033 due to the guide piece portion 2035, and the end face facing the downstream side of the guide piece portion 2035. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball B, the backflow of the game ball B can be prevented. Therefore, even though the player once entered the winning opening 2015 of the upstream passage portion 2031, it flows backward and returns to the winning opening 2015 of the upstream passage portion 2031, and the game ball B can be seen, giving the player a sense of distrust. It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the delay in the distribution of the game ball B in the winning opening unit 2030, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upstream end of the upstream passage portion 2031 of the winning opening unit 2030 provided so as to accept the game ball B in the gaming area 5a where the game is played (winning opening 2015). ), After rolling the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 in the upstream passage portion 2031, it is delivered to the downstream passage portion 2032 and distributed to the downstream side. At this time, it is formed by making the inner circumference of the upstream end of the downstream passage portion 2032 larger than the inner circumference of the downstream end of the upstream passage portion 2032 at the boundary between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032. Since the backflow prevention portion composed of the step 2033 is provided, the subsequent game ball B may bounce to the upstream side when the subsequent (successor) game ball B comes into contact with the preceding game ball B in the downstream passage portion 2032. , Even if the game ball B bounces upstream due to the game ball B coming into contact with the rear wall (not shown) provided behind the upstream end of the downstream passage portion 2032, the bounced game ball B Can be repelled to the downstream side by abutting against the step 2033 as the backflow prevention part, and can be prevented from flowing back to the upstream passage part 2031 side to the upstream end (winning opening 2015) of the upstream passage part 2031. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning, and the subsequent game ball B comes into contact with the bounced game ball B, so that the game ball B stays in the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032. It can be avoided. Therefore, even though the prize is once entered in the winning opening 2015, it flows backward and returns to the winning opening 2015 at the upstream end of the upstream passage portion 2031, and the game ball B can be seen, which gives the player a sense of distrust. It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable or uncomfortable due to the stagnation of the distribution of the game ball B in the flow passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. it can.

In other words, when the game ball B is received at the upstream end (winning opening 2015) of the upstream passage portion 2031, as described above, the backflow prevention provided at the boundary between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032. Since the backflow of the game ball B is prevented by the step 2033 as a part, the game ball B is once accepted (winning), but flows back and returns to the winning opening 2015, and the game ball B is returned from the winning opening 2015. It is reduced that the player feels distrust due to seeing the ball, or the player feels uncomfortable due to the stagnation of the distribution of the game ball B in the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can surely entertain the player to accept the game ball B into the winning opening 2015 and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. Can be done.

Further, since the upstream passage portion 2031 is provided with the guide piece portion 2035 protruding in a rib shape capable of guiding the game ball B, it is probable that the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 are at the boundary. , The induction piece 2035 of the upstream passage 2031 is higher than the bottom of the downstream passage 2032, and the step on the downstream passage 2032 side is low between the upper end surface of the induction piece 2035 and the bottom of the downstream passage 2032. 2033 can be formed. Therefore, when the game ball B tries to flow backward from the downstream passage portion 2032 side to the upstream passage portion 2031 side, it must overcome the step 2033 due to the guide piece portion 2035 of the upstream passage portion 2031, and is downstream of the guide piece portion 2035. When the game ball B comes into contact with the end face facing the side, the backflow of the game ball B can be prevented, so that the backflow of the game ball B can be further prevented, and the above-mentioned effects can be further enhanced. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to play.

Further, since a step 2033 as a backflow prevention portion is provided at the boundary between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, the dimension in the front-rear direction from the upstream end (entrance) of the downstream passage portion 2032 to the rear wall is possible. It can be made relatively small, and the space behind the downstream passage portion 2032 can be made relatively wide. Therefore, behind the downstream passage portion 2032, it is possible to easily provide an effect device capable of performing a predetermined effect (for example, a light emitting effect, a movable effect, an image effect including a moving image, etc.) according to the progress of the game. , The effect device can make the player more entertaining, the player's interest can be suppressed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by the effect device, which strongly attracts the player's attention. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be attached.

Further, since the backflow prevention portion is a step 2033 formed by making the inner circumference of the downstream passage portion 2032 larger than the inner circumference of the upstream passage portion 2031, the backflow prevention portion may be used as a one-way opening / closing piece. In comparison, the configuration of the backflow prevention unit can be simplified, and the increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the game ball B is guided by the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 protruding in a rib shape in the upstream passage portion 2031, and the thickness in the vertical direction is thicker by the amount of the guide piece portion 2035 than the bottom portion. Therefore, even if the game ball B vigorously enters the upstream passage portion 2031, the impact can be received by the guiding piece portion 2035, and the upstream passage portion 2031 can be made difficult to be damaged. .. Therefore, as the upstream passage portion 2031, the parts where the game ball B vigorously enters or frequently circulates (for example, the first starting port 2004, the first large winning opening 2006, and the second large winning opening 2007, Etc.) can be suitably used.

Further, the inner circumference of the upstream end of the downstream passage portion 2032 is made larger than the inner circumference of the downstream end of the upstream passage portion 2031 to intentionally form a step 2033 as a low backflow prevention portion on the downstream passage portion 2302 side. Therefore, the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 are separated from each other, and even if there are manufacturing errors and assembly errors, etc., it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reverse step in which the downstream passage portion 2032 side becomes higher. This makes it possible to prevent problems caused by clogging of the game ball B due to a reverse step, and distrust of the player due to the backflow of the game ball B.

Further, by chamfering the downstream end side of the upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2035 of the upstream passage portion 2031, for example, when a plating layer is provided (plated) on the surface of the upstream passage portion 2031. , It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged due to the plating pool. More specifically, when the upstream passage portion 2031 is plated for decoration or the like, a plating pool is likely to be formed on the end edge thereof, and the downstream end edge of the rolling surface (upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2035) is plated. When the pool is formed, the plating pool bulges upward, so that the game ball B may be caught in the plating pool, which may cause ball clogging. On the other hand, by chamfering the downstream end side of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 in the upstream passage portion 2031, the plating (plating liquid) escapes downward during the plating process to form a plating pool. It can be made difficult, and even if a plating pool is formed, it is possible to prevent the plating pool from bulging above the upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2035, and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the plating pool. can do.

From here to the following paragraph [2016], the action and effect are described by taking the center accessory 2500 as an example, but the same action and effect are also exhibited in the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the gate member 2600. .. According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the center accessory 2500 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, a plurality of pieces for attaching to the game panel 1100 on the flange portion 2502 along the game panel 1100. Since the plurality of mounting portions mounted on the game panel 1100 have the positioning pins 2505 to be inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100, the plurality of positioning pins are provided. With the 2505, the center accessory 2500 can be positioned at a predetermined position on the game panel 1100, and the center accessory can be accurately positioned at a desired position within the game area 5a. Therefore, even if there is a manufacturing error of the center accessory 2500, an assembly error of the pachinko machine 1, or the like, the center accessory 2500 can be accurately mounted at a desired position in the game area 5a. Then, in the center accessory 2500, two sets of mounting portions are provided symmetrically with respect to the center line CL of the advantageous portion (here, the first starting port 2004) in which the player is advantageous in the game area 5a. Therefore, even if the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 expand and contract and deform due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the centers of the two sets of mounting portions are maintained on the center line CL of the first starting port 2004. It is possible to surely prevent the first starting port 2004 from being displaced from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500, and it is intended due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity. It is possible to prevent the game from changing, to entertain the player without discomfort, and to suppress a decline in interest. In other words, since the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 can be accurately positioned directly above the first start port 2004, the game ball B discharged from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is the first. The acceptance probability of being accepted into the start port 2004 can be set within the intended range, the variation for each pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be reduced as much as possible, and the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 can be reduced as much as possible. The game ball B released from the player can be accepted into the first starting port 2004 with an intended acceptance probability, and the player can be entertained as intended and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the flange portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 along the game panel 1100 is provided with a plurality of attachment portions including the attachment hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the center accessory 2500 is provided. By pressing the front surface of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 is provided toward the game panel 1100, the positioning pin 2505 can be easily inserted into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100. At this time, since the positioning pin 2505 is provided so as to avoid the rear of the front plate portion (for example, the center left front plate 2527) that is separated forward from the flange portion 2502, when assembling the pachinko machine 1. When the positioning pin 2505 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the operator can press the front side of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 projects rearward from the front. , The positioning pin 2505 can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, and a strong force does not act on the front plate portion, so that damage to the front plate portion can be avoided, and the pachinko machine can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1. Then, by inserting the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from moving or floating with respect to the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 does not move slightly even if the mounting screw is screwed in and tightened, while the labor required for the assembly work can be facilitated and the cost increase can be suppressed. , The center accessory 2500 can be reliably attached to a predetermined position on the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

Further, since the groove portion 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 in the center accessory 2500, the root of the positioning pin 2505 is the bottom portion of the groove portion 2506 in front of the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 (flange portion 2502). Therefore, even if an R is attached to the base of the positioning pin 2505, the portion of the positioning pin 2505 behind the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 does not become thicker, and the thickness of the effective range of the positioning pin 2505 ( The diameter) can be made uniform, and the positioning pin 2505 can be completely inserted into the positioning hole 1117 until the front surface of the game panel 1100 abuts on the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. Further, even if burrs are generated on the front end edge of the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the burrs are accommodated in the groove portion 2506, so that the burr is accommodated on the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 (flange portion 2502). It is possible to prevent burrs from being pinched between the holes, and the positioning pin 2505 can be completely inserted into the positioning hole 1117. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can surely exert the positioning effect by the positioning pin 2505 and surely exerts the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, as described above, even if the positioning pin 2505 has an R at the base, the portion thickened by the R is moved forward from the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 (flange portion 2502) due to the presence of the groove portion 2506. Therefore, the thickened portion of the base of the positioning pin 2505 causes incomplete insertion into the positioning hole 1117, resulting in a gap between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500. There is no. Further, since the burr generated at the front end edge of the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100 can be accommodated in the groove portion 2506, the burr causes the burr at the portion having the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 of the center accessory 2500. There is no gap between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500. Therefore, the center accessory 2500 is not attached to the game panel 1100 with a gap between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and the center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1100. However, there is no rattling.

Further, since the groove portion 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505, the positioning pin 2505 is formed at the position of the positioning pin 2505 in the flange portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 during injection molding of the center accessory 2500. Due to the difference in plate thickness due to the presence of

Further, since a plurality of mounting portions composed of a set of the mounting holes 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 are provided on the seat surface portion 2507 that projects stepwise from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 to the rear, the center accessory 2500 can be played. When attached to the front surface of the panel 1100, the seat surface portion 2507 abuts on the front surface of the game panel 1100, so that a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the game panel 1100 and the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 excluding the seat surface portion 2507. Therefore, even if the rear surface (flange portion 2502) of the center accessory 2500 is wavy when the center accessory 2500 is injection-molded, the unevenness due to the waviness can be absorbed by the gap, and the seat surface portion 2507. The center accessory 2500 can be attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 in good condition.

Further, since the seat surface portion 2507 is provided with the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505, the seat surface portion is different from the game panel 1100 even if the expansion / contraction rate of the center accessory 2500 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity is different. The gap between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 by 2507 can absorb (accommodate) the distortion of the center accessory 2500 due to the difference in expansion and contraction between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and the game panel 1100 can be centered. The accessory 2500 can be securely attached.

Further, since the seat surface portion 2507 is provided with a mounting portion consisting of a mounting hole 2504 and a positioning pin 2505, when the center accessory 2500 is made transparent, the teardrop-shaped outer shape of the seat surface portion 2507 can be visually recognized from the front side. Therefore, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the position of the attachment hole 2504 can be easily grasped by the seat surface portion 2507, and the time and effort required for attachment can be facilitated.

Further, since the flange portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 is provided with a mounting hole 2504 or the like, the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 (screw hole 1116) through the mounting hole 2504 and tightened to tighten the rear surface of the flange portion 2502. Can be brought into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, so that the frictional resistance between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 becomes higher, so that the center accessory 2500 in the direction along the surface of the game panel 1100 It can be made difficult to move, and the center accessory 2500 can be more firmly attached to the game panel 1100. Further, since the flange portion 2502 along the game panel 1100 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 extending in the direction intersecting the flange portion 2502 in the center accessory 2500 increases the strength and rigidity of the center accessory 2500. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the center accessory 2500 provided in the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from moving or deforming. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reliably exerting an intended game by the center accessory 2500, entertaining a player, and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game is a combination of a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. It may be applied to the machine, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. It can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which the player does not touch the game ball B and game machines called managed game machines.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5A Game board 5B Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 3000 Back unit (rear unit)
3010 Back box (holding body)
3010a Opening 3011 Functional surface (specific surface)
3012 Functional hole 3015 Predetermined member 3016 Intermediate member 3017 Intermediate member 3200 Back front peripheral decoration unit 3201 Back front peripheral decoration (decorative body)

Claims (1)

A flat-shaped game panel with a game area in front of which the game is played,
It includes a decorative body that is visible through the opening of the game panel, and a rear unit that holds the decorative body and has a holding body that is attached to the rear side of the game panel. It ’s a game machine,
The rear unit
A specific surface portion is provided behind the front surface of the decorative body and behind the front surface of the holding body.
The specific surface portion is
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided at a plurality of locations of the rear unit and is visibly provided from the outside side of the rear unit.